WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and
lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself
to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................9
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................18
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................97
4STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................126
5MULTIMEDIA ..............................................................................................................................235
6SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................285
7IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................344
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................367
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................439
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................452
11INDEX.............................................................................................................................................456
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY........................................................ 10
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS........................... 10
CONSUMER INFORMATION —
TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING ................................... 10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.......... 12
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.............................................. 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................... 18
Key Fob .............................................................18
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 21
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 21
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .........................21
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) ... 22
How To Use Remote Start................................23
To Exit Remote Start Mode..............................24
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped........................................................24
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped........................................................24
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped ..................................25
Remote Start Abort Message ..........................25
REMOTE START— IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) ........... 25
How To Use Remote Start................................25
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....26
To Arm The System ..........................................26
To Disarm The System.....................................26
Rearming Of The System .................................27
Security System Manual Override...................27
DOORS ....................................................................27
Manual Door Locks ..........................................27
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ....................28
Power Side Steps — If Equipped ....................28
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
(If Equipped) ....................................................28
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit —
If Equipped........................................................30
Automatic Door Locks —
If Equipped........................................................30
Child-Protection Door Lock .............................30
STEERING WHEEL .................................................31
Tilt Steering Column.........................................31
Heated Steering Wheel —
If Equipped .......................................................32
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................................................32
Introducing Voice Recognition.........................32
Basic Voice Commands ...................................32
Get Started .......................................................33
Additional Information .....................................33
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED.....34
Programming The Memory Feature ................34
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory................................34
Memory Position Recall ...................................35
SEATS...................................................................... 35
Manual Front Seat Adjustment.......................35
Manual Rear Seat Adjustment........................36
Power Driver Seat Adjustment —
If Equipped .......................................................37
Heated Seats — If Equipped............................38
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......................39
Head Restraints ...............................................40
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IF EQUIPPED .......................................................... 42
MIRRORS ............................................................... 43
Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................43
Illuminated Vanity Mirror —
If Equipped .......................................................44
Outside Mirrors ................................................44
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ..........................45
Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard
And Trailer Tow — If Equipped.........................46
Power Convex Mirror Switch —
If Equipped .......................................................46
Trailer Towing Mirrors —
If Equipped ......................................................47
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .........................47
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse —
If Equipped .......................................................47
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED ............................ 48
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®.......................................................48
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ............48
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device...................48
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener .....................................................49
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device ......................................50
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button ...............................................................50
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........50
Security .............................................................51
Troubleshooting Tips........................................51
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 51
Headlight Switch...............................................51
Multifunction Lever ..........................................52
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped........................................................52
High/Low Beam Switch....................................52
Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control — If Equipped.......................................53
Flash-To-Pass....................................................53
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..............53
Directional LED Headlamp
System — If Equipped.......................................53
Parking Lights And Panel Lights......................53
Automatic Headlights With Wipers .................54
Headlight Delay ................................................54
Lights-On Reminder .........................................54
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .......................54
Turn Signals......................................................55
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................55
Cargo Lights/Trailer Spotter Lights/Trailer
Hitch Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped .....55
Battery Saver....................................................56
INTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................56
Courtesy Lights.................................................56
Illuminated Entry .............................................58
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS...............58
Windshield Wiper Operation............................59
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ...............59
CLIMATE CONTROLS .............................................60
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions...................................................60
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions ..................................................63
Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC).....................................................65
Climate Voice Recognition —
If Equipped........................................................65
Operating Tips .................................................66
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............... 67
Storage .............................................................67
USB/AUX Control..............................................72
Electrical Power Outlets...................................73
Power Inverter — If Equipped .........................74
Wireless Charging Pad —
If Equipped ......................................................76
WINDOWS ............................................................. 77
Power Windows ...............................................77
Automatic Window Features ...........................77
Reset Auto-Up ..................................................78
Window Lockout Switch...................................78
Power Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped ......................................................78
Manual Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped .......................................................78
Wind Buffeting .................................................78
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .................... 79
Single Pane Power Sunroof ............................79
HOOD....................................................................... 80
To Open The Hood ...........................................80
To Close The Hood ...........................................80
TAILGATE ................................................................ 81
Opening.............................................................81
Closing ..............................................................81
Tailgate Removal..............................................81
Bed Step — If Equipped ...................................83
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
PICKUP BOX .......................................................... 84
Cargo Camera — If Equipped...........................85
Bed Rail Tie-Down System —
If Equipped .......................................................86
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED...................................... 87
Locking And Unlocking RamBox......................87
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins............................88
RamBox Safety Warning ..................................89
Bed Divider — If Equipped................................90
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED ...... 91
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal ....................91
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation ................93
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning ....................96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER — GAS ENGINE ...................................... 97
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster
Descriptions — Gas Engine..............................98
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
GAS ENGINE ........................................................... 99
Premium Instrument Cluster
Descriptions — Gas Engine........................... 100
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
DIESEL ENGINE ...................................................101
Base Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
Diesel Engine................................................. 102
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL
ENGINE ................................................................ 103
Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
Diesel Engine................................................. 104
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .................... 104
Instrument Cluster Display Controls ............ 105
Oil Life Reset ................................................ 105
Display Menu Items ...................................... 106
Diesel Messages And Warnings — 6.7L
Cummins® Diesel Engine............................. 110
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ................................... 113
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................. 114
Red Warning Lights....................................... 114
Yellow Warning Lights................................... 117
Yellow Indicator Lights.................................. 120
Green Indicator Lights .................................. 122
White Indicator Lights ................................... 123
Blue Indicator Lights ..................................... 124
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ..... 124
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity ................................... 124
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS.......................................................... 125
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE
ENGINE .................................................................126
Automatic Transmission ............................... 126
Tip Start Feature .......................................... 126
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition .................. 126
Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button ........................................................... 126
AutoPark — Rotary Shifter and 8-Speed
Transmission Only......................................... 127
If Engine Fails To Start ................................. 128
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............................ 129
After Starting ................................................. 129
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE.......129
Automatic Transmission ............................... 130
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition .................. 130
Extreme Cold Weather.................................. 132
Normal Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold
Air Temperature Above 66° F (19° C) ........ 132
Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Air
Temperature 0°F To 66°F
(–18°C to 19°C)........................................... 132
Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Air
Temperature Below 0°F (-18°C) ................. 133
Starting Fluids ............................................... 134
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE .........135
Cold Weather Precautions............................ 135
Engine Idling ................................................. 136
Noise .............................................................. 137
Stopping The Engine ..................................... 138
Idle Shutdown................................................ 138
Programmable Maximum Vehicle Speed .... 138
Operating Precautions .................................. 138
Cooling System Tips ...................................... 139
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED..........139
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE ..............................................140
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE ....................................................140
PARKING BRAKE ................................................140
DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE — ENGINE BRAKING
(IF EQUIPPED) .....................................................141
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............................142
Ignition Park Interlock................................... 143
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System .......................................................... 144
8-Speed Automatic Transmission —
If Equipped .................................................... 144
6-Speed Automatic Transmission —
If Equipped..................................................... 147
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED .............152
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION ..........................152
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................... 152
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(8-Speed Transmission) — If Equipped ....... 152
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(6-Speed Transmission) — If Equipped........ 155
Manually Shifted Transfer Case —
If Equipped..................................................... 158
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ..... 160
Description .................................................... 160
Air Suspension Modes .................................. 160
Instrument Cluster Display Messages......... 161
Operation ....................................................... 161
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — POWER WAGON
MODELS ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)........................... 161
STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER
WAGON ONLY...................................................... 163
SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER
WAGON ONLY ..................................................... 164
Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle
Characteristics .............................................. 164
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand................... 165
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
Points)............................................................ 166
Hill Climbing................................................... 167
Driving Through Water .................................. 168
Airing Down For Off-Road Driving................. 170
Vehicle Recovery ........................................... 170
After Driving Off-Road ................................... 172
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL ............................ 172
WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY
(IF EQUIPPED) .....................................................173
Things To Know Before Using Your Winch... 173
Understanding The Features Of Your
Winch ............................................................. 173
Winch Accessories ....................................... 174
Operating Your Winch .................................. 174
Rigging Techniques ...................................... 180
HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING.........................181
Hydraulic Power Steering Fluid Check......... 181
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED .... 182
Cruise Control ............................................... 182
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)...................... 184
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................193
ParkSense Sensors....................................... 193
ParkSense Warning Display ......................... 193
ParkSense Display ........................................ 193
Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear
ParkSense ..................................................... 196
Service The ParkSense Front/Rear Park
Assist System ................................................ 196
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 196
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 196
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............................198
LaneSense Operation ................................... 198
Turning LaneSense On Or Off....................... 198
LaneSense Warning Message...................... 198
Changing LaneSense Status ........................ 200
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ..............200
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................202
TRAILER CAMERAS — IF EQUIPPED..................207
Trailer Surround View Camera System ........ 207
AUX Camera................................................... 210
ENGINE RUNAWAY — DIESEL ENGINE..............211
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE
ENGINE .................................................................211
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .................... 212
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE ..212
Diesel Exhaust Fluid...................................... 213
VEHICLE LOADING ..............................................215
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .......... 215
Payload .......................................................... 215
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)................ 215
Tire Size.......................................................... 216
Rim Size ......................................................... 216
Inflation Pressure .......................................... 216
Curb Weight ................................................... 216
Loading .......................................................... 216
TRAILER TOWING ................................................216
Common Towing Definitions......................... 216
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer
Weight ............................................................ 220
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ............................................ 220
Trailer And Tongue Weight............................ 220
Towing Requirements .................................. 221
Towing Tips ................................................... 226
SNOWPLOW ........................................................ 227
Before Plowing............................................... 227
Snowplow Prep Package Model
Availability...................................................... 227
Over The Road Operation With Snowplow
Attached......................................................... 228
Operating Tips ............................................... 228
General Maintenance ................................... 228
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) .................................... 229
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ........................................................... 229
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Models ........................................................... 230
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models ........................................................... 230
DRIVING TIPS....................................................... 233
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ....................... 233
Driving Through Water ................................. 233
Off-Road Driving Tips .................................... 234
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ........................................ 235
CYBERSECURITY ................................................ 235
UCONNECT SETTINGS ........................................ 236
Customer Programmable Features.............. 236
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION ............................... 256
System Overview .......................................... 256
Safety And General Information................... 258
UCONNECT MODES .............................................259
Steering Wheel Audio Controls —
If Equipped .................................................... 259
Radio Mode .................................................. 259
Media Mode ................................................. 266
Phone Mode ................................................. 269
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES......278
Regulatory And Safety Information.............. 279
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ....................279
Off-Road Pages Status Bar........................... 280
Vehicle Dynamics.......................................... 281
Accessory Gauge........................................... 282
Pitch & Roll .................................................... 283
Suspension.................................................... 284
Forward Facing Camera................................ 284
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ..............................................285
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 285
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ....... 286
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ..........................292
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped ................................................... 292
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped............................... 298
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ... 300
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ....................307
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 307
Important Safety Precautions....................... 307
Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 308
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 316
Child Restraints ............................................. 323
SAFETY TIPS ........................................................340
Transporting Passengers.............................. 340
Transporting Pets ......................................... 340
Connected Vehicles....................................... 340
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................... 340
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................................... 342
Exhaust Gas................................................... 342
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ......................... 343
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ........................344
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....345
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................348
Preparations For Jacking .............................. 348
Jack Location................................................. 349
Removal Of Jack And Tools........................... 349
Removing The Spare Tire.............................. 351
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 352
To Stow The Flat Or Spare ........................... 355
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools................... 356
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers —
If Equipped..................................................... 357
JUMP STARTING ................................................. 358
Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 358
Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 359
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE.............................. 360
6–Speed Transmission ................................ 360
MANUAL PARK RELEASE................................... 361
8–Speed Transmission................................. 361
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .......................... 362
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............................. 363
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ......................... 364
Two-Wheel Drive Models .............................. 365
Four-Wheel Drive Models ............................. 365
Emergency Tow Hooks —
If Equipped..................................................... 366
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) .................................................. 366
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ........................ 366
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ................................... 367
Maintenance Plan — Gasoline Engine ......... 369
Maintenance Plan — Diesel Engine ............ 371
ENGINE COMPARTMENT.................................... 376
6.4L Gasoline Engine ................................... 376
6.7L Diesel Engine — 6-Speed 68RFE ........ 377
6.7L Diesel Engine — 6-Speed AS69RC HD....378
Checking Oil Level......................................... 379
Adding Washer Fluid .................................... 379
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 379
Pressure Washing ......................................... 380
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ....................................380
Engine Oil ...................................................... 380
Engine Oil Filter ............................................. 381
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............................... 381
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................... 383
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................... 386
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter —
Diesel Engine ................................................ 386
Engine Mounted Fuel Filter Replacement —
Diesel Engine................................................. 387
Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter
Replacement — Diesel Engine...................... 388
Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of
Fuel — Diesel Engine..................................... 389
Intervention Regeneration Strategy —
Message Process Flow ................................ 390
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ........................... 390
Body Lubrication ........................................... 390
Windshield Wiper Blades.............................. 391
Exhaust System ............................................ 393
Cooling System ............................................. 394
Charge Air Cooler — Inter-Cooler ................. 396
Brake System ............................................... 396
Automatic Transmission ............................... 397
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle
Fluid Level ..................................................... 399
Transfer Case ............................................... 400
Noise Control System Required
Maintenance & Warranty ............................ 400
FUSES ............................................................ 403
BULB REPLACEMENT.................................... 410
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
TIRES .....................................................................417
Tire Safety Information ................................ 417
Tires — General Information ......................... 423
Tire Types....................................................... 427
Spare Tires — If Equipped ............................ 427
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ........................ 429
Snow Traction Devices ................................. 430
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................ 432
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ......................................433
Treadwear...................................................... 433
Traction Grades............................................. 434
Temperature Grades..................................... 434
STORING THE VEHICLE ......................................434
BODYWORK..........................................................435
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 435
Body And Underbody Maintenance.............. 435
Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 435
INTERIORS ...........................................................437
Seats And Fabric Parts.................................. 437
Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 438
Leather Surfaces........................................... 438
Glass Surfaces .............................................. 438
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ........ 439
BRAKE SYSTEM .................................................. 439
Hydraulic Brake Assist —
If Equipped..................................................... 439
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.. 439
Torque Specifications ................................... 439
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE... 441
6.4L Engine ................................................... 441
Reformulated Gasoline ................................ 441
Materials Added To Fuel............................... 441
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends......................... 442
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles.......................................................... 442
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 442
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline...................... 442
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 442
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE ........ 443
Fuel Specifications ....................................... 444
Biodiesel Fuel Requirements ....................... 444
FLUID CAPACITIES ............................................. 446
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .................. 447
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............... 450
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ....................................................452
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 452
Prepare A List ................................................ 452
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 452
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................452
FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 452
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .............. 452
Mexico............................................................ 452
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............... 453
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)......................... 453
Service Contract............................................ 453
WARRANTY INFORMATION................................453
MOPAR® PARTS .................................................454
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................454
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C............................................ 454
In Canada ...................................................... 454
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................454
GENERAL INFORMATION....................................455
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Ram vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers
differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version
of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering,
transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving
off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial
and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 233.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained
in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced.
For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an
authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your
satisfaction.
1
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body
builders. US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section 2.1.C. Canadian
residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty Information.
Such equipment includes video monitors, DVD/Blu-Ray™, heaters, stoves,
refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on these items, contact the
applicable manufacturer.
CONSUMER INFORMATION — TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING
This information is provided in fulfillment of the requirement by the United
States Government, Department of Transportation, National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration, that “every manufacturer of trucks that are capable of
accommodating slide-in campers, manufactured on or after April 1, 1973 shall
provide... at the time of original purchase to the first person who purchases the
truck”... information on Truck Camper Loading.
A slide-in camper document is provided in your vehicle’s glove compartment
that contains your Vehicle Identification Number, truck model, cargo weight
rating, and the forward/rearward limit of a camper. To obtain additional
dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle, please visit
https://www.ramtrucks.com.
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may result
in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on
a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Figure 1 illustrates the dimensions describing the forward and rearward limits of the zone in which the Center of Gravity (CG) of a slide-in camper must be located,
to provide satisfactory vehicle handling and to prevent overload of the front and rear axles.
Figure 2 illustrates a proper match between truck and camper.
NOTE:
The camper Center of Gravity falls within the specified zone.
A — Forward Limit of Camper CG
B — Rearward Limit of Camper CG
1
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the truck
consists of the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of installed
additional camper equipment not included in the manufacturer’s camper weight
figure, the weight of camper cargo, and the weight of passengers in the camper.
The total cargo load should not exceed the truck’s cargo weight rating and the
camper’s CG should fall within the truck’s recommended CG zone when installed.
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of
your vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the
front and rear wheels separately, to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads
should not exceed either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of
the axle loads should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to get the total weight
below the ratings.
NOTE:
These ratings are also provided on the vehicle certification label located on the
driver’s side B-pillar. See Ú page 215 for more information.
For any additional instructions, please contact your conversion/camper
manufacturer or an authorized dealer.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
each symbol Ú page 114.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 114
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 115
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 115
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 115
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 116
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 116
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 116
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 116
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 116
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 116
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
Ú page 116
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 117
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 117
Red Warning Lights
Yellow Warning Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 117
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light
Ú page 117
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 117
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
Ú page 119
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 118
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 117
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 118
LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 118
1
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 118
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 118
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
Ú page 118
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light
Ú page 118
Rear Axle Locker Fault Warning Light
Ú page 119
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian
Emergency Braking (PEB) Light
Ú page 119
Service LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 119
Service 4WD Warning Light
Ú page 119
Yellow Warning Lights
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
Ú page 119
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 119
Yellow Indicator Lights
Air Suspension Payload Protection Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Air Suspension Alternate Trailer Height Indicator Light
Ú page 120
Air Suspension Bed Lowering Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Yellow Warning Lights
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
15
Cargo Light
Ú page 121
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian Emergency
Braking (PEB) Off Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 121
4WD Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 122
4WD Low Indicator Light
Ú page 122
4WD High Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Yellow Indicator Lights
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator Light
Ú page 121
NEUTRAL Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Snowplow Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Sway Bar Indicator Light
Ú page 122
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Yellow Indicator Lights
1
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16
Wait To Start Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Water In Fuel Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected
Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Automatic Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Yellow Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
Ú page 122
ECO Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 123
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 123
Green Indicator Lights
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
17
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
Ú page 123
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 124
1
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), and Remote Start
(if equipped). The key fob allows you to lock or unlock
all doors, tailgate, and the RamBox (if equipped) as well
as activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need
to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
The key fob also contains an emergency key, which is
stored in the rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
result in poor performance.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless
Charging Pad, the key fob may not be detected
if it is placed within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad
Ú page 76.
With the ignition in the ON position and the
vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE
commands are disabled.
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be
verified by referring to the instrument cluster,
which will display directions to follow.
NOTE:
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by
a message in the instrument cluster display, or by
the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light
no longer illuminates from key fob button pushes,
then the key fob battery requires replacement
Ú page 455.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s door, or, twice within
five seconds to unlock all doors, the tailgate and
the RamBox (if equipped). To lock all the doors and
the tailgate, push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash and the illuminated entry system will be
activated. When the doors are locked, the turn
signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button. The horn chirp when the
lock button is pushed can be programmed on/off
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 236.
1 — Unlock
2 — Tailgate Release (If Equipped)
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start (If Equipped)
5 — Panic
6 — Emergency Key
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and
visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times
along with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior
lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in
order for the vehicle to check for the presence of
a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will not
activate until all of the doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations
where the vehicle’s engine is left running with
the key fob inside.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery model is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on the
key fob above the top row buttons blinks when
a button is pressed. The coin battery should last
a minimum of three years with normal vehicle
usage.
1. Remove the emergency key (1) by pushing
the emergency key release button (2) on the
side of the key fob, and pulling the emergency
key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing
down, and locate the small rectangular gap on
the left side between the housing and the back
cover of the key fob. Use a small screwdriver
(or similar tool) to pry open the left side of the
fob cover while applying pressure until the
cover snaps open.
3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the key
fob, which is positioned farther to the edge
than the left side gap. Pry open the right side,
and remove the back cover.
4. Remove the battery by using a suitable tool,
such as a screwdriver, to slide the battery
downward and back toward the key ring.
Key Fob Battery Location
1 — Emergency Key
2 — Emergency Key Release Button
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign on
the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean
it with rubbing alcohol.
5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to
push down and slide the battery under the
small lip on the top edge of the opening.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the top
edge of the back cover with the top of the fob,
and press the edges into the interlocking
hinges until all edges snap together with no
large visual gaps.
7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks into
place.
NOTE:
The key fob battery should only be replaced by
qualified technicians. If the battery requires
replacement, see an authorized dealer.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
match the vehicle locks.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
in just two hours and can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from chil-
dren. If the battery compartment does not
close securely, stop using the product and
keep it away from children.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
Always remember to place the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the OFF position.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from
another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on
after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob
is used to start the engine but there is an issue
with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start
and shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized
dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 455.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several
operating modes that are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. These modes are OFF, ACC,
ON/RUN, and START.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks,
alarm, etc.) are still available
ACC
Engine is not started
Some electrical devices are available
(e.g. power sunroof, power windows, etc.)
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket Remote Start
systems. Use of these systems may result in
vehicle starting problems and loss of security
protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RUN
Driving position
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, heated seats, etc.)
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the brake)
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change the mode by
pushing the button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a backup method
can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the
nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of
the key fob against the START/STOP ignition button
and push to operate the ignition switch.
Backup Starting Method
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next
to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal and prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ system from starting the vehicle.
For more information on engine starting proce-
dures, see Ú page 126.
When opening the driver's door and the ignition
is in the ON/RUN (engine not running) position,
a chime will sound to remind you to place the
ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the
chime, the message “Ignition or Accessory ON”
will display in the instrument cluster display.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
(GASOLINE)
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of approximately
300 ft (91 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the driver enters the
vehicle.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob
may reduce this range Ú page 455.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts
the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
the vehicle will start and then shut down in
10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion before the Remote Start sequence can be
repeated for a third cycle.
If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote
Start will automatically lock the doors.
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
System not disabled from previous Remote
Start event
Vehicle Security system not active
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not
illuminated
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, push and release the START/STOP ignition
button while pressing the brake pedal prior to the
end of the 15 minute cycle.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if
the Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed
again, or if the engine is allowed to run for the
entire 15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position, the climate controls
will resume the previously set operations
(temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the message
“Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will
display in the instrument cluster display until
you push the START/STOP ignition button.
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
system will automatically activate front defrost for
15 minutes or less. The timing is dependent on the
ambient temperature. Once the timer expires,
the system will automatically adjust the settings
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat
feature will turn on if programmed in the comfort
menu screen within Uconnect Settings
Ú
page 236.
In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature
will automatically turn on when Remote Start is
activated, if programmed in the comfort menu
screen. The vehicle will adjust the climate control
settings depending on the outside ambient
temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to an
optimal temperature and mode, dependent on the
outside ambient temperature. When the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, the climate
controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based
on the last settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to
MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 60.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings
will change, and exit the automatic defaults, if
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
manually adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is
in Remote Start mode. This includes turning the
climate controls off using the OFF button.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E-ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation.
If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the
timer and operation will continue.
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start, or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
REMOTE START— IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL)
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of approximately
300 ft (91 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the driver enters the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key
fob may reduce this range.
The Remote Start system will wait for the Wait
To Start Indicator Light to extinguish before
cranking the engine. This allows time for the
engine preheat cycle to heat the cylinder air,
and is normal in cold weather. For further infor-
mation on the Wait To Start Indicator Light and
the preheat cycle, see Ú page 122.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts
the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
Water In Fuel Indicator Light is not illuminated
Wait To Start Indicator Light is not illuminated
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illumi-
nated
For additional functions of the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 24.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
doors, hood, tailgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the
Vehicle Security system is armed, interior switches
for door locks and tailgate release are disabled.
If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle
Security system will provide the following
audible and visible signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument
cluster will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,
make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior power
door lock switch with the driver and/or
passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail-
able in the same exterior zone Ú page 28.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using
any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
the door Ú page 28.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
disarm the Vehicle Security system. Use of the
door key cylinder when the system is armed will
sound the alarm when the door is opened.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed
when the power tailgate (if equipped) is opened
using the tailgate button on the key fob.
If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock
the tailgate, the Vehicle Security system is
disarmed and the rest of the vehicle doors will
remain locked unless all doors are set to unlock
on first press within Uconnect Settings.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock
the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has
occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
(Continued)
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash,
and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will
turn the horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five
seconds between cycles and up to eight cycles if
the trigger remains active) and then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock
the doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob.
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock the front
doors, pull the inside door handle to the first
detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock
knob on the door trim panel upward. If the lock
knob is down when the door is closed, the door will
lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside
the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE:
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Vehicle Security system.
Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
For personal security and safety in the event
of an collision, lock the vehicle doors as you
drive as well as when you park and leave the
vehicle.
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the auto-
matic transmission into PARK, apply the
parking brake, place the ignition in the OFF
position, remove the key fobs from vehicle,
and lock all doors. and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving chil-
dren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING!
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
The power door lock switches are located on each
front door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock
the doors.
Power Door Lock Switches
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the
key fob is detected inside the vehicle when the
door lock button on the front door panel is used to
lock the door. This will occur for two attempts.
Upon the third attempt, the doors will lock even if
the key fob is inside.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless
signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door may
not unlock automatically.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and the driver's
door is open, the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle without first unlocking the door.
The door may be unlocked manually by raising the
lock knob.
POWER SIDE STEPS — IF EQUIPPED
The Power Side Steps will extend a step for easier
entry and exit of the vehicle.
When configured for Auto mode, the Power Side
Steps will deploy when any of the doors are
opened, or when the deploy setting is activated
through the touchscreen. When configured for
Store mode, the steps will not deploy unless the
setting is selected manually through the Controls
menu within the touchscreen.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), or if
the retract setting is selected within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 236, the steps will retract.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on or off
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 236.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless
signal and prevent the Passive Entry system
from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
Passive Entry unlock initiates illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate lamp,
position lamps) for whichever duration is set
between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry
unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn
signal lamps.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a
slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will relock and (if equipped) will arm the
Vehicle Security system.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock all
doors and the tailgate automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door
handle, depending on the selected setting in the
Uconnect system Ú page 236.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle,
the Passive Entry system is equipped with an
automatic door unlock feature which will function if
the ignition is in the OFF position.
There are five situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry
key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When the Vehicle Security system is in pre-arm
or armed status and the tailgate transitions
from open to closed.
When the tailgate transitions from open to
closed and Remote Start is active.
When any of these situations occur, after all open
doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be
executed. If it detects a Passive Entry key fob inside
the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and alert the
customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the
vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when
any of the following conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the doors
are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry
door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Tailgate:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within
5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handles, pushing the
Passive Entry lock button will lock the vehicle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door
handle. This is done to allow you to check if the
vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle
without the vehicle unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
Settings, the key fob protection described in
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is depleted Ú page 18.
The LED light on the key fob will not blink if
the key fob battery is low or fully depleted,
but a low key fob battery condition will still
support the Passive Entry system function-
ality. When the key fob battery is low, the
instrument cluster will display a message
indicating that the key fob battery is low
Ú page 455.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT —
I
F EQUIPPED
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks after the following sequence
of actions:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
is enabled within Uconnect Settings
Ú
page 236.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is
placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
The auto door lock feature is enabled/disabled within
the Uconnect Settings
Ú
page 236.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat
blade screwdriver, and rotate the dial to the lock
or unlock position. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using
the outside door handle even if the inside door lock
is in the unlocked position.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Child Lock Control
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using
the outside door handle even though the inside
door lock is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked
position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
pull up on the door lock knob (unlocked posi-
tion), roll down the window, and open the door
with the outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
effective engagement by trying to open a door with
the internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door
Lock system is engaged, it is impossible to open the
doors from inside the vehicle. Before getting out of
the vehicle, be sure to check that there is no one left
inside.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on
the steering column, below the multifunction lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock
the steering column. With one hand firmly on the
steering wheel, move the steering column up or
down, as desired. Release the lever to lock the
steering column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Lever
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors cannot
be opened from the inside door handle when the
Child Protection Door Locks are engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating
element that helps warm your hands in
cold weather. The heated steering wheel
has only one temperature setting. Once
the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it
will stay on until the operator turns it off. The
heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is
already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located on the
center of the instrument panel below the radio
screen, and within the Climate or Controls screen
of the touchscreen.
Push the heated steering wheel button once to
turn the heating element on.
Push the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 24.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION —
IF EQUIPPED
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the
Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you
have the Uconnect 5 NAV system. If not, you have
a Uconnect 5 with 8.4-inch display system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button or for the Uconnect 5/5 NAV,
say the vehicle’s Wake Up word, “Hey Uconnect”.
After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions must exercise care when using the
steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or steering wheel covers of any type or mate-
rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater
to overheat.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
NOTE:
On Uconnect 5 systems, the factory default Wake
Up word is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be repro-
grammed through the Uconnect Settings.
GET STARTED
All you need to control your Uconnect system with
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit
UconnectPhone.com
to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to find
phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead. The microphone
is located in the headliner and aimed at the
driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the VR or Phone button,
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice
Command. You can also say the vehicle “Wake
Up” word and state your command. Some
examples of “Wake Up” words include
“Hey Uconnect” or “Hey Ram”.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button
and saying a Voice Command from the current
category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon-
nect.ca
or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visit www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian
or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit https://www.driveu-
connect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian
or call:
1-877-324-9091
1 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles
Equipped With Navigation: Push The Voice Recog-
nition Button To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation,
Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone Call, And Send
Or Receive A Text
1 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles
Not Equipped With Navigation: Push The Phone
Button To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2 — Push To Answer A Phone Call
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall through
a memory switch. Each memory profile saves
desired position settings for the following features:
Driver’s seat
Easy Entry/Exit Seat operation (if equipped)
Adjustable pedals (if equipped)
Side mirrors
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
If equipped with power convex mirrors, these
mirror positions will not set as part of a memory
profile Ú page 43.
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each
can be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
The driver memory settings switch is located on the
driver door, next to the door handle, and consists
of three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two saved memory profiles.
Driver Memory Settings Buttons
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the
selected profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors,
adjustable pedals (if equipped), and radio
station presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch,
and then push the desired memory button
(1 or 2) within five seconds. The instrument
cluster display will show which memory
position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE
K
EYLESS ENTRY KEY FOB TO MEMORY
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of
two saved memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must select
the “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature
through the Uconnect system Ú page 236.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed by
pushing the unlock button on the key fob within
10 seconds.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will display in the instrument
cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two,
push the desired memory button number (1 or 2)
or the unlock button on the key fob linked to the
desired memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When
a recall is canceled, the driver seat will stop
moving. A delay of one second will occur before
another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
of the vehicle.
MANUAL FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Both front seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is
located under the seat cushion at the front edge of
each seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and
slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar
once you have reached the desired position. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rearward
on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of
the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly,
lift the lever, lean back to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback to its
normal upright position, lean forward and lift the
lever. Release the lever once the seatback is in the
upright position.
Manual Recline Lever
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The
outboard seat portions are each 40% of the total
width of the seat. If equipped, the back of the
center portion (20%) easily folds down to provide
an armrest/center storage compartment.
MANUAL REAR SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the
seat cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward
on the handle, lean back on the seatback and
when you reach the desired position, release the
handle.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
WARNING!
Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while
actuating the handle. The seatback may swing
forward and hit you causing injury.
To avoid injury, place your hand on the seat-
back and actuate the handle, then position
the seatback in the desired position.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top
of the seatback. This could impair visibility or
become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop
or collision.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
POWER DRIVER SEAT ADJUSTMENT —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with an eight-way
power driver's seat. The power seat switches are
located on the outboard side of the driver's seat
cushion. There are two power seat switches that
are used to control the movement of the seat
cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the power seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down
by using the power seat switch. The seat will move
in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up
or down using the power seat switch. The front of
the seat cushion will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward
or rearward by using the power seat switch.
The seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position is
reached.
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger
seats may also be equipped with power lumbar.
The power lumbar switch is located on the
outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch
forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the
switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.
Lumbar Control Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on
where you have the driver’s seat positioned when
you place the ignition in the OFF position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position, the driver’s seat will move about 2.4 inches
(6 cm) rearward if the driver’s seat position is
greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (6.77 cm)
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its
previously set position when you place the ignition
into the ACC or ON/RUN position.
When you remove the key fob from the ignition,
the driver’s seat will move to a position
0.3 inches (0.77 cm) forward of the rear stop if
the driver’s seat position is between 0.9 inches
and 2.7 inches (2.27 cm and 6.77 cm) forward
of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previ-
ously set position when you place the ignition to
the ACC or ON/RUN position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver’s seat position is less than
0.9 inches (2.27 cm) forward of the rear stop.
At this position, there is no benefit to the driver
by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory
setting profile Ú page 34.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled
through the programmable features in the
Uconnect system Ú page 236.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions
and seatbacks.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Front Heated Seats
The heated seats control buttons are
located on the center instrument panel
below the touchscreen, and are also
located within the climate or controls
screen of the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch radio,
there will only be control buttons through the
touchscreen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second time to
turn the MED setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn
the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a fourth time to
turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 24.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard rear
seats are equipped with heated seats. The
heated seat switches for these seats are
located on the rear of the center console.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the
rear passengers to operate the seats independently.
You can choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level
of heat in use.
Push the heated seat button once to turn the
HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second time to
turn the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time to turn
the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a fourth time to
turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Front Ventilated Seats
Located in the seat cushion are small
fans that draw the air from the passenger
compartment and move air through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in
higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at
three speeds, HI, MED and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located on the center instrument panel below
the touchscreen, and are also located within the
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch radio,
there will only be control buttons through the
touchscreen.
Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second time
to choose MED.
Press the ventilated seat button a third time to
choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a fourth time to
turn the ventilation off.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 24.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
so that the top of the head restraint is located
above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of
your head.
Front Head Restraints
Four-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with front four-way
driver and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of
the head restraint toward the front of the vehicle as
desired and release. To adjust the head restraint
rearward, pull the top of the head restraint to the
forward most position and release. The head
restraint will return to the rear most position.
Forward Adjustment
NOTE:
Four-way head restraints have seven tilt/locking
positions. When pulling fully forward, the head
restraint will spring back to the untilted, rearward
most position when released.
Two-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with front two-way
driver and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located at the base of head
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat,
the center head restraint is not adjustable or
removable.
Front Head Restraint Removal
Two-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment
button and the release button while pulling upward
on the whole assembly. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and adjust it to the appropriate height.
Four-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If either of the head restraints require removal, see
an authorized dealer.
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable and
removable head restraints. To raise the head
restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To
lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located on the base of the head restraint
and push downward on the head restraint.
Release/Adjustment Buttons
NOTE:
The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab) has
only one adjustment position that is used to aid
in the routing of a tether Ú page 307.
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain
additional clearance to the back of the head.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always
securely stow removed head restraints in a
location outside the occupant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions prior to
operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment
button and the release button while pulling upward
on the whole assembly. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and adjust it to the appropriate height.
NOTE:
To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat
bottom must be folded up.
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow
a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel
tilt and seat position. This feature allows the brake
and accelerator pedals to move toward or away
from the driver to provide improved position with
the steering wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left
side of the steering column.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is
in REVERSE or when the Cruise Control system is
on. If there is an attempt to adjust the pedals when
the system is locked out, the following messages
will appear (on vehicles equipped with an
instrument cluster display):
Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control
Engaged
Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse
NOTE:
Always adjust the pedals to a position that
allows full movement of the pedal.
Further small adjustments may be necessary to
find the best possible seat/pedal position.
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Settings, you can use your remote keyless entry
key fob or the memory switch on the driver’s
door trim panel to return the adjustable pedals
to saved positions Ú page 34.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow
removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions prior to
operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is
moving. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always adjust the pedals while the
vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable
pedals or impede its ability to move, as it may
cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal
travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable
pedal's path.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the
vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in
the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the
driver’s rear view.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on
or off through the touchscreen.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped
The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high
definition, wide and unobstructed view of the road
behind while driving.
Position the mirror in the regular Automatic
Dimming Mirror mode, then activate the Digital
Rearview Mirror mode.
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, pull the
on/off control lever on the bottom of the mirror
rearward toward the driver.
Digital Rearview Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
1 — On/Off Control/Toggle
2 — Menu Button
3 — Left Scroll Button
4 — Right Scroll Button
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Push the Menu button next to the on/off control/
toggle to access the following mirror options:
Brightness
Tilt
Tow Mode (if equipped)
Use the left and right buttons to scroll through
menu options.
When not in use, push the on/off forward toward
the windshield to return the mirror to the regular
Automatic Dimming Mirror.
NOTE:
The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective
during nighttime driving in low light applications
due to low ambient light levels. In the event that it
provides the user with less than expected vision,
the mirror can be reverted to a normal reflective
Automatic Dimming Mirror by pushing the control/
toggle forward in the vehicle and putting the mirror
into Automatic Dimming Mirror mode.
Tow Mode
Your vehicle may be equipped with an additional
auxiliary trailer camera to be mounted on the rear
of a trailer. When the camera is connected, the
display in the Digital Rearview Mirror automatically
switches to the trailer camera.
To return to the rear view camera display toggle
through the menu options using the control
buttons on the mirror.
For more information on trailer camera options,
see Ú page 207.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRROR —
I
F EQUIPPED
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the cover.
Lift Cover For Illuminated Mirror
Slide-On-Rod Feature Of Sun Visor —
If Equipped
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to
block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun
blockage.
Slide-On-Rod Extender
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the sun
visor is against the windshield for additional sun
blockage through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center
of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the
optimal view.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps
under the outside mirrors, they can be turned off
through the Uconnect system Ú page 236.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be
manually folded both forward and rearward to
prevent damage.
Folding Mirror
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The controls for the power mirrors are located on
the driver's door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch.
To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or
R (right) button to select the mirror that you want to
adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the
four arrows for the direction that you want the
mirror to move.
Power Mirror Movement
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the
passenger side convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than they really are. Relying too
much on your passenger side convex mirror
could cause you to collide with another vehicle
or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles
will not have a convex passenger side mirror.
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the
full rearward position to resist damage when
entering a car wash or a narrow location.
1 — Left Mirror Selection
2 — Mirror Direction Control
3 — Right Mirror Selection
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS
F
OR STANDARD AND TRAILER TOW —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power folding mirrors can be folded rearward
and unfolded into the normal driving position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and
R (right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will
fold in, push the switch a second time and the
mirrors will return to the normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after a powered
cycle, a potential extra button push is required to
get the mirrors back to the normal driving position.
If the mirror does not fold automatically, check for
ice or dirt buildup at the pivot area, which can
cause excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if
the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded (by hand or by pushing the power
folding mirror switch).
The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold
them by pushing the button (this may require
multiple attempts). This resets them to their
normal driving position.
POWER CONVEX MIRROR SWITCH —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Power Convex Mirror Switch is located on the
door trim panel, above the power mirror controls.
The switch enables the movement of the convex
portion of both the driver and passenger outside
mirrors.
Power Convex Mirror Switch
To adjust the convex portion of the outside mirrors,
push the Power Convex Mirror Switch. Then, select
the mirror you want to adjust by using the L (left) or
R (right) buttons.
To return the control to the large mirror, push the
Power Convex Mirror Switch a second time.
Trailer Tow Power Convex Mirror
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
NOTE:
If the Power Convex Mirror Switch is not pushed a
second time, the switch will automatically default
back to the larger portion of the outside mirrors
after a period of time.
TRAILER TOWING MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable
mirror head to provide a greater vision range when
towing extra-wide loads. To change position
inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be
rotated (flipped in or out).
Trailer Towing Position
NOTE:
Fold the trailer towing mirrors prior to entering an
automated car wash.
A small blindspot mirror is located next to the main
mirror and can be adjusted manually.
Blindspot Mirror
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 60.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE —
I
F EQUIPPED
This feature provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will assist with the driver’s
ground visibility. The outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position when
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. If the
vehicle is equipped with Driver Memory Settings,
this feature will be linked to the programmable
settings.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 236.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to
three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized
gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered by
your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sun visor designate the
three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any
of the programmed HomeLink® buttons.
These buttons will activate the devices they are
programmed to with each press of the corre-
sponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above
the center button Ú page 455.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio frequency signal, it is recommended that a
new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are trying to
program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of
your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first time.
Do not erase channels when programming addi-
tional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether
the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically,
devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling
codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the
antenna is attached to the device. The button may
not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary
slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not
have a rolling code. These devices will also not
have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, refer to
the following steps:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels
when programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program, while
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold the
garage door opener transmitter button you are
trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Once this happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling
code/non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three times
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the final steps for
the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the HomeLink® indicator
light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays
on constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the steps from the
beginning.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people
or pets are in the path of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the trans-
ceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains
carbon monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon monoxide is poisonous
when inhaled and can cause you and others to
be severely injured or killed.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure as
programming to a garage door opener
Ú
page 49.
Be sure to determine if the device has a rolling code, or
non-rolling code before beginning the programming
process.
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to time-out in the same manner. The
procedure may need to be performed multiple times
to successfully pair the device to your HomeLink®
buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has
been previously trained, without erasing all the
channels, refer to the following procedure. Be sure
to determine whether the new device you want to
program the HomeLink® button to has a Rolling
Code, or Non-rolling Code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the HomeLink® Indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the
button.
3.
Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” Ú page 49, and follow
all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United
States that require the transmitter signals to
“time-out” after several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating of
the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter every two seconds
until HomeLink has successfully accepted the
frequency signal. The indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change
flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed.
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare
cases. The garage door may open and close
while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or
turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons
for 20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note
that all channels will be erased. Individual
channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled
when the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com
for information or assistance.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument
panel light dimming, cargo light/trailer spotter
lights (if equipped), and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the
garage while programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This
includes most garage door opener models manu-
factured after 1982. Do not use a garage door
opener without these safety features.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Switch
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
5 — Push Cargo Light Switch
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head-
light switch with an AUTO and ON detent but
without an OFF detent. Headlights will be deacti-
vated when the headlight switch is placed in the
parking lights position. However, the Daytime
Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along with
the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is on,
the parking lights, taillights, license plate light and
instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn
off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back
to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise from the parking lights and
instrument panel lights position to the first detent to
turn on headlights, parking lights, and instrument
panel lights. Rotate the headlight switch to the
second detent for the AUTO position.
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of
the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on
whenever the engine is running, and the low
beams are not on. The lights will remain on until
the ignition is placed in the OFF or ACC position, or
the parking brake is engaged.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect system Ú page 236.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
the hazard warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams.
Pulling the multifunction lever back will turn the
low beams on.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Switch
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
5 — Push Cargo Light Switch
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at night
by automating high beam control through the use
of a camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror
or a windshield mounted camera. These cameras
detect vehicle specific light and automatically
switch from high beams to low beams until the
approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting “ON” under
“Auto Dim High Beams” within your Uconnect
Settings Ú page 236, as well as turning the
headlight switch to the AUTO position.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Head-
lamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must
be re-aimed to ensure proper performance.
See a local authorized dealer.
The Automatic High Beams will not activate until
the vehicle is at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
To opt out of the Automatic High-Beam Sensi-
tivity Control (default) and enter Reduced
High-Beam Sensitivity Control (not recom-
mended), toggle the multifunction lever six full
on/off cycles within 10 seconds of ignition ON.
The system will return to the default setting
when the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
and remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights on
or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO
position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature
is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition
into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
headlights off, turn the headlight switch out of the
AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights
will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
DIRECTIONAL LED HEADLAMP
S
YSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This is a system consisting of LED (low/high beam)
headlights that incorporate dynamic cornering with
5-degree inboard/15-degree outboard swivel. The
headlights continuously and automatically adapt
to the driving conditions around bends or when
cornering based on steering wheel angle.
The system directs the headlights to light up the
road in the best way, taking into account the speed
of the vehicle and the bend or corner angle, as well
as the speed of the vehicle while the steering
wheel is being turned.
The adaptive lights are automatically activated
when the vehicle is traveling above approximately
5 mph (8 km/h).
This system can be turned on/off through the
Uconnect Settings under “Steering Directed
Lights” Ú page 236.
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise.
To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (off) position.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the first headlight
switch position is the parking lights and instrument
panel lights position (instead of the OFF position).
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head-
light switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without
an OFF detent. Headlights will be deactivated when
the headlight switch is placed in the parking lights
position. However, the Daytime Running Lights
(DRLs) will be activated along with the front and rear
marker lights. The DRLs may be deactivated when
the parking brake is engaged.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS WITH WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. This feature is programmable
through the Uconnect system
Ú
page 236.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Rain Sensing
Wiper system
Ú
page 59, and it is activated, the
headlights will automatically turn on after the wipers
complete five wipe cycles within approximately
one minute, and they will turn off approximately
four minutes after the wipers completely stop.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the daytime,
the instrument panel lights will automatically dim
to the lower nighttime intensity.
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight
delay feature will leave the headlights on for up to
90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition
is placed in the OFF position while the headlight
switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled
off. Headlight delay can be canceled by either
turning the headlight switch on then off, or by placing
the ignition in the ON position.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system Ú page 236.
The headlight delay feature is automatically
activated if the headlight switch is left in the
AUTO position when the ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights
are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, a chime will sound and a message will
appear in the instrument cluster display when the
driver’s door is opened.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or low beam headlights and push the fog
light switch located within the headlight switch.
Pushing the fog light switch a second time will turn
the front fog lights off.
Fog Light Switch
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side
of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
CARGO LIGHTS/TRAILER SPOTTER
L
IGHTS/TRAILER HITCH LIGHT WITH
B
ED LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The cargo light, bed lights, trailer spotter lights, and
trailer hitch light are turned on by pushing the
cargo light button located on the lower half of the
headlight switch.
Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch
Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch
(Vehicles Sold In Canada)
When the vehicle is stationary, these lights can
also be turned on using the switch located just
inside the pickup box, on the lower part of the bed
light lens. A telltale will illuminate in the instrument
cluster display when these lights are on. Pushing
the switch a second time will turn the lights off.
Bed Light Switch (Without RamBox)
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will turn
on for approximately 30 seconds when a key fob
unlock button is pushed, as part of the Illuminated
Entry feature.
When these lights are activated using the button
on the headlight switch, the cargo lights, trailer
spotter lights, and trailer hitch light will remain
illuminated when the vehicle transmission is in
PARK, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE. The lights will turn
off when the vehicle transmission is placed in
DRIVE.
When the vehicle is placed in the REVERSE
position, the trailer hitch light will turn on
automatically. The trailer hitch light will turn off
when the vehicle is placed in the DRIVE position.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
For vehicles shipped to or sold in the states of Cali-
fornia or Mississippi, the cargo, bed, and mirror
spotter lights will not work while the vehicle is in
motion. In every other state, the cargo and mirror
spotter lights will turn off when the vehicle is in
motion, but the bed light will remain on. In all states,
including California and Mississippi, if a bed camera
is deactivated, the bed lights will turn back on.
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior
lights to protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
If the ignition is in the OFF position, the interior
lights will automatically turn off when:
Any door is left ajar for 10 minutes.
The Dome Defeat button is pushed.
The cargo, bed, and spotter lights are manually
activated by either the headlight switch or the
truck bed switch.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is in the OFF position,
the exterior lights will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy, dome, cargo, and bed lights are turned on
when any door is opened. The courtesy and dome lights
are turned on when the Dome On button is pushed on
the overhead console. Also, if your vehicle is equipped
with Remote Keyless Entry, and the unlock button is
pushed on the key fob, the courtesy, dome, cargo, and
bed lights will turn on.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
The overhead console lights can also be operated
individually as reading lights by pushing the
corresponding buttons.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
1 — Driver’s Reading Light On/Off Button
2 — Dome Defeat Button
3 — Dome On Button
4 — Passenger’s Reading Light On/Off Button
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with an LED overhead
console, if both the Dome On and Dome Defeat
buttons are pushed, the Illuminated Entry with
door ajar feature will be disabled, but the dome
lights inside the vehicle will turn on.
Three types of rear courtesy/reading lights are
available for your vehicle:
Push button on/off
Push lens on/off
No on/off button, only courtesy light
NOTE:
The rear courtesy/reading lights will remain on
until the switch is pushed a second time, so be
sure they have been turned off before exiting the
vehicle. If the interior lights are left on after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position, they will auto-
matically turn off after 10 minutes.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are inboard and adjacent to
the headlight switch located on the left side of the
instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the instrument panel dimmer control upward will
increase the brightness of the instrument panel
lights. Rotating the ambient dimmer control will
adjust the interior and ambient light levels when
the headlights are on.
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control
downward to the O (off) position, and the interior
lights will remain off when the doors are open.
Rotating the instrument panel dimmer control all
the way upward, past the detent, will turn on the
interior lights. The interior lights will remain on
when the dimmer control is in this position.
1 — Driver’s Reading Light On/Off Button
2 — Dome Defeat Button
3 — Passenger’s Reading Light On/Off Button
4 — Dome On Button
1 — Ambient Light Control (If Equipped)
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
1 — Ambient Light Control (If Equipped)
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Dimming Of The Uconnect Touchscreen
The brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen can
be dimmed using the instrument panel dimmer
control when the parking lights or headlights
are on.
When Display Mode is set to Auto within the
Uconnect system, the brightness will automatically
adjust from daytime intensity to nighttime intensity
(and vice versa) based on ambient light levels
outside of the vehicle.
NOTE:
The brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen
cannot be adjusted when the instrument panel
dimmer control is rotated to the upper most
detent, even when Display Mode is set to Auto
within the Uconnect Settings.
When Display Mode is set to Manual, the
brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen will adjust
to the set brightness (1 - 6) when the headlights
are either on or off. For more information on these
Uconnect Settings, see Ú page 236.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
key fob to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lamps
located beneath the outside mirrors (if equipped).
The lights will fade to off after approximately
30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off
once the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN
position from the OFF position.
The front courtesy overhead console and door
courtesy lights will not turn off if the Dome On
button on the overhead console is pushed.
The overhead and door courtesy lights will turn
off after 10 minutes to protect the battery.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
Dome Defeat button on the overhead console is
pushed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Illuminated
Approach lights under the outside mirrors, they will
also be turned off by pushing the Dome Defeat
button.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located
on the multifunction lever on the left side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated by
rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
1 — Push End Inward (Hold For Washer Or Short
Press For Mist)
2 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Intermittent Wipers
The intermittent feature of this system was
designed for use when weather conditions make a
single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between
cycles, desirable. For maximum delay between
cycles, rotate the control knob upward to the first
detent.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob
until it enters the low continual speed position.
The delay can be regulated from a maximum of
about 18 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every
one second. The delay intervals will double in
duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph
(16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer
knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever,
inward and hold. Washer fluid will be sprayed and
the wiper will operate for two to three cycles after
the washer knob is released.
If the washer knob is pushed while in the delay
range, the wiper will operate for several seconds
after the washer knob is released. It will then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected. If the
washer knob is pushed while in the off position, the
wiper will turn on and cycle approximately three
times after the washer knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
your climate. This rating information can be found
on most washer fluid containers.
Mist
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer
knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever,
inward briefly and release. The wipers will cycle
one time and automatically shut off.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The washer function must be used
in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 391.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the wipers.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of
five detent positions to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with
the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is
the least sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is
the most sensitive. Position 3 should be used for
normal rain conditions. Positions 1 and 2 can be
used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity.
Positions 4 and 5 can be used if the driver desires
more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
O (off) position when not using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop-
erly when ice, or dried salt water is present on
the windshield.
Use of products containing wax or silicone may
reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and
off using the Uconnect system Ú page 236.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Rain Sensing system has protection features
for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate
under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition
is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the wiper
switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the
NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved,
vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h),
or the gear selector is moved out of the
NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with the Remote Start system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the RUN position, Rain Sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions
(mentioned previously) exist.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
located on the touchscreen (if equipped), on the
sides of the touchscreen, or on the instrument
panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5 or 5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic
Temperature Controls
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display Automatic
Temperature Controls
NOTE:
Icons and descriptions can vary based upon
vehicle equipment.
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air. The
MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX
A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the
MAX A/C operation to exit. Pressing other settings
will also cause MAX A/C to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C sets the control for maximum
cooling performance.
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the system between
Recirculation mode and outside air mode.
The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator
illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions,
such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the windshield.
The A/C can be deselected manually without
disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous
use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside
air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended. Recirculation
mode may automatically adjust to optimize
customer experience for warming, cooling,
dehumidification, etc.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature
may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create
fogging on the inside of the windshield.
Auto Button
Set your desired temperature and press
AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain your
desired temperature by automatically
adjusting the blower speed and air
distribution. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be active during
AUTO operation to improve performance. AUTO mode is
highly recommended for efficiency.
You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
Press and release this button on the touchscreen.
Push the button on the faceplate.
Toggling this function will cause the system to
switch between manual mode and automatic
mode Ú page 65.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button
on the touchscreen, or push and release
the button on the faceplate, to change the
current airflow setting to Defrost mode.
The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front
Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
When toggling the front defrost mode button, the
climate system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push and
release the button on the faceplate, to
turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear
Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And
Down Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button (or rotate knob if
equipped) on the faceplate or touchscreen,
or press and slide the temperature bar
towards the red arrow button on the
touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
Push the blue button (or rotate knob if
equipped) on the faceplate or touchscreen,
or press and slide the temperature bar
towards the blue arrow button on the
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will
only appear if the system is equipped with an
automatic climate control system.
Up and down buttons are only available on vehi-
cles equipped with a 12-inch display.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to
toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC
synchronizes the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing
the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of
air forced through the climate control
system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using either the
blower control knob on the faceplate or the
buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower
setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn
the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the mode
buttons on the touchscreen, or pushing
the MODE button on the faceplate, to
change the airflow distribution mode.
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets, defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
Faceplate
Push the MODE button to change the airflow
distribution mode.
Touchscreen
Press one of the mode buttons to change the
airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution
mode can be adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets.
This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
touchscreen, or push the OFF button on
the faceplate (if equipped) to turn the
Climate Control system on/off.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Manual Temperature
Controls
Uconnect 5 With 8.4-inch Display Manual Temperature
Controls
MAX A/C Setting
Set the temperature control knob to the
MAX A/C setting to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air. Moving
the temperature control knob away from
the MAX A/C setting causes the MAX A/C operation
to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Push the Recirculation button to change
the system between recirculation mode
and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate
when the Recirculation button is pressed.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions,
such as smoke, odors, dust, or humidity are present.
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for
Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode
may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging
may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
recommended.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
On vehicles equipped with Manual Climate controls,
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost
mode to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation is disabled automatically if this mode
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in
this mode causes the LED in the control button to
blink and then turn off.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the mode control knob to the Front
Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the
blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost
Control button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after 10 minutes.
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of
the air forced through the climate system.
The temperature increases as you turn
the temperature control knob clockwise.
The temperature decreases as you
turn the temperature control knob
counterclockwise.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of
air forced through the climate control
system. There are seven blower speeds
available. The blower speed increases as
you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed
decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob to adjust
airflow distribution. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets,
floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets.
This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE
C
ONTROL (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the
AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the driver
and passenger temperature control buttons.
Once the desired temperature is displayed,
the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric
customer-programmable feature within the
Uconnect Settings Ú page 236.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower
fan will remain on low until the engine warms up.
The blower will increase in speed and transition
into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system is
being used in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION —
I
F EQUIPPED
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
“
Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did you know:
Voice Command for Climate may only
be used to adjust the interior temperature of your
vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the
heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032)
is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see Ú page 434.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the windows,
select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front
blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode
without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution
box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode), (A/C) on,
and blower on high. Roll down
the windows for a minute to
flush out the hot air. Adjust
the controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and set
the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in
(Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Mix Mode) and turn (A/C)
on to keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If windshield
fogging starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix Mode).
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel and
features both an upper and lower storage area.
Glove Compartment
If equipped with a covered upper glove
compartment, push the release button to open.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Door Storage
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas are located in the door trim panels.
Rear Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage compartments are located in both the
driver and passenger rear door trim panels.
Center Storage Compartment —
If Equipped
The center storage compartment is located
between the driver and passenger seats. The
storage compartment provides an armrest and
contains both an upper and lower storage area.
Center Storage Compartment
1 — Upper Glove Compartment Release Button
(If Equipped)
2 — Upper Glove Compartment
3 — Lower Glove Compartment
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving with
the glove compartment open may result in injury
in a collision.
WARNING!
This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on
the armrest could be seriously injured during
vehicle operation, or a collision.
In a collision, the latch may open if the total weight
of the items stored exceeds about 10 lb (4.5 kg).
These items could be thrown about endangering
occupants of the vehicle. Items stored should not
exceed a total of 10 lb (4.5 kg).
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Pull the upper handle on the front of the armrest to
raise the cover. The upper storage area contains a
USB port located that can be used to power small
electrical devices.
Center Storage Compartment
USB Port
With the upper lid closed, pull the lower handle to
open the lower storage bin. The lower bin contains
a power inverter. There is also a fill line located
along the
rear inside wall of the lower bin. Contents
above the fill line may interfere with cupholder
placement if equipped with a premium center
console.
Forward Portion Of Lower Storage Bin
1 — Upper Console Handle
2 — Lower Console Handle
1 — Wireless Charging Pad
2 — Power Inverter
3 — Storage Area
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Premium Center Console — If Equipped
The premium center console is equipped with two
front storage bins located in front of the center
storage compartment. These storage bins may be
equipped with tandem doors. Push the front bin to
access the cupholders, or push the rear bin to
access the coin holder/small storage bin.
Center Console Tandem Doors— If Equipped
Tandem Doors Open Position
Push the release button at the front of the
cupholder bin to slide tray rearward to access the
front lower storage bin, or forward to access the
rear lower storage bin.
Push Release Button To Slide Tray
Overhead Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of one pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the door latch to
open the compartment.
Overhead Sunglass Door
1 — Push Front Bin Access
2 — Push Rear Bin Access
1 — Front Bin Open
2 — Rear Bin Open
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Bench Seat Storage — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat,
storage can be found by folding down the center
seatback. A console storage area and cupholders
are available.
Front Bench Seat Storage Location
With the seatback in the upright position, lift the
center seat bottom to access additional storage
underneath the seat.
The console storage contains a USB port that can
be used to power small electrical devices.
Bench Seat Storage USB Port
There is a storage drawer located in the lower
center of the instrument panel. It can be released
by pushing the access button above it. Pull drawer
outward to the fully open position.
Storage Drawer Access Button
Seatback Storage — If Equipped
Located in the back of both the driver and
passenger front seats are pockets that can be
used for storage.
Seatback Storage
Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin —
If Equipped
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the
second row seats and can be used for extra
storage. The storage bins have removable liners
that can be easily removed for cleaning.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
In-Floor Storage Bin And Latch
To open in-floor storage bin, remove the floor mat
(if equipped), and lift upward on the handle of the
latch and open the lid.
NOTE:
The front seat may have to be moved forward to
fully open the lid.
Opened Storage Bin
Storage Bin (Regular Cab)
The storage bin is located behind the front seats
and runs the length of the cab.
Storage Bin
Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped
Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat may be
equipped with a folding load floor.
Unfolding The Load Floor/Crew Cab
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward
position.
Load Floor Legs In Stowed Position
2. Unfold both the legs using the straps.
Load Floor Legs In Opened Position
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items
stored on the load floor. While driving or in an
accident you may experience abrupt stopping,
rapid acceleration, or sharp turns. Loose objects
stored on the load floor may move around with
force and strike occupants, resulting in serious
or fatal injury.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Lift the front panel until the load floor unfolds
into position.
Load Floor In Open Position
4. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Positioning The Load Floor For Storage Access
Under The Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward
position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either
side of the load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under
the load floor.
Load Floor Securing Straps/Crew Cab
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor
back in the secured down position before you
operate the vehicle.
Below Rear Seat Storage (Crew Cab)
The Crew Cab models provide additional storage
under the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the
storage compartment.
If equipped with a fold flat load floor, unsnap the
securing snap located at either side of the load
floor and lift upward on the fold flat lid to open the
storage compartments Ú page 71.
Crew Cab Storage
USB/AUX CONTROL
Located on the center stack, just below the
instrument panel, is the main media hub. There
are four total USB ports: Two Mini-USBs (Type C)
and two Standard USBs (Type A). There is also an
AUX port located in the middle of the USB ports.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port
may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information, refer
to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up
position. When stopping fast or in an accident,
the load floor could move to the down position
causing serious injury.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time,
and both ports will provide charging capabilities.
Only one port can transfer data to the system at a
time. A pop-up will appear and allow you to select
the device transferring data.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A
USB port and another device is plugged into the
Type C USB port, a message will appear and allow
you to select which device to use.
Center Stack USB/AUX Media Hub
The third and fourth USB ports are located behind
the center console, above the power inverter.
These USB ports are charge only.
Rear Center Console Mini-USB (Type C) USB Ports
Applicable to only Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch
Display and Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display
radios: different scenarios are listed as follows when
a non-phone device is plugged into the smaller and
larger USB ports, and when a phone device is
plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports:
“A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost.”
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
connection was lost.”
“Another device is in use through the same USB
port. Please disconnect the first device to use
the second device.”
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only
USB ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into
a Media USB port, a message will display on the
touchscreen that the device is not supported by
the system.
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to be
lost.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or visit
UconnectPhone.com.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet can
provide power for in-cab accessories designed
for use with the standard “cigar lighter” style plug.
The 12 Volt power outlets and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB
port (Charge Only) have a cap attached to the
outlet indicating “12 V DC”, together with either a
key symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol.
A key symbol indicates that the ignition must be
in the ON/RUN or ACC position for the outlet to
provide power. The battery symbol indicates that
the outlet is connected to the battery, and can
provide power at all times.
1 — Standard USB Type A Port #1
2 — AUX Port
3 — Standard USB Type A Port #2
1 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports 1
2 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports 2
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
An auxiliary power outlet can be found in the tray
on top of the center stack. This power outlet works
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN, ACC, or OFF
position.
Power Outlet — Top Of Center Stack
Power Outlet Fuse Locations:
F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow UCI Port/ USB Rear
Center Console
F90 Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel Power
Outlet Battery Fed (If Equipped)
F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel Power
Outlet Ignition Fed (If Equipped)
F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter/ Instrument
Panel Power Outlet (If Equipped)
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug any
equipment as to not drain the battery of the vehicle.
All accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be
removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to
protect the battery against discharge.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
Interior Power Inverters
If equipped, 115 Volt (400 Watts maximum) power
inverters may be located inside the vehicle. These
inverters can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to
400 Watts. Certain video game consoles exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps)
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
must be driven a sufficient length of time to
allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's
battery.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
All power inverters are designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 400 Watts is
exceeded, the power inverter shuts down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should reset.
The front power inverter is located in center
console toward the right hand side, just under
the Wireless Charging Pad (if equipped).
Center Console Power Inverter Outlet (If Equipped)
There is also a second 115 Volt (400 Watts
maximum) power inverter located on the rear
of the center console.
Rear Center Console Power Inverter Outlet (If Equipped)
NOTE:
400 Watts is the maximum for the inverter, not
each outlet. If three outlets are in use, 400 Watts
is shared among the devices plugged in.
If equipped with a front bench seat, the inverter is
located to the right of the center stack, just below
the climate controls.
Center Stack Power Inverter (If Equipped)
Exterior Power Inverter — If Equipped
Vehicles not equipped with a RamBox may be
equipped with a 115 Volt (400 Watts maximum)
power inverter located just inside the truck bed.
Exterior Power Inverter (If Equipped)
The Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch is only
found on vehicles equipped with an exterior power
inverter. The switch only controls on/off operation
of the power outlet in the truck bed or, if equipped,
the RamBox. It does not control on/off operation of
the power outlets located inside the cabin of the
vehicle.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Instrument Panel Power Inverter Switch
For information on the outlet found inside the
RamBox, see Ú page 88.
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in a device.
The outlet turns off when the device is unplugged.
NOTE:
The power inverter only turns on if the ignition is
in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter shuts down if the power rating is exceeded.
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD —
I
F EQUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi
wireless charging pad located inside of the center
console. This charging pad is designed to wirelessly
charge your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard
that uses magnetic induction to transfer power to your
mobile device.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi
wireless charging. If the phone is not equipped
with Qi wireless charging functionality, an
aftermarket sleeve or a specialized back plate can
be purchased from your mobile phone provider
or a local electronics retailer. Please see your
phone’s owner’s manual for further information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an
anti-slip mat to hold your mobile phone in place
and an LED indicator light.
LED Indicator Status:
No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a
device.
Blue Light: Device is detected, and is charging.
Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign
object is detected.
NOTE:
The ignition much be in the ON/RUN or START
position and all vehicle doors must be closed for
the wireless charging pad to operate.
Using a phone case may interfere with wireless
charging.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
WARNING!
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
The window controls on the driver's door control all
the door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be operated by
using the single window controls on the passenger door
trim panel. The window controls will operate only when
the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
To open the window part way (manually), push the
window switch down briefly and release.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The timing is programmable within
Uconnect Settings Ú page 236.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
window switch down briefly, then release, and the
window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up briefly and release; the
window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go
back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
window switch again to close the window.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the charging
pad or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Doing so can
cause excessive heat buildup and damage to the
fob. Placing the fob in close proximity of the charging
pad blocks the fob from being detected by the
vehicle and prevents the vehicle from starting.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch
lightly and hold to close the window manually.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up
for an additional two seconds after the
window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
the window completely and continue to hold
the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on
the rear passenger doors. To disable the window
controls, push and release the window lockout
button (the indicator light on the button will turn
on). To enable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button again (the
indicator light on the button will turn off).
Window Lockout Switch
POWER SLIDING REAR WINDOW —
I
F EQUIPPED
The switch for the power sliding rear window is
located on the overhead console. Push the switch
rearward to open the glass. Pull the switch forward
to close the glass.
Power Sliding Rear Window Switch
MANUAL SLIDING REAR WINDOW —
I
F EQUIPPED
A locking device in the center of the window helps
to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle.
Squeeze the lock to release the window.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, open the front
and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.
If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
SINGLE PANE POWER SUNROOF
The power sunroof switches are located on the
overhead console between the courtesy/reading lights.
Power Sunroof Switches
Opening Sunroof
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will open
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
open fully and stop automatically.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
close fully and stop automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any other movement of the sunroof switch will stop
the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward to full open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in
the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof will remain in a partially opened position
until the switch is operated and held again.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated, the
sunshade will automatically open with the sunroof.
Venting Sunroof
To vent open the sunroof, push and release “tilt”
on the vent switch. To close the sunroof from the
vent position, push and release “down” on the vent
switch.
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN posi-
tion. Occupants, particularly unattended children,
can become entrapped by the power sunroof while
operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrap-
ment may result in serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object, to project through the
sunroof opening. Injury may result.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However,
the sunshade will open automatically as the
sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up
to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off timing is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 236.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
clear out any debris that may have collected in
the tracks.
HOOD
TO OPEN THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the
steering wheel at the base of the instrument
panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of
the hood and push the safety latch lever to the
left to release it, before raising the hood.
Safety Latch Location
TO CLOSE THE HOOD
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from the
point where the props no longer hold the hood open.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at
the front center of the hood to ensure that both
latches engage.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
TAILGATE
OPENING
The power tailgate may be opened by pushing the
tailgate release pad located on the tailgate door.
The tailgate damper strut will lower the tailgate to
the open position (if equipped).
Electronic Tailgate Release — If Equipped
The key fob may be equipped with an
electronic release feature for the
tailgate, allowing hands-free tailgate
opening. To activate, push and release
the Tailgate Release button on the key fob twice
within five seconds. The tailgate door will unlatch,
and slowly lower into the open position.
If equipped, a button on the center overhead
console inside the vehicle can be used to release
the tailgate. An indicator light may also signal when
the tailgate is open.
For the tailgate to lower, the vehicle must be
stationary and in PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
The optional Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Ú page 91
may prevent electronic tailgate release. The
Tonneau Cover must be removed or folded up
before releasing the tailgate.
CLOSING
To close the tailgate, push it upward until both
sides are latched.
The tailgate can be locked using the key fob lock
button.
TAILGATE REMOVAL
NOTE:
Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview
camera function.
To remove the tailgate, refer to the following
instructions:
1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear
camera and or power locks (if equipped)
Ú
page 82.
2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support
cables by releasing the lock tang from the pivot.
NOTE:
Make sure tailgate is supported when removing
support cables.
Locking Tang
3. Position the tailgate on a 45 degree angle.
4. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the
right side pivot clears the hanger bracket.
5. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the
left side pivot.
6. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup box.
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly,
the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap
or Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the
overhanging camper compartment and be free of
leaks.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Disconnecting The Rear Camera And
Remote Keyless Entry
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera
or Remote Keyless Entry connector bracket
located on the rear sill.
Connector Bracket
2. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by
pushing inward in the locking tab.
Locking Tab
3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness,
ensuring the connector bracket does not fall
into the sill.
Disconnected Harness
4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket
(provided in the glove compartment) to the
chassis wiring harness and insert the bracket
back into the sill.
Chassis Wiring Harness
Chassis Plug
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
5. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the
glove compartment) to the tailgate wiring
harness to ensure that the terminals do not
corrode.
Wire Harness Bracket
6. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against
the forward-facing surface of the tailgate.
This will prevent damaging the connector
and bracket when storing or reinstalling the
tailgate.
Taped Tailgate Harness
BED STEP — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an extendable
bed step on the driver’s side of the tailgate to
provide easier entry and exit into the truck bed.
Bed Step Location
Bed Step Components
To extend the bed step, place your foot on the
protruding foot tab located on the left edge of the
bed step, and push rearward. A small amount of
force will release the spring load, and extend the
bed step out and away from the tailgate.
1 — Tailgate Plug Release
2 — Tailgate Plug
3 — Tailgate Harness
1 — Bed Step
2 — Foot Tab
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Once the spring load is overcome, the bed step will
extend out quickly, so be sure to stand in a position
that will avoid coming into contact with the step as
it extends.
Bed Step (Extended)
To stow the bed step back under the tailgate, push
the bed step forward with your foot until the bed
step is retracted by the spring load.
PICKUP BOX
The pickup box has many features designed for
utility and convenience.
Pickup Box Features
NOTE:
If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or
Headache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box, you
must use Mopar® Box Reinforcement Brackets
that are available from an authorized dealer.
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of
plywood, etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place
lumber across the box in the indentations provided
above the wheel housings and in the bulkhead
dividers to form the floor.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to stow the bed step with your
hands. The low clearance space between the
bed step and the rear bumper as the bed step
returns to the stowed position could result in
injury to your hands or fingers.
1 — Cleats
2 — Upper Load Floor Indents
3 — Bulk Head Dividers
4 — Anchors
WARNING!
The pickup box is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should
sit in seats and use seat belts.
Care should always be exercised when oper-
ating a vehicle with unrestrained cargo.
Vehicle speeds may need to be reduced.
Severe turns or rough roads may cause
shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may
result in vehicle damage. If wide building
materials are to be frequently carried, the
installation of a support is recommended.
This will restrain the cargo and transfer the
load to the pickup box floor.
If you wish to carry more than 600 lb (272 kg) of
material suspended above the wheelhouse,
supports must be installed to transfer the weight
of the load to the pickup box floor or vehicle
damage may result. The use of proper supports
will permit loading up to the rated payload.
Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in
an accident causing serious or fatal injury.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the
inner side bulkheads of the box in front of and
behind both wheel housings. Place wooden boards
across the box from side to side to create separate
load compartments in the pickup box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower
sides of the pickup box that can sustain loads up
to 1000 lb (450 kg) total.
CARGO CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cargo
Camera that allows you to see an image of the
inside of the pickup box. The image will be
displayed in the Uconnect screen.
The Cargo Camera is located in the bottom center area
of the Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL).
A touchscreen button to indicate the
current active camera image being
displayed is made available whenever
the Cargo Camera image is displayed.
A touchscreen button to switch the
display to rear view camera image is
made available whenever the Cargo
Camera image is displayed.
A touchscreen X button to disable display of the
camera image is made available when the vehicle
is not in REVERSE gear.
A display timer is initiated when the Cargo Camera
image is displayed. The image will continue to be
displayed until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds
and the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) or the
touchscreen button X to disable display of the Cargo
Camera image is pressed.
Cargo Camera With Dynamic Centerline (Available
With Surround View Camera Only) — If Equipped
The Dynamic Centerline feature provides an
overlay on the Cargo Camera display screen that
aligns to the center of the pickup box to aid in
hooking up a fifth wheel camper or gooseneck
trailer. The centerline auto aligns to the center of
the pickup box, and can also be manually adjusted.
The centerline will adjust in response to steering
angle inputs, and will not obstruct the gooseneck
receiver or an approaching trailer gooseneck in the
camera feed.
Activation
The Dynamic Centerline feature can be activated
through the Uconnect Settings by pressing the
Cargo Camera button, followed by the Adjust
Centerline button on the touchscreen.
If the Dynamic Centerline feature is turned on, the
overlay will display anytime the Cargo Camera
image is displayed.
Adjusting Centerline
Refer to the following steps to manually adjust the
centerline:
1. Press the Adjust Centerline button located in
the bottom right corner of the Cargo Camera
display.
2. Use the arrows on the bottom left corner of the
Cargo Camera display to adjust the centerline
horizontally or vertically.
3. Once the desired position is achieved, press
the Accept button to set the centerline to the
newly specified position.
Deactivation
The Dynamic Centerline feature will automatically be
deactivated whenever the Cargo Camera display is
deactivated. It can also be manually deactivated
through the Uconnect Settings
Ú
page 236.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Cargo Camera image will be
displayed continuously until the touchscreen X
button to disable display of the Cargo Camera
image is pressed.
The touchscreen X button to disable the display
of the camera image is made available ONLY
when the vehicle is not in reverse.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not
cover the lens.
Turning Cargo Camera On Or Off — With
Uconnect 5/5 NAV
1. Press the Controls button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the Cargo Camera button to turn the
Cargo Camera system on.
NOTE:
Once initiated by the Cargo Camera button, the
Cargo Camera image will be displayed until the
vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h)
and the 10 second timer runs out. The image may
be deactivated by pressing the X button, placing
the ignition in the OFF position, placing the gear
selector in PARK, or pressing the image defeat X
button. On deactivation, the previous selected
screen will appear.
BED RAIL TIE-DOWN SYSTEM —
I
F EQUIPPED
NOTE:
This feature is only available for vehicles equipped
with a RamBox.
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the
bed that can be used to assist in securing cargo.
Adjustable Cleats
Each cleat must be located and tightened down in
one of the detents, along either rail, in order to
keep cargo properly secure.
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn
the nut counterclockwise several turns. Then pull
out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest
the desired location. Make sure the cleat is seated
in the detent and tighten the nut.
Adjustable Cleat Assembly
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed
250 lb (113 kg) and the angle of the load on
each cleat should not exceed 45 degrees above
horizontal, or damage to the cleat or cleat rail
may occur.
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
(Continued)
Cleat Removal (With Tonneau Cover)
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove
the end cap screw located in the center of the end
cap, using a #T30 Torx head driver. Remove the
end cap and slide the cleat off the end of the rail.
End Cap Screw Location With Tonneau Cover
Cleat Removal (Without Tonneau Cover)
Remove the end cap by pushing upward on the
release button located beneath the end cap while
pulling the cap away from the rail. The cleat can
now be removed by sliding it off the end of the rail.
End Cap Release Button Without Tonneau Cover
Pull End Cap Away From Rail
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED
The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box
storage and cargo management system consisting
of up to three features:
Integrated box side storage bins
Cargo divider (if equipped)
Bed rail tie-down system (if equipped)
Ú page 86
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING RAMBOX
Push and release the lock or unlock button on the
key fob to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate
and the RamBox Ú page 18. The RamBox storage
bins can be locked using the vehicle key. To lock
and unlock the storage bin, insert the key into the
keyhole on the push button and turn clockwise to
lock or counterclockwise to unlock. Always return
the key to the upright (vertical) position before
removing the key from the push button.
CAUTION!
Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched
before moving or driving vehicle.
Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should
be minimized to prevent damage to the lid and
latching/hinging mechanisms.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RAMBOX CARGO STORAGE BINS
Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the
pickup box. The cargo storage bins provide watertight,
lockable, illuminated storage for up to 300 lb (136 kg)
of evenly distributed cargo.
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins
To open a storage bin with the RamBox unlocked,
push and release the button located on the lid. The
RamBox lid will open upward to allow hand access.
Lift the lid to fully open.
NOTE:
RamBox will not open when the button is pushed if
the RamBox is locked.
RamBox Pushbutton And Lock
The interior of the RamBox will automatically
illuminate when the lid is opened. In addition to the
automatic illumination, there is a manual on/off
switch located at the rear of each storage bin.
Pushing the switch once will turn off the bin lights,
pushing the switch again will turn the lights back on.
RamBox Light Switch
Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to
heavy/sharp objects placed in bin that shift due
to vehicle motion. In order to minimize potential
for damage, secure all cargo to prevent move-
ment and protect inside surfaces of bin from
heavy/sharp objects with appropriate padding.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could cause
damage to the vehicle:
Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is
properly secured.
Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 300 lb
(136 kg) for 2500 and 3500 series vehicles
per bin.
CAUTION!
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time
could cause the vehicle battery to discharge. If the
lid is required to stay open for extended periods of
time, it is recommended that the bin lights be
turned off manually using the on/off switch.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs
(to allow water to drain from bins). To remove a
plug, pull up on the edge. To install, push the plug
downward into the drain hole.
RamBox Drain Plug Removal
NOTE:
Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo
dividers and shelf supports. These accessories
(in addition to other RamBox accessories) are
available from Mopar®.
If equipped, a 115 Volt (400 Watts maximum)
inverter may be located inside the RamBox of your
vehicle. The inverter can be turned on by the
Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch located to
the left of the steering wheel. The RamBox inverter
can power cellular phones, electronics and other low
power devices requiring power up to 400 Watts.
Certain video game consoles exceed this power
limit, as will most power tools.
RamBox Power Inverter
The Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch is only
found on vehicles equipped with an exterior power
inverter inside the RamBox or truck bed. The switch
only controls on/off operation of the exterior power
inverter; it does not control on/off operation of the
power outlets located inside the cabin of the vehicle.
Instrument Panel Power Inverter Switch
RAMBOX SAFETY WARNING
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
RamBox Emergency Release Lever
As a security measure, an Emergency Release
Lever is built into the storage bin cover latching
mechanism.
WARNING!
Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
Do not allow children to have access to the
storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young
children may not be able to escape. If trapped
in the storage bin, children can die from suffo-
cation or heat stroke.
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie-down.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be
opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage bin
cover latching mechanism.
Emergency Release Lever
BED DIVIDER — IF EQUIPPED
The bed divider has two functional positions:
Divider Position
Storage Position
Divider Position
The divider position is intended for managing your
cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from moving
around the bed. There are 11 divider slots along
the bed inner panels which allow for various
positions to assist in managing your cargo.
To install the bed divider into a divider position,
perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked
using the vehicle key and rotate the center
handle vertically to release the divider side
gates.
Center Handle And Lock
2. With the side gates open, position the divider
so the outboard ends align with the intended
slots in the sides of the bed.
Aligning Gate To Slots
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the
outboard ends are secured into the intended
slots of the bed.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure
the side gates in the closed position.
Side Gates Closed
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
3 — Unlocked Position
4 — Locked Position
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel
into place.
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed divider is at the
front of the truck bed which maximizes the bed
cargo area when not in use.
To install the bed divider into the storage position,
perform the same steps as you would for the
divider position, except position the divider fully
forward in the bed against the front panel.
Storage Position
The outboard ends should be positioned in front of
the cargo tie-down loops.
Cargo Tie-Down Loop
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED
The Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover can be installed on the
truck bed to protect your gear and cargo.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER REMOVAL
To remove the Tonneau Cover, use the following
steps:
1. Open the tailgate to gain access to the rear
pair of Tonneau Cover clamps located on the
underside of the cover.
Location Of Rear Latches
NOTE:
If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately.
2. Pull both clamp handles down to release the
Tonneau Cover’s rear panel.
Released Position
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. From the Released Position, send the clamps
to the Stowed Position by pushing from the
yellow bumper upward.
Stowed Position
4. Fold the rear panel up onto the center panel
(Intermediate Position).
Folded Rear Panel (Intermediate Position)
NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau
Cover is in this position.
5. Fold the rear and center panels up onto the
front panel (Tri-Folded Position).
Tri-Folded Position
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
NOTE:
When folding the center and rear panels,
the sections
MUST be held together to avoid
damage to the cover material.
Fold the panels gently. It is not recommended to
allow the panels to drop under their own weight.
CAUTION!
Make sure the Tonneau Cover clamp and clamp
wire are in the proper stowed position. If the
clamp and clamp wire are not properly stowed,
damage to the Tonneau Cover material will result.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
6. Clip both stowage straps to prevent the
Tonneau Cover panels from unfolding.
Stowage Strap
7. Once in the Tri-Folded Position, pull both front
clamp handles down to the Released Position.
Released Position
8. From the Released Position, send the clamps to
the Stowed Position by pushing from the yellow
bumper upward. Listen for a “clicking” sound to
confirm the clamp has been properly stowed.
Stowed Position
9. Utilizing two people, remove the Tonneau
Cover.
NOTE:
Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded
completely, and the stowage straps are engaged,
before removing the cover from the vehicle.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER
I
NSTALLATION
To install the Tonneau Cover follow the following steps:
1. Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the
truck bed and push the cover forward against
the front of the truck bed. The Tonneau Cover
centers itself when placed on the vehicle.
NOTE:
Make sure to always push the Tonneau Cover all
the way forward on the truck bed. Failure to do
so might prevent proper clamp engagement, or
interfere with the electronic tailgate release
function (if equipped).
Location Of Front Latches
CAUTION!
The folded Tonneau Cover must be latched by both
front latches and both front stowage straps or
damage to the Tonneau Cover or vehicle may occur.
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull down on the first set of clamp handles to
release the clamps from the Stowed Position.
Stowed Position
3. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of
the box (or flange of the RamBox rail, if
equipped) to the Semi-Clamped Position.
Semi Clamped Position
4. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped
position to properly engage the clamps.
Clamped Position
NOTE:
Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not
improperly attached to the truck bed flange.
Improper Clamp Position
5. Disengage the stowage straps.
6. Unfold the center and rear panels to the
Intermediate Position.
Intermediate Position (Vehicle Cannot Be Driven)
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
NOTE:
When folding the center and rear panels, the
sections
MUST be held together to avoid damage
to the cover material.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover.
Fully Unfolded Position
8. Pull the rear clamp handles down into the
Released Position.
Stowed Position
9. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of
box (or flange of RamBox rail, if equipped) to
the Semi Clamped Position.
Semi Clamped Position
2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
10. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped
position to properly engage the clamps.
Clamped Position
Improper Clamp Position
NOTE:
Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not partially
clamped to the truck bed flange.
The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when in
the clamped position by placing a lock through the
locking hole.
Locking Hole
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER CLEANING
For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use
Mopar® Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and
Mopar® Leather & Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
CAUTION!
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the Tonneau
Cover is properly installed on the vehicle. Failure to
follow this procedure can result in detachment of the
Tonneau Cover from the vehicle and/or damage to
the vehicle/Tonneau Cover.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
97
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GAS ENGINE
3
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — GAS ENGINE
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Voltmeter
When the vehicle is in the RUN state, the
gauge indicates the electrical system
voltage. The pointer should stay within the
normal range if the battery is charged. If the
pointer moves to either extreme left or right
and remains there during normal driving,
the electrical system should be serviced.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 104.
The display always shows one of the main
menu item after ignition is placed on.
4. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate the
oil pressure when the engine is running.
A continuous high or low reading under
normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Immediate
service should be obtained from an autho-
rized dealer.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Temperature Gauge
The gauge pointer shows engine coolant
temperature. The pointer positioned within
the normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, or when
towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal oper-
ating range.
7. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
Ú page 395.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GAS ENGINE
3
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — GAS ENGINE
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 104.
The display always shows one of the main
menu item after ignition is placed on.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The gauge pointer shows engine coolant
temperature. The pointer positioned within
the normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, or when
towing a trailer. It should not be allowed
to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
Ú page 395.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL ENGINE
3
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Engine Coolant Temperature
This gauge shows the engine coolant tempera-
ture. The gauge pointer will likely show higher
temperatures when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, or in heavy stop and go
traffic. If the red Warning Light turns on while
driving, safely bring the vehicle to a stop, and
turn off the engine. DO NOT operate the vehicle
until the cause is corrected.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 104.
The display always shows one of the main
menu item after ignition is placed on.
4. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate some oil
pressure when the engine is running. A contin-
uous high or low reading under normal driving
conditions may indicate a lubrication system
malfunction. Immediate service should be
obtained from an authorized dealer.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of
Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is
required to maintain normal vehicle operation
and emissions compliance. If something is
wrong with the gauge, a DEF Warning Message
or Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) will be
displayed. More information is available in the
instrument cluster display section under the
heading of DEF Warning Messages.
NOTE:
The gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of DEF
to the DEF tank. If you have a fault related
to the DEF system, the gauge may not
update to the new level. See an authorized
dealer for service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank
heater will warm up the DEF fluid and allow the
gauge to update after a period of run time.
Under very cold conditions, it is possible that
the gauge may not reflect the new fill level for
several drives.
7. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel filler door is located.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
greater “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the “h,” turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL ENGINE
3
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 104.
The display always shows one of the main
menu item after ignition is placed on.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of
Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is
required to maintain normal vehicle opera-
tion and emissions compliance. If some-
thing is wrong with the gauge, a DEF
Warning Message or Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) will be displayed. More informa-
tion is available in the instrument cluster
display section under the heading of DEF
Warning Messages.
NOTE:
The DEF tank on these vehicles is designed with
a large amount of full reserve. So the level
sensor will indicate a full reading even before
the tank is completely full. To put it another way,
there’s additional storage capacity in the tank
above the Full mark that’s not represented in
the gauge. You may not see any movement in
the reading – even after driving up to 200 miles
(322 kilometers) in some cases.
The gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of DEF
to the DEF tank. If you have a fault related
to the DEF system, the gauge may not
update to the new level. See an authorized
dealer for service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank
heater will warm up the DEF fluid and allow
the gauge to update after a period of run
time. Under very cold conditions, it is
possible that the gauge may not reflect
the new fill level for several drives.
5. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel filler door is located.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver.
With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing
of a door will activate the display for viewing,
and display the total miles, or kilometers, in the
odometer. Your instrument cluster display is
designed to display important information about
your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver
interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings when
they are not. The steering wheel mounted controls
allow you to scroll through the main menus and
submenus. You can access the specific information
you want and make selections and adjustments.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
C
ONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location and Controls
The system allows the driver to select information
by pushing the following instrument cluster display
control buttons located on the left side of the
steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the
up arrow button to
scroll upward through the main menu items,
submenu screen, and vehicle settings.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the
right arrow button to
access/select the information screens or
submenu screens of a main menu item.
Push and hold the
right arrow button for
two seconds to reset displayed/selected
features that can be reset.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the
down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu items,
submenu screen, and vehicle settings.
Left Arrow Button
Push and release the
left
arrow button to
access/select the information screens, submenu
screens of a main menu item, or to return to the
main menu.
OIL LIFE RESET
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required”
message will display in the instrument cluster
display after a single chime has sounded, to
indicate the next scheduled oil change interval.
The engine oil change indicator system is duty
cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
NOTE:
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display
controls for the following procedure.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
1 – Up Arrow Button
2 – Right Arrow Button
3 – Down Arrow Button
4 – Left Arrow Button
3
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Life Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to
“Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the
right arrow button to
access the ”Vehicle Info” screen, then scroll up
or down to select “Oil Life.”
4. Push and hold the
right arrow button to
select “Reset”.
5. Push and release the
down
arrow button to
select “Yes,” then push and release the
right
arrow button to reset the Oil Life to 100%.
6. Push and release the up arrow button to
exit the instrument cluster display screen.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the
ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the desired selectable menu icon is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the speedometer menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the
right arrow button to
cycle the display between mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Vehicle Info menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the
right arrow button
to enter the submenus items of Vehicle Info.
Follow the directional prompts to access or reset
any of the following Vehicle Info submenu items:
Tire Pressure
Coolant Temperature
Transmission Temperature — If Equipped
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure
Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
Boost Pressure — If Equipped
Diesel Particulate Filter — If Equipped
Oil Life
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Battery Voltage
Gauge Summary
Engine Hours
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and LaneSense
systems.
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Driver Assist menu is displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature
The instrument cluster display displays the current
ACC system settings. The information displayed
depends on ACC system status.
Push the ACC on/off button (located on the
steering wheel) until one of the following displays
in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster Ú page 116.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the
following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current
LaneSense system settings. The information
displayed depends on LaneSense system status
and the conditions that need to be met.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and Hold the
right arrow button to
reset Average Fuel Economy.
Current Fuel Economy Gauge
Average Fuel Economy Value
Range To Empty
Off Road
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Off Road menu icon is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release
the
left or right arrow button to scroll
through the information submenus.
Drivetrain
Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical
and numerical value of calculated average
front wheel angle from the steering wheel
orientation.
Transfer Case Lock Status: displays “Lock”
graphic only during 4WD High, 4WD High
Part Time, 4WD Low status.
Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If Equipped):
displays front and rear or rear only axle locker
graphic, and sway bar connection graphic with
text message (connected or disconnected).
Pitch And Roll
Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle in
the graphic with the angle number on the
screen.
NOTE:
When vehicle speed becomes too high to display
the pitch and roll, “- -” will display in place of the
numbers, and the graphic will be greyed out.
A message indicating the necessary speed for
the feature to become available will also display.
3
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip A/Trip B
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip menu item is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
right arrow button to enter the submenus of
Trip A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip B information
will display the following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Push and hold the
right arrow button to reset all
information.
Trailer Tow
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Trailer Tow menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the
right or left arrow button to
cycle through the following trailer tow information:
Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold
the
OK button to reset the distance.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM):
Braking Output
Trailer Type
ITBM Gain
Trailer Light Check: Push and hold the OK
button to begin the Trailer Light Test sequence
Ú page 224.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring:
The Instrument
Cluster Display will display the Trailer Tire Pres-
sure for a connected trailer with sensors that
match the active trailer profile. When a low tire is
present, the low tire value will be displayed in red,
and the affected low tire will have a red glow.
“Trailer Tire Low“ will be displayed on the center
bottom of the Instrument Cluster Display screen.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
This menu will display the audio source
information, including the Song name, Artist name,
and audio source with an accompanying graphic.
Phone Call Status
When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status
pop-up will display on the screen. The pop-up will
remain until the phone is answered or ignored.
NOTE:
The call status will temporarily replace the previous
media source information displayed on the screen.
When the pop-up is no longer displayed, the display
will return to the last used screen.
Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Messages Menu item is
highlighted. This feature shows the number of
stored warning messages. Push and release the
right or left arrow button to cycle through
stored messages.
Screen Setup Menu Item
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the
right arrow button to enter the
Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is displayed
in the instrument cluster as well as the location
that information is displayed.
Current Gear
Off
On
Odometer
Unit Without Decimal
Unit With Decimal
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
NOTE:
Menus with (Show/Hide) can push the
right
arrow button to choose whether to show or hide
this menu in the instrument cluster display.
Favorite Menu
Speedometer
Audio
(Show/Hide)
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist
(Show/Hide) —
If Equipped
Screen Setup
Fuel Economy
(Show/Hide)
Trip Info
(Show/Hide)
Commercial
Settings —
If Equipped
Trailer Tow
(Show/Hide)
Messages
Vehicle
Settings —
If Equipped
Upper Left and Upper Right
None Trip B Distance
Oil Life —
If Equipped
Outside Temp —
If Equipped
Trailer Brake —
If Equipped
Turbo Boost —
If Equipped
Range To
Empty
Coolant
Temperature —
If Equipped
Compass —
If Equipped
Current MPG
Battery
Voltage —
If Equipped
Time
Average MPG Trip A Distance
Trailer Trip —
If Equipped
Oil Pressure —
If Equipped
Oil
Temperature —
If Equipped
Transmission
Temperature —
If Equipped
Exhaust
Brake —
If Equipped
Fuel Filter Life —
If Equipped
Upper Center
None Trip B Distance Trip A Distance
Outside Temp Compass Trailer Trip
Range To
Empty
Time Audio
Current MPG Average MPG Menu Title
Speedometer
Upper Left and Upper Right
Left Side and Right Side — If Equipped
None
Coolant
Temperature
Range
Average MPG
Transmission
Temperature
Menu Icon
Oil
Temperature
Oil Life
Fuel Filter Life —
If Equipped
Lower Left and Lower Right— If Equipped
None
Battery
Voltage
Time
Outside Temp Oil Life Average MPG
Range To
Empty
Turbo Boost —
If Equipped
Trip A Distance
Current MPG Compass Trailer Trip
Trip B Distance Oil Pressure
Oil
Temperature
Trailer Brake
Transmission
Temperature
Exhaust
Brake —
If Equipped
Coolant
Temperature
Fuel Filter Life —
If Equipped
3
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Restore Defaults
Cancel
Restore
Commercial Settings — If Equipped
Commercial Settings allows the driver to set and
recall additional features when the transmission is
in PARK (P).
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until Commercial Settings displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Follow the prompts to enter the required PIN and
enter the Commercial Settings submenu.
Commercial Settings allows you to access the
following features (if equipped):
Backup Alarm
ParkSense
Aux Switches
PIN Setup
NOTE:
If the vehicle’s PIN is forgotten or not known, see an
authorized dealer to have the PIN reset. If the PIN is
known, you may enter the PIN and restore to the factory
settings. The Default PIN will be “0000”.
DIESEL MESSAGES AND WARNINGS —
6.7L C
UMMINS® DIESEL ENGINE
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Messages
The Cummins® diesel engine meets all diesel
emissions standards, resulting in one of the lowest
emitting diesel engines ever produced. To achieve
these emissions standards, your vehicle is equipped
with a state-of-the-art engine and exhaust system.
These systems are seamlessly integrated into your
vehicle and managed by the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM). The PCM manages engine combustion to allow
the exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn
Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input or
interaction on your part.
Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to
additional maintenance required on your vehicle or
engine. The following messages may display in
your instrument cluster display:
Perform Service
— Your vehicle will require
emissions maintenance at a set interval. To help
remind you when this maintenance is due, the
instrument cluster display will display “Perform
Service”. When the “Perform Service” message is
displayed in the instrument cluster display it is
necessary to have the emissions maintenance
performed. Emissions maintenance may include
replacing the Closed Crankcase Ventilation (CCV)
filter element. The procedure for clearing and reset-
ting the "Perform Service" indicator message is
located in the appropriate Service Information.
Exhaust System — Regeneration Required
Now
— "Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at
Highway Speeds to Remedy" will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display if the exhaust particulate
filter reaches 80% of its maximum storage capacity.
Under conditions of exclusive short duration and low
speed driving cycles, your Cummins® diesel engine
and exhaust after-treatment system may never
reach the conditions required to remove the trapped
Particulate Matter (PM). If this occurs, the “Exhaust
Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway Speeds to
Remedy” message will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display. If this message is displayed,
you will hear one chime to assist in alerting you of
this condition
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle
in areas where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
By simply driving your vehicle at highway speeds
for as little as 45 minutes, you can remedy the
condition in the particulate filter system and
allow your Cummins® diesel engine and
exhaust after-treatment system to remove the
trapped Particulate Matter (PM) and restore the
system to normal operating condition.
Exhaust System — Regeneration In Process
Exhaust Filter XX% Full — Indicates that the DPF
is self-cleaning. Maintain your current driving
condition until regeneration is completed.
Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed
—
This message indicates that the DPF self-cleaning is
completed. If this message is displayed, you will
hear one chime to assist in alerting you of this
condition.
Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer Now —
This message indicates regeneration has been
disabled due to a system malfunction. At this
point the engine Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) will register a fault code, the instrument
panel will display a MIL light.
Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See
Dealer
— This message indicates the PCM has
derated the engine to limit the likelihood of perma-
nent damage to the after-treatment system. If this
condition is not corrected and a dealer service is
not performed, extensive exhaust after-treatment
damage can occur. To correct this condition it will be
necessary to have your vehicle serviced by your local
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing
your oil and resetting the oil change indicator by
0 miles remaining will prevent the diesel exhaust
filter from performing it's cleaning routine. This will
shortly result in a Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
and reduced engine power. Only an authorized
dealer will be able to correct this condition.
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Messages
The vehicle will display messages when a derate
(engine power reduction) is activated to protect
the engine during start-up in cold ambient
temperatures.
Engine Power Reduced During Warm-up — This
message will display during start-up when the
ambient temperature is between 10°F (-12°C)
and -10°F (-23°C).
Engine Power Reduced Up To 30 Sec (Seconds)
During Warm-up — This message will display
during start-up when the ambient temperature
is between -10°F (-23°C) and -25°F (-32°C).
Engine Power Reduced Up To 2 Min (Minutes)
During Warm-up — This message will display
during start-up when the ambient temperature
is -25°F (-32°C) and below.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine warm
up protection feature that may limit engine
performance after cold starting at low ambient
temperatures. The length of time engine speed
is limited is dependent upon engine coolant
temperature. Engine speed may be briefly
limited to 1,000 RPM after starting with coolant
temperature below freezing conditions, and
may be limited to 1,000 RPM for up to approxi-
mately two minutes under more severe cold
conditions.
Coolant Low — This telltale will turn on to
indicate the vehicle coolant level is low
Ú page 380.
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust
system could occur soon with continued operation.
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
exhaust system could occur soon with continued
operation.
3
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning
Messages
There are four different messages which are
displayed if the vehicle detects that the DEF
system has been filled with a fluid other than DEF,
has experienced component failures, or when
tampering has been detected. The vehicle may be
limited to a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) if
the DEF system is not serviced within less than
200 miles (322 km) of the fault being detected.
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the
following warnings will display:
DEF Low Refill Soon
— This message will display
when the low level is reached, during vehicle
start-up, and with increased frequency during
vehicle operation. It will be accompanied by a
single chime. Approximately 5 gallons (19 Liters)
of DEF is required to refill the tank when this
message is initially displayed. on pickup applica-
tions, and approximately 7 gallons (26 Liters) are
required on chassis-cab applications.
Speed Limited to 5 MPH in XXX mi Refill DEF —
This message will continuously display if the
“DEF Low Refill Soon” message is ignored, and
the frequency of occurrence of the chime will
increase unless up to 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) of
DEF is added to the tank.
5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or
Refuel Refill DEF — This message will continu-
ously display when the counter reaches zero,
and will be accompanied by a periodic chime.
The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum
speed of 5 mph upon the first of the following
conditions to occur:
If the vehicle is shutoff and restarted.
If the vehicle is idled for an extended period
of time, approximately one hour or greater.
If the system detects that the level of fuel in
the tank has increased.
Add a minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) of DEF
to the tank in order to avoid vehicle operation at
a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
NOTE:
A minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) may be
required to restore normal vehicle operation.
Although the vehicle will start normally and can be
placed in gear after this message has been initially
displayed, extreme caution should be utilized since
the vehicle will only be capable of maneuvering at
a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault Warning
Messages
There are five different messages which are
displayed if the vehicle detects that the DEF
system has been filled with a fluid other than DEF,
has experienced component failures, or when
tampering has been detected. The vehicle may be
limited to a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) if
the DEF system is not serviced within less than
200 miles (322 km) of the fault being detected.
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the
following warnings will display:
Service DEF System See Dealer — This message
will display when the fault is initially detected,
each time the vehicle is started, and periodically
during driving. The message will be accompa-
nied by a single chime. We recommend you
drive to your nearest authorized dealer and
have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
5 MPH Max Speed in 150 mi Service DEF
System See Dealer
— This message will display if
the DEF system has not been serviced after the
“Service DEF System – See Dealer” message is
displayed. This message will continuously display
until the mileage counter reaches zero, and will be
accompanied by a periodic chime. The message will
continue to countdown until it reaches zero unless
the vehicle is serviced. We recommend you drive to
your nearest authorized dealer and have your
vehicle serviced immediately.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
NOTE:
Under some circumstances this mileage counter
may start with a value of less than 150 miles
(241 km). For example, if recurring faults are
detected in a time interval of less than 40 hours,
the counter may restart at the value where it
stopped when a previous fault was temporarily
remedied, or at a minimum of 50 miles (80 km).
5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or
Refuel Service DEF See Dealer — This message
will continuously display when the mileage
counter reaches zero, and will be accompanied
by a periodic chime.
The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum
speed of 5 mph upon the first of the following
conditions to occur:
If the vehicle is shutoff and restarted.
If the vehicle is idled for an extended period
of time, approximately one hour or greater.
If the system detects that the level of fuel in
the tank has increased.
5 MPH Max Speed Service DEF System See
Dealer
— This message will continuously display,
and will be accompanied by a periodic chime.
Although the vehicle can be started and placed in
gear, the vehicle will only operate at a maximum
speed of 5 mph. Your vehicle will require towing, see
an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
When this message is displayed, the engine can
still be started. However, the vehicle will only
operate at a maximum speed of 5 mph.
Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer — This
message will display when the fault is initially
detected, each time the vehicle is started, and
periodically during driving. The message will be
accompanied by a single chime. We recom-
mend you drive to your nearest authorized
dealer and have your vehicle serviced as soon
as possible.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of
the electrical system and status of the vehicle
battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will
take place to extend the driving time and distance
of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or
turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a risk
of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle
may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not
restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On Some Systems May Have
Reduced Power” will appear in the instrument
cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a
low state of charge and continues to lose electrical
charge at a rate that the charging system cannot
sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a diag-
nostic on the charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system
Ú page 115.
The electrical loads that may be switched off
(if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
Heated Seats/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
3
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because
the electrical loads are larger than the capability
of charging system. The charging system is still
functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC,
USB ports) during certain driving conditions (city
driving, towing, frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms
and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by
long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period
of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load
left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volts portable appliances
like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and
similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
“Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior).
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports.
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature).
Check the audio settings (volume).
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review
specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw
currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecutive
trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and
driving pattern did not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
These indications are indicative and precautionary
and as such must not be considered as exhaustive.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in
the event of a failure indication. All active telltales
will display first if applicable. The system check
menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status.
Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and will
turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the
fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during
startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake
light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock
Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related
to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
in the master cylinder has dropped below a
specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
cation.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door
is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single
chime.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
3
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC system.
If a problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or
flash depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed
in the PARK (P) position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains on with the vehicle running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/
rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing. The light will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the
light does not come on during starting, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too high,
this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for
four minutes or until the engine is able to cool;
whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL
and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does
not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately
and call for service
Ú
page 362.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer.
A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when
the driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
will sound Ú page 307.
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
Trailer Brake has been disconnected.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn
of a high transmission fluid temperature.
This may occur with strenuous usage
such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or
slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light
turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security system is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is
disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the ACC system.
Contact a local authorized dealer for
service Ú page 184.
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when a fault is
detected with the air suspension system.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required
as soon as possible. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
have the brake system inspected by an authorized
dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the ESC
system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go
out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light
comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system.
If this warning light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the problem diagnosed and corrected.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage
or transmission failure.
3
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on,
even if it was turned off previously.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the
driver with visual and steering torque
warnings when the vehicle starts to drift
out of its lane unintentionally without the
use of a turn signal.
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the LaneSense indicator changes
from solid green to solid yellow.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the LaneSense indicator changes
from solid white/green to flashing yellow
Ú page 198.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
3.2 gal (12 L) this light will turn on, and
remain on until fuel is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel
Warning.
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
vehicle coolant level is low.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the
filler cap to disengage the light. If the
light does not turn off, please see an
authorized dealer.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
the light stays on through several typical driving
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate
loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage.
The vehicle should be serviced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible if this occurs.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
Rear Axle Locker Fault Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate when a rear axle locker fault has
been detected.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
or Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian Emergency
Braking (PEB) System. Contact an
authorized dealer for service Ú page 298.
Service LaneSense Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the LaneSense system is not operating
and requires service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal
a fault with the 4WD system. If the light
stays on or comes on during driving, it
means that the 4WD system is not
functioning properly and that service is required.
We recommend you drive to the nearest service
center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Cruise Control System is
not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate when there is a
fault in the sway bar disconnect system.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned previously, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach
higher temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver,
occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
3
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even
if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Air Suspension Alternate Trailer Height
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the Alternate
Trailer Height setting Ú page 160.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels
can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable.
After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer to have your sensor function
checked.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
Air Suspension Bed Lowering Mode
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the Bed
Lowering mode procedure is complete
Ú page 160.
Air Suspension Payload Protection
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the maximum payload may
have been exceeded or load leveling
cannot be achieved at its current ride
height. Protection mode will automatically be
selected in order to “protect” the air suspension
system, air suspension adjustment is limited due
to payload.
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will blink and alert the driver
that the vehicle is changing to a higher
ride height Ú page 160.
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will blink and alert the driver
that the vehicle is changing to a lower
ride height Ú page 160.
Cargo Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cargo light is activated by pushing the
cargo light button on the headlight switch.
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when a
derate (engine power reduction) is activated
for protection of the turbocharger in cold
ambient temperatures.
Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the Diesel Exhaust Brake has been
activated, and is in full strength mode
Ú page 141.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) Off
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is off.
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the front, rear,
or both axles have been locked. The
telltale will display the lock icon on the
front and rear axles to indicate the
current lock status.
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
The Low DEF Indicator will illuminate if
the vehicle is low on DEF Ú page 390.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD
power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL
mode and the front and rear driveshafts
are disengaged from the powertrain.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle
lock has been activated Ú page 152.
3
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4WD Lock Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the 4WD Lock mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed Ú page 152.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the 4WD Low mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide
increased torque at the wheels Ú page 152.
4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the 4WD High mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Snowplow Mode Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
Snowplow Mode has been activated
Ú page 227.
Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front sway bar is disconnected.
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
TOW/HAUL mode is selected.
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate when Trailer Merge Assist has
been activated Ú page 292.
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped
The Water In Fuel Indicator Light will
illuminate when there is water detected in
the fuel filter. If this light remains on, DO NOT
start the vehicle before you drain the water
from the fuel filter to prevent engine damage.
Wait To Start Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate for
approximately two seconds when the
ignition is turned to the RUN position. Its
duration may be longer based on colder
operating conditions. Vehicle will not initiate start
until telltale is no longer displayed Ú page 129.
NOTE:
The Wait To Start telltale may not illuminate if the
intake manifold temperature is warm enough.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Indicator Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set
and a vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 184.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
No Target Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive
Cruise Control is SET and there is no
vehicle in front detected Ú page 184.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is set to the desired
speed Ú page 182.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
Automatic Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the Diesel Exhaust Brake has been
activated, and has switched to Automatic
mode Ú page 141.
ECO Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ECO mode is
active.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates
solid green when both lane markings
have been detected and the system is
“armed” and ready to provide visual and
torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure
occurs Ú page 198.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the parking lights or headlights are
turned on.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash
independently and the corresponding
exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn
signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is
moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
If equipped with fog lamps, the fog lamp on the
side of the activated turn signal will also illumi-
nate to provide additional light when turning.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the vehicle
equipped with ACC has been turned on
but not set Ú page 184.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is ready, but not set
Ú page 182.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC
feature is turned on. The lamp will be on
solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only
be armed when the transfer case is in the
4WD Low position and the vehicle speed is less
then 20 mph (32 km/h). If these conditions are not
met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the
HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but
not armed, the LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid white. This occurs when
only left, right, or neither lane line has
been detected. If a single lane line is detected, the
system is ready to provide only visual warnings if
an unintentional lane departure occurs on the
detected lane line Ú page 198.
3
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam headlights
are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to
pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information related
to the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to access this
information to assist with the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle and emissions system
Ú
page 235.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected
to the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is
functioning and is not on when the
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may
not
be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be
determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may
fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station.
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,
you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until
you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine.
This means that your vehicle's OBD II
system is
not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready
and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
in order for your OBD II system to update. A
recheck with the previously mentioned test routine
may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
MIL is on with the engine running.
3
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE
ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten
your seat belts.
The starter should not be operated for more
than 10-second intervals. Waiting a few seconds
between such intervals will protect the starter from
overheating.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the engine with the transmission in PARK
position. Apply the brake before shifting into any
driving range.
NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must
be pressed to shift out of PARK.
If equipped with an 8-speed transmission,
starting the vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible
unless the Manual Park Release has been acti-
vated Ú page 361.
TIP START FEATURE
Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition
switch briefly to the START position and release it.
The starter motor will continue to run and will
automatically disengage when the engine is
running.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is
in the passenger compartment.
NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE
START/STOP B
UTTON
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF posi-
tion, remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ’n Go™ in the ACC or
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accel-
erator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short pushes in a row with
the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h)
before the engine will shut off. The ignition
will remain in the ACC position until the gear
selector is in PARK and the button is pushed
twice to the OFF position.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h),
the instrument cluster will display a “
Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine will shut off
and the ignition will remain in the ACC position. If
vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
vehicle may AutoPark.
Ú
page 127.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
to an ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF,
ACC, and ON/RUN. To change the ignition positions
without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
place the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
time to return the ignition to the OFF position.
AUTOPARK — ROTARY SHIFTER AND
8-S
PEED TRANSMISSION ONLY
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with
placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations on the
following pages occur. It is a back up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary method by
which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
are outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place
the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL
CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying
that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in
the instrument cluster display and near the
gear selector. If the “P” indicator is blinking,
your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
into PARK.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off
the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an
8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition is switched from ON/RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC position. After 30 minutes the
ignition switches to OFF automatically, unless
the driver turns the ignition switch off.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an
8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “
AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the
“
AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear” to
not be seen. In these cases, the shifter must be
returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage
ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift
to P
” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if
vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
4WD Low — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4WD Low.
The message “
AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when
all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
Vehicle is in 4WD Low range
The message “
AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into
PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the “P” in the instrument
cluster display and near the shifter. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed
the “Normal Starting” procedure, it may be
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and hold it there while the engine is
cranking. This should clear any excess fuel in case
the engine is flooded.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the
vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
(Continued)
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for
10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs,
release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run,
but not have enough power to continue running
when the ignition button/key is released. If this
occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator
pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key once
the engine is running smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after a
10 second period of engine cranking with the
accelerator pedal held to the floor, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
use of an externally powered electric engine block
heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten
your seat belts.
The starter should not be operated for more than
25-second intervals. Waiting a few minutes
between such intervals will protect the starter from
overheating.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto-
matic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started,
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 359.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF posi-
tion, remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the engine with the transmission in the
NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake before
shifting to any driving range.
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition
switch briefly to the START position and release it.
The starter motor will continue to run and will
automatically disengage when the engine is
running.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is
in the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
USING THE ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
25 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, remove your foot
from the brake pedal and push the ENGINE
START/STOP button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
Under cold weather conditions, the engine may
not immediately crank if the “Wait To Start” tell-
tale is illuminated. This is normal operation.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™, the vehicle will automatically crank
when the “Wait To Start” time has elapsed
Ú page 131.
TO TURN OFF THE ENGINE USING ENGINE
START/STOP BUTTON
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once,
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the
vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once will turn
the engine off. The ignition will remain in the
ACC position.
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h),
the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds (or three short pushes in a
row) to turn the engine off. The ignition will
remain in the ACC position (NOT the OFF
position) if the engine is turned off when the
transmission is not in PARK.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter ’n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN posi-
tion. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
NOTE:
If the ignition is left in the ACC or ON/RUN (engine
not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition return to
the OFF position.
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON FUNCTIONS —
WITH DRIVER’S FOOT OFF THE BRAKE PEDAL
(IN PARK OR NEUTRAL POSITION)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
to an ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF,
ACC, and ON/RUN. To change the ignition switch
positions without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories follow these steps:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to change the ignition to the
ON/RUN position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
time to return the ignition to the OFF position.
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Starting Procedure —
Engine Manifold Air Temperature
0° F To 66° F (–18° C to 19° C)
NOTE:
The temperature displayed in the instrument cluster
does not necessarily reflect the engine manifold air
temperature
Ú
page 104. When engine temperatures
fall below 66°F (19°C) the “Wait To Start” telltale will
remain on indicating the intake air heater system is
active.
Follow the steps in the “Normal Starting”
procedure except:
1. Pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button with
the driver’s foot on the brake will move the
ignition from OFF or ACC to ON/RUN, and
will illuminate the “Wait To Start” telltale.
The engine will not immediately crank, this is
normal operation.
2. The “Wait To Start” telltale will remain on for a
period of time that varies depending on the
engine temperature.
3. While the “Wait to Start” telltale is on, the
instrument cluster will additionally display a
gauge or bar whose initial length represents
the full “Wait to Start” time period. Its length
will decrease until it disappears when the
“Wait to Start” time has elapsed.
4. After the engine “Wait To Start” telltale goes
off, the engine will automatically crank.
5. After engine start-up, check to see that there is
oil pressure.
6. Release the parking brake and drive.
NOTE:
Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
1,000 RPM and engage the Variable Geometry
Turbocharger at low coolant temperatures to
improve engine warm-up.
The engine will not automatically crank after the
engine “Wait To Start” telltale goes off if a door
or the hood is ajar.
CAUTION!
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
DO NOT START the engine before you drain the
water from the fuel filters to avoid engine
damage Ú page 386.
CAUTION!
Do not crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at
a time or starter motor damage may result. Turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position and wait at least
two minutes for the starter to cool before repeating
start procedure.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is left
ON for more than two minutes after the “Wait To
Start” telltale goes out, reset the intake air heater
by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position
for at least five seconds and then back ON.
Repeat steps 1 through 6 of “Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ Starting Procedure – Engine Manifold Air
Temperature 0° F To 66° F (–18° C to 19° C).”
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine is equipped
with several features designed to assist cold
weather starting and operation:
The engine block heater is a resistance heater
installed in the water jacket of the engine just
above and behind the oil filter. It requires a
110–115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
are available from an authorized Mopar® dealer.
A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter housings
aid in preventing fuel gelling. It is controlled by a
built-in thermostat.
An intake air heater system both improves
engine starting and reduces the amount of
white smoke generated by a warming engine.
NORMAL STARTING PROCEDURE —
E
NGINE MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE
A
BOVE 66° F (19° C)
Observe the instrument panel cluster lights when
starting the engine.
1. Always apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into PARK for an automatic transmission.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position and watch the instrument panel
cluster lights.
4. Place the ignition switch in the START position
and crank the engine. Do not press the
accelerator during starting.
5. Check that the Oil Pressure Warning Light has
turned off.
6. Release the parking brake.
STARTING PROCEDURE — ENGINE
M
ANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE
0°F T
O 66°F (–18°C TO 19°C)
NOTE:
The temperature displayed in the instrument cluster
does not necessarily reflect the engine manifold air
temperature
Ú
page 104. When engine temperatures
fall below 66°F (19°C) the “Wait To Start” telltale will
remain on indicating the intake air heater system is
active.
Follow the steps in the “Normal Starting”
procedure except:
1. The “Wait To Start” telltale will remain on for
a period of time that varies depending on the
engine temperature.
2. While the “Wait To Start” telltale is on, the
instrument cluster will additionally display a
gauge or bar whose initial length represents
the full “Wait To Start” time period. Its length
will decrease until it disappears when the
“Wait To Start” time has elapsed.
CAUTION!
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
DO NOT START the engine before you drain
the water from the fuel filters to avoid engine
damage Ú page 386.
CAUTION!
Do not crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at
a time or starter motor damage may result. Turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position and wait at least
two minutes for the starter to cool before repeating
start procedure.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
3. After the “Wait To Start” telltale goes off, place
the ignition switch in the START position.
Do not press the accelerator during starting.
4. After engine start-up, check that the Oil
Pressure Warning Light has turned off.
5. Release the parking brake and drive.
NOTE:
Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
1,000 RPM and engage the Variable Geometry
Turbocharger at low coolant temperatures to
improve engine warm-up.
Automatic equipped vehicles with optional Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ – If the start button is pushed once
while in PARK with the ignition off and driver’s foot
on the brake pedal, the vehicle will automatically
crank and start after the Wait to Start time has
elapsed. If it is desired to abort the start process
before it completes, the driver’s foot should be fully
removed from the brake pedal prior to pushing the
start button again in order for the ignition to move
directly to off.
If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is left
ON for more than two minutes after the “Wait To
Start” telltale goes out, reset the intake air
heater by turning the ignition switch to the OFF
position for at least five seconds and then back
ON. Repeat steps 1 through 5 of “Starting Proce-
dure – Engine Manifold Air Temperature 0°F To
66°F (–18°C to 19°C).”
STARTING PROCEDURE — ENGINE
M
ANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE BELOW
0°F (-18°C)
In extremely cold weather below 0°F (-18°C) it may be
beneficial to cycle the intake air heater twice before
attempting to start the engine. This can be
accomplished by turning the ignition off for at least
5 seconds and then back to the ON/RUN position after
the “Wait To Start” telltale has turned off, but before
the engine is started. However, excessive cycling of the
intake air heater will result in damage to the heater
elements or reduced battery voltage.
NOTE:
If multiple pre-heat cycles are used before starting,
additional engine run time may be required to maintain
battery state of charge at a satisfactory level.
1. If the engine stalls after the initial start, the
ignition must be turned to the OFF position for
at least five seconds and then to the ON/RUN
position to recycle the intake air heater.
NOTE:
Excessive white smoke and poor engine perfor-
mance will result if intake air heater is not recycled.
CAUTION!
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
DO NOT START the engine before you drain the
water from the fuel filters to avoid engine
damage Ú page 386.
CAUTION!
Do not crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at
a time or starter motor damage may result. Turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position and wait at least
two minutes for the starter to cool before repeating
start procedure.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Heat generated by the intake air heater
dissipates rapidly in a cold engine. If more than
two minutes pass between the time the “Wait
To Start” telltale turns off and the engine is
started, recycle the intake air heater by turning
the ignition switch to the OFF position for at
least five seconds and then back to the
ON/RUN position.
3. If the vehicle is driven and vehicle speed
exceeds 19 mph (31 km/h) before the intake
air heater post-heat (after start) cycle is
complete, the intake air heater will shut off.
4. If the engine is cranked for more than
10 seconds, the post-heat cycle will turn off.
NOTE:
Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
1,000 RPM and engage the Variable Geometry
Turbocharger at low coolant temperatures to
improve engine warm-up.
When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of
fuel or the fuel gels at low temperatures, air is
pulled into the fuel system. If your engine has
run out of fuel Ú page 389.
If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is left ON
for more than two minutes after the “Wait To Start”
telltale goes out, reset the intake air heater by
turning the ignition switch to the OFF position for at
least five seconds and then back ON. Repeat steps
1 through 5 of “Starting Procedure – Engine Mani-
fold Air Temperature 0°F to 66°F (-18°C to 19°C)”
Ú
page 131.
STARTING FLUIDS
The engine is equipped with an automatic electric
air preheating system. If the instructions in this
manual are followed, the engine should start in all
conditions.
WARNING!
Starting fluids or flammable liquids must never be
used in the Cummins® diesel engine (see Warning
label). Never pour diesel fuel, flammable liquid,
starting fluids (ether) into the air cleaner canister, air
intake piping, or turbocharger inlet in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire and
explosion causing serious personal injury and engine
damage.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF posi-
tion, remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous
for a number of reasons. A child or others could
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ’n Go™ in the ACC or
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE
Observe the following when the engine is
operating:
All message center lights are off.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.
Engine oil pressure is above 10 psi (69 kPa)
at idle.
Voltmeter operation:
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation
at various engine temperatures. This cycling
operation is caused by the post-heat cycle of the
intake manifold heater system. The number of
cycles and the length of the cycling operation is
controlled by the engine control module. Post-heat
operation can run for several minutes, and then
the electrical system and voltmeter needle will
stabilize.
The cycling action will cause temporary dimming
of the headlamps, interior lamps, and also a
noticeable reduction in blower motor speed.
COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS
Operation in ambient temperature below
32°F (0°C) may require special considerations.
The following charts suggest these options:
Fuel Operating Range
NOTE:
Use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) Fuels
ONLY.
Fuel Operating Range Chart
*Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel should
only be used where extended arctic conditions
(0°F/-18°C) exist.
NOTE:
Use of Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel or
Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel results in
a noticeable decrease in fuel economy.
Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel is a blend of
Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur and Number 1 Ultra Low
Sulfur Diesel Fuels which reduces the temperature
at which wax crystals form in fuel.
The fuel grade should be clearly marked on the
pump at the fuel station.
The engine requires the use of Ultra Low Sulfur
Diesel Fuel. Use of incorrect fuel could result in
engine and exhaust system damage
Ú
page 443.
If Climatized or Diesel Number 1 ULSD fuel is
not available, and you are operating below
(20°F/-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions,
Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or
equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling
(see Fuel Operating Range Chart).
Under some circumstances increased engine noise
may be audible in the seconds following a cold start.
This is most likely to occur when using fuel that isn't
blended for the ambient temperature present. This
may occur on an unseasonably cold day or when a
truck is fueled in a warmer climate and driven to a
colder climate. The noise can typically be prevented
by using Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment as
recommended (see Fuel Operating Range Chart).
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine Oil Usage
For the correct engine oil viscosity Ú page 380.
Winter Front Cover Usage
A Winter front or cold weather cover is to be used in
ambient temperatures below 32°F (0°C), especially
during extended idle conditions. This cover is equipped
with four flaps for managing total grille opening in
varying ambient temperatures. If a Winter front or cold
weather cover is to be used the flaps should be left in
the full open position to allow air flow to the charge air
cooler and automatic transmission oil cooler. When
ambient temperatures drop below 0°F (-17°C) the four
flaps need to be closed. A suitable cold weather cover
is available from your Mopar® dealer.
Battery Blanket Usage
A battery loses 60% of its cranking power as the
battery temperature decreases to 0°F (-18°C).
For the same decrease in temperature, the engine
requires twice as much power to crank at the same
RPM. The use of 120 Volt AC powered battery
blankets will greatly increase starting capability at
low temperatures. Suitable battery blankets are
available from an authorized Mopar® dealer.
Engine Warm-Up
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is
cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the engine
up to operating speed slowly to allow the oil
pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up.
NOTE:
High-speed, no-load running of a cold engine can
result in excessive white smoke and poor engine
performance. No-load engine speeds should be
kept under 1,000 RPM during the warm-up period,
especially in cold ambient temperature conditions.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine warm-up
protection feature that may limit engine
performance after cold starting at low ambient
temperatures. The length of time engine speed is
limited is dependent upon engine coolant
temperature. Engine speed may be briefly limited to
1000 RPM after starting with coolant temperature
below freezing conditions, and may be limited to
1000 RPM for up to approximately two minutes
under more severe cold conditions.
NOTE:
If ambient temperatures are low and the coolant
temperature is below 180°F (82°C), the engine idle
speed will slowly increase to 1,000 RPM after two
minutes of idle, if the following conditions are met:
Foot is off brake pedal and throttle pedal.
Automatic transmission is in PARK.
Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Applying the throttle will cancel fast idle.
Operating the exhaust brake at idle will greatly
improve warm-up rate and will help keep the
engine close to operating temperature during
extended idle.
ENGINE IDLING
Avoid prolonged idling. Long periods of idling may
be harmful to your engine because combustion
chamber temperatures can drop so low that the fuel
may not burn completely. Incomplete combustion
allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings,
engine valves, and injector nozzles. Also, the
unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting
the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
If the engine is allowed to idle or the truck is driven
on low engine speed drive cycles for more than
two hours, the system will automatically enter an
emissions operating mode that will increase the
engine idle speed to 900 RPM. While in this mode,
which is designed to help maintain the diesel
particulate filter, the engine idle speed will return
to normal when the brake pedal is applied. A small
change in engine tone or a slight change in engine
performance while accelerating may also be
noticeable at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h).
This operating mode may last for up to an hour of
idle time, or around 20 minutes of driving time.
Your truck may have been ordered with an optional
voltage monitoring Idle-Up feature. If a load is placed on
the electrical system while the truck is in park, this
feature will attempt to maintain normal system voltage
by automatically increasing engine idle speed. You may
notice several consecutive increases in idle speed,
up to a maximum of 1,450 RPM, as the system will
attempt to utilize the smallest increase in idle speed
necessary to maintain normal system voltage. The idle
speed will return to normal when either the electrical
load is removed, or when the brake pedal is applied.
NOTE:
For instrument cluster display messages related to
the vehicle's exhaust system Ú page 104.
Idle-Up Feature
The driver-controlled high idle speed feature will
help increase cylinder temperatures and provide
additional cab heat, however, excessive idling may
still cause the exhaust aftertreatment system to
not properly regenerate. Extended periods of idle
time should be avoided.
The Idle-Up feature uses the Cruise Control buttons
to increase engine idle speed and quickly warm the
vehicle's interior.
1. With the transmission in PARK, the parking
brake applied, and the engine running, push
the On/Off button to the ON position, then
push the SET (-) button.
2. The engine RPM will go up to 1,100 RPM. To
increase the RPM, push and hold the RES (+)
button and the idle speed will increase to approxi-
mately 1,500 RPM. To decrease the RPM, push
and hold the SET (-) button and the idle speed will
decrease to approximately 1,100 RPM.
3. To cancel the Idle–Up feature, either push the
CANCEL button, push the On/Off button, or
press the brake pedal.
NOISE
Diesel engines can create noises that may seem
concerning. The nature of a diesel engine is
compression ignition where compressed air and fuel
are mixed and ignited. Weather, barometric pressure,
altitude, and temperature will affect how fuel is ignited
in the engine. Engines will sound different from day to
day or previous model years. Clicking, ticking, or light
knocking is normal and will change from day to day, as
the engine breaks in, and can vary with changes in
ambient temperature. Clicking sound from under the
hood shortly after vehicle shutdown is normal as
actuators such as the EGR valve are cycled. Fuel pump
noise may increase during low speed/light load
conditions when ambient temperature is above 100°F
(38°C), and when fuel tank level is below 10% which is
a normal condition of the fuel system and controls
strategy. Diesel equipped vehicles also have an
exhaust after-treatment system to reduce emissions
utilizing a Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) and a Selective
Reduction Catalyst (SCR). The SCR reduces Nitrogen
Oxides (NOx) using the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
system. DEF is injected directly into the SCR through a
dosing module. This process will create a clicking
sound and at times, will make noise even with the
vehicle shut off. This is normal as the DEF dosing
module is purging DEF. If at any time the Check Engine
Light is on, please visit an authorized dealer.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Idle the engine a few minutes before routine shutdown. After full load operation, idle the engine three to five minutes before shutting it down. This idle period
will allow the lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat away from the combustion chamber, bearings, internal components, and turbocharger. This is
especially important for turbocharged, charge air-cooled engines. Refer to the following chart for proper engine shutdown:
IDLE SHUTDOWN
This feature can be enabled so that the truck will
automatically shutdown when the truck has been
idling for a set period of time when the engine is at
operating temperature. Idle time can be set in
5 minute increments between 5 and 60 minutes.
See an authorized dealer to enable this feature.
NOTE:
The idle shutdown timer is disabled while the PTO
is active.
PROGRAMMABLE MAXIMUM VEHICLE
S
PEED
This feature allows the owner to set a maximum vehicle
speed for the vehicle. The 2500 and 3500 Series
maximum vehicle speed can be set between 40 mph
(64 km/h) and 87 mph (140 km/h).
NOTE:
DO NOT set the maximum vehicle speed to a value
greater than what the vehicle tires are rated for.
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
Avoid Overheating The Engine
The temperature of the engine coolant (antifreeze) (a
mixture of 50% ethylene-glycol and 50% water) must
not exceed the normal range of the temperature gauge
240°F (116°C) with a 21 psi (145 kPa) coolant
pressure cap.
Usually the engine coolant (antifreeze)
temperature indicated during operation will be to
the left of center in the normal range of the gauge.
Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature Idle Time (min.) Before Engine Shutdown
Stop and Go Empty Cool Less than One
Stop and Go Medium - One
Highway Speeds Medium Warm Two
City Traffic Maximum GCWR - Three
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR - Four
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot Five
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
Avoid Low Coolant Temperature Operation
Continual operation at low engine coolant (antifreeze)
temperature below the normal range on the gauge
140°F (60°C) can be harmful to the engine. Low
engine coolant (antifreeze) temperature can cause
incomplete combustion which allows carbon and
varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles.
Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase,
diluting the lubricating oil and causing rapid wear
to the engine.
COOLING SYSTEM TIPS
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating in high ambient temperature
conditions, take the following actions:
City Driving — When stopped, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving — Reduce your speed.
Up Steep Hills — Select a lower transmission gear.
Air Conditioning — Turn it off temporarily.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil
Pressure
When the engine is at normal operating temperature,
the minimum oil pressures required are:
Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed
Parts
All engine failures give some warning before the parts
fail. Be on the alert for changes in performance,
sounds, and visual evidence that the engine requires
service. Some important clues are:
Engine misfiring or vibrating severely.
Sudden loss of power.
Unusual engine noises.
Fuel, oil or coolant leaks.
Sudden change, outside the normal operating
range, in the engine operating temperature.
Excessive smoke.
Oil pressure drop.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the
cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed behind the
front bumper and accessible through the right hole
of the air dam.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming effect
on the engine.
It includes a removable cap that is secured by a
tethered strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for
storage when not in use for the Winter months.
During Winter months, remove the heater cord
wiring assembly from itself on the c-clip.
NOTE:
The block heater will require 110 Volt AC and 6.5
Amps to activate the heater element.
Block Heater Usage
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C),
engine block heater usage is recommended.
For ambient temperatures below –20°F (-29°C),
engine block heater usage is required.
Idle 700 to 800 RPM 10 psi (69 kPa)
Full speed and load 30 psi (207 kPa)
CAUTION!
If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings, shut
the engine off immediately. Failure to do so could
result in immediate and severe engine damage.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades Ú page 447.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first
few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as a problem. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often
during the break in period. Add oil as required.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine does not
require a break-in period due to its construction.
Normal operation is allowed, providing the
following recommendations are followed:
Warm up the engine before placing it under load.
Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged
periods.
Use the appropriate transmission gear to
prevent engine lugging.
Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature
indicators.
Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
Vary throttle position at highway speeds when
carrying or towing significant weight.
NOTE:
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or
no load operation will extend the time before the
engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel economy
and power may be seen at this time.
For additional vehicle break-in requirements
Ú page 221.
Because of the construction of the Cummins®
Turbo Diesel engine, engine run-in is enhanced
by loaded operating conditions which allow the
engine parts to achieve final finish and fit during
the first 6,000 miles (10,000 km).
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK.
The foot-operated parking brake is located below
the lower left corner of the instrument panel.
To apply the parking brake, firmly push the parking
brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, pull
the parking brake release handle.
Parking Brake Release
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
(Continued)
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the Brake Warning Light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will
sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the parking brake before placing the gear selector
in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE — ENGINE
BRAKING (IF EQUIPPED)
The purpose of the exhaust brake (engine braking)
feature is to supply negative (braking) torque from
the engine. Typically, the engine braking is used
for, but not limited to, vehicle towing applications
where vehicle braking can be achieved by the
internal engine power, thereby sparing the
mechanical brakes of the vehicle.
Benefits of the exhaust brake are:
Vehicle driving control.
Reduced brake fade.
Longer brake life.
Faster cab warm-up.
The exhaust brake feature will only function when
the driver toggles it on by pushing the exhaust
brake button until the Exhaust Brake Indicator is
illuminated. Normal (Full Strength) exhaust brake
mode is indicated by a yellow Exhaust Brake
Indicator.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unat-
tended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Exhaust Brake Switch
Once the Exhaust Brake Indicator is illuminated and the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h); the
exhaust brake will automatically operate when the
driver removes pressure from the accelerator pedal.
Exhaust braking is most effective when the engine RPM
is higher. The automatic transmission will downshift
more aggressively in TOW/HAUL mode when the
exhaust brake is enabled to increase brake
performance.
NOTE:
For optimum braking power it is recommended to
use the exhaust brake while in TOW/HAUL mode.
The exhaust brake feature can also be used to reduce
the engine warm-up time. To use the exhaust brake as
a warm-up device, the vehicle must be stopped or
moving less than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Exhaust Brake
Indicator must be on, and the coolant temperature
must be below 180°F (82°C) and ambient
temperature below 60°F (16°C).
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake technology
delivers smoother, less aggressive exhaust
braking characteristics during downhill descents.
Although it can apply full exhaust braking force if
needed, Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake may
not apply obvious braking if the vehicle speed is
not increasing. Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake
is intended to maintain vehicle speed, while Full
Exhaust Brake is intended to reduce vehicle speed.
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake can be enabled
by pushing the exhaust brake button (on the center
stack) again anytime after the normal Full Exhaust
Brake has been turned on. The Exhaust Brake
Indicator in the instrument cluster display will
change from Yellow to Green when Automatic
“Smart” Exhaust Brake is enabled. Pushing the
exhaust brake button again will toggle the exhaust
brake mode to off.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
Do not use the exhaust brake feature when
driving in icy or slippery conditions as the
increased engine braking can cause the rear
wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around
with the possible loss of vehicle control, which
may cause an accident possibly resulting in
personal injury or death.
CAUTION!
Use of aftermarket exhaust brakes is not
recommended and could lead to engine damage.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
(Continued)
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before
the ignition can be turned to the OFF position. This
helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle
without placing the transmission in PARK. This system
also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
ignition is in the ACC position (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission
is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
position) before exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous
for a number of reasons. A child or others could
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle
is stopped or moving at low speeds.
8-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
I
F EQUIPPED
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
electronic gear selector located on the instrument
panel. The transmission gear range (PRND) is
displayed both above the gear selector and in the
instrument cluster. To select a gear range, simply
rotate the gear selector. You must press the brake
pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or
NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at
once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the
gear selector to the appropriate detent. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear
(for example, driver selects PARK while driving),
the position indicator will blink continuously until
the selector is returned to the proper position, or
the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its
shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with
environmental and road conditions. The transmission
electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few
shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This
is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop
within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual
downshifts can be made using the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) shift control. Pushing the
GEAR “-”/GEAR “+” switches (on the steering
wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the
highest available transmission gear, and will
display that gear limit in the instrument cluster as
1, 2, 3, etc Ú page 146. Some models will display
both the selected gear limit, and the actual current
gear, while in ERS mode.
Electronic Transmission Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
ating. This is especially important when the engine
is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb
on an uphill grade.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have properly engaged the transmission
into the PARK position:
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P),
and is not blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply
the parking brake and shift the transmission into
PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy.
The transmission automatically upshifts through
all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select
TOW/HAUL mode or use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear
range Ú page 146. Under these conditions, using
a lower gear range will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat build-up.
CAUTION!
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must start the engine, and
also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 229.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 364.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified
depending on engine and transmission temperature as
well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may
not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely
degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations,
the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more
serious conditions, and indicate what actions may be
necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after
engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a
desired location (preferably, at an authorized
dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible.
If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission. If the transmission
cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is
required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the
highest available gear when the transmission is in
DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission
gear limit to FOURTH gear, the transmission will
not shift above FOURTH gear, but will shift through
the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at
any vehicle speed. When the transmission gear
selector is in DRIVE, the transmission will operate
automatically, shifting between all available gears.
Tapping the GEAR “–” switch (on the steering
wheel) will activate ERS mode, display the current
gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as
the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping
the GEAR “–” or GEAR “+” switch will change the
top available gear.
ERS Control
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the GEAR
“+” switch until the gear limit display disappears
from the instrument cluster.
1 — GEAR “+” Switch
2 — GEAR “–” Switch
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting
occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate
TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve performance and
reduce the potential for transmission overheating or
failure due to excessive shifting.
TOW/HAUL Switch
The TOW/HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL
mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a
second time restores normal operation. Normal
operation is always the default at engine start-up.
If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be
pushed each time the engine is started.
6-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
I
F EQUIPPED
Pickup models may use either AS69RC transmission, or
the 68RFE transmission (which has no PTO access
cover).
The transmission gear position display (located in
the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission
gear range. The gear selector is mounted on the
right side of the steering column. You must press
the brake pedal to move the gear selector out of
PARK Ú page 144. To drive, move the gear
selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE
position. Pull the gear selector toward you when
shifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting
out of PARK.
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics
are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a
new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions.
Manual downshifts can be made using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control.
Pushing the GEAR “-”/GEAR “+” switches (on the
steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will
select the highest available transmission gear, and
will display that gear limit in the instrument cluster
as 1, 2, 3, etc. Ú page 146. Some models will
display both the selected gear limit, and the actual
current gear, while in ERS mode.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
WARNING!
Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when driving
in icy or slippery conditions. The increased
engine braking can cause the rear wheels to
slide, and the vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control, which may
cause an accident possibly resulting in personal
injury or death.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
ating. This is especially important when the engine
is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn
the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have properly engaged the transmission
into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, pull the gear selector
toward you and move it all the way counterclock-
wise until it stops.
Release the gear selector and make sure it is
fully seated in the PARK gate.
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK
if you must exit the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the
ON/RUN position, and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 229.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 364.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy.
The transmission automatically upshifts through
all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select
TOW/HAUL mode or use the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control to select a lower gear range
Ú
page 146. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear range will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and
heat build-up.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal
operating limits, the powertrain controller will
modify the transmission shift schedule and expand
the range of torque converter clutch engagement.
This is done to prevent transmission damage due
to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in
danger of overheating, the Transmission Temperature
Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may
operate differently until the transmission cools down.
NOTE:
Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a
steep grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot
weather. In these conditions, torque converter slip
can impose a significant additional heat load on
the cooling system. Downshifting the transmission
to the lowest possible gear (when climbing a
grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL (when stopped in
heavy traffic) can help to reduce this excess heat
generation.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm-up time of the engine and transmission
to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm
Ú
page 151. On Pickup
models with 68RFE transmission, top overdrive gear is
also inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm, and
during extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or
below), operation may briefly be limited to first and
direct gears only. On trucks with AS69RC transmission,
FIFTH and SIXTH gears may be inhibited briefly on cold
starts below 41°F (5°C), and during very cold
temperatures (-4°F [-20°C] or below), operation may
briefly be limited to third gear only. During this
condition, the ability of the vehicle to accelerate under
heavily loaded conditions may be reduced. In all cases,
normal operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission remains in FOURTH gear (for 68RFE
transmission) or THIRD gear (for AS69RC transmission)
regardless of which forward gear is selected. If an
AS69RC-equipped truck enters Limp Home mode at
highway speeds, it will initially engage FIFTH gear, until
the vehicle slows to a speed where third gear can be
engaged. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
be illuminated. Limp Home mode allows the vehicle to
be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission. If the transmission
cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is
required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the
highest available gear when the transmission is in
DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission
gear limit to FOURTH gear, the transmission will
not shift above FOURTH gear, but will shift through
the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at
any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the
DRIVE position, the transmission will operate
automatically, shifting between all available gears.
Tapping the GEAR “-” switch will activate ERS
mode, display the current gear in the instrument
cluster, and set that gear as the top available gear.
Once in ERS mode, tapping the GEAR “–” or GEAR
“+” switch will change the top available gear.
Electronic Range Select
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the GEAR
“+” switch until the gear limit display disappears
from the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply push and
hold the GEAR “–” switch. The transmission will
shift to the range from which the vehicle can best
be slowed down.
1 — GEAR “+” Switch
2 — GEAR “–” Switch
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
Transmission
Gear Limit
Display
1 2 3 4 5 6 D
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1 1-2 1-3
1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6
CAUTION!
When using ERS for engine braking while
descending steep grades, be careful not to
overspeed the engine. Apply the brakes as
needed to prevent engine overspeed.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an
electronically controlled Overdrive (FIFTH and
SIXTH gears). The transmission will automatically
shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are
present:
The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
The transmission fluid has reached an
adequate temperature.
The engine coolant has reached an adequate
temperature.
The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting
occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate
TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve performance and
reduce the potential for transmission overheating or
failure due to excessive shifting. When operating in
TOW/HAUL mode, transmission upshifts are delayed,
and the transmission will automatically downshift (for
engine braking) when the throttle is closed and/or
during steady braking maneuvers.
TOW/HAUL Switch
The TOW/HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL
mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a
second time restores normal operation. Normal
operation is always the default at engine start-up.
If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be
pushed each time the engine is started.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has
been included in the automatic transmission on
your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter
engages automatically at calibrated speeds.
This may result in a slightly different feeling or
response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically
disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage, until the
transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
(usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving).
Because engine speed is higher when the torque
converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if
the transmission is not shifting properly when cold.
This is normal. Using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control, when the transmission is suffi-
ciently warm, will demonstrate that the transmission
is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
If the vehicle has not been driven for several days,
the first few seconds of operation after shifting the
transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is
due to the fluid partially draining from the torque
converter into the transmission. This condition is
normal and will not cause damage to the transmis-
sion. The torque converter will refill within five
seconds after starting the engine.
WARNING!
Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when driving in icy
or slippery conditions. The increased engine braking
can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle
to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle
control, which may cause an accident possibly
resulting in personal injury or death.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
There can be up to six auxiliary switches located in
the lower switch bank of the instrument panel
which can be used to power various electronic
devices and Power Take Off (PTO). If equipped, it
will take the place of the sixth auxiliary switch.
Connections to the switches are found under the
hood in the connectors attached to the auxiliary
Power Distribution Center.
You have the ability to configure the functionality of
the auxiliary switches via the instrument cluster
display. All switches can now be configured for
setting the switch type operation to latching or
momentary, power source of either battery or
ignition, and ability to hold last state across key
cycles.
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when switch
type is set to latching and power source is set to
ignition.
For further information on using the auxiliary
switches, please refer to the Ram Body Builder’s
Guide by accessing
www.rambodybuilder.com
and choosing the appropriate links.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise
Cancellation system that cannot be turned off.
This system is designed to address exhaust
and engine noise. The system relies on four
microphones embedded in the headliner, which
monitor exhaust and engine noise, and assists an
onboard frequency generator, which creates
counteracting sound waves in the audio system’s
speakers. This helps keep the vehicle quiet at idle
and during drive. The system is deactivated when
the windows are rolled down.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a
manually shifted transfer case or an electronically
shifted transfer case.
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER
C
ASE (8-SPEED TRANSMISSION) —
I
F EQUIPPED
This is an electronically shifted transfer case and is
operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer
Case Switch), which is located on the instrument
panel.
Four-Position Transfer Case
This electronically shifted transfer case provides
four positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH)
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
N (Neutral)
For additional information on the appropriate use
of each transfer case position, see the following:
2WD
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
4WD HIGH
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range provides
torque to the front driveshaft (engages four-wheel
drive) which allows front and rear wheels to spin at the
same speed. This provides additional traction for loose,
slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides
low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque
(increased torque over 4WD HIGH) to the front
wheels, allowing front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. This range provides additional
traction and maximum pulling power for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h) in this range.
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be
used for flat towing behind another vehicle
Ú page 229.
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed
to be driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD)
for normal street and highway conditions on dry,
hard surfaced roads. Driving the vehicle in
two-wheel drive will have greater fuel economy
benefits as the front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive.
When additional traction is required, the transfer
case 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions can be
used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This is accomplished by pushing the
desired position on the four-wheel drive control
switch.
For specific shifting instructions Ú page 154.
The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Driving in the 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions
on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased
tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
NOTE:
The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in the
center of the four-wheel drive Control Switch and is
pushed by using a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used
for recreational towing only Ú page 229.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (Neutral) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (Neutral) position disengages both the
front and rear drive shaft from the powertrain,
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position
indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
4WD LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and
indicate the current and desired transfer case
selection. When you select a different transfer case
position, the indicator lights will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn off.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash
until the transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and
remain on.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions
Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will
remain on.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will
continue to flash.
3. The transfer case
will not shift.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new
transfer case position have been met. To retry the
selection, push the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift
requirements Ú page 154.
The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the
electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this light
remains on after engine start-up or illuminates
during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive
system is not functioning properly and that service
is required.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the two-wheel drive or 4WD HIGH positions at a
given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
conditions permit.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the
transfer case will not shift. The position indi-
cator light for the previous position will remain
on and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been met.
If all the requirements to select a new transfer
case position have been met, the current position
indicator light will turn off, the selected position
indicator light will flash until the transfer case
completes the shift. When the shift is complete,
the position indicator light for the selected posi-
tion will stop flashing and remain on.
2WD TO 4WD HIGH
Push the desired position on the four-wheel drive
control switch to shift the transfer case. Shifts
between two-wheel drive and 4WD HIGH can
be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion.
With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will
engage/disengage faster if you momentarily
release the accelerator pedal after turning the
control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position with the
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake
may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause
personal injury or death.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
engine either running or off. This shift cannot be
completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC
position.
NOTE:
The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD/4WD HIGH if the front and/or rear
wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation,
the selected position indicator light will flash and
the original position indicator light will remain on.
At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the
wheels to complete the shift.
2WD OR 4WD HIGH TO 4WD LOW
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling
2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped.
You can use either of the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to
2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the desired position on
the transfer case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is on (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position and the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Push the desired position on the transfer case
control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is on (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alter-
nate Procedure are not satisfied prior to
attempting the shift, then the desired position
indicator light will flash continuously while the
original position indicator light is on, until all
requirements have been met.
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN posi-
tion for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
switch is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift
will not take place and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER
C
ASE (6-SPEED TRANSMISSION) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The electronic shift transfer case is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch),
which is located on the instrument panel.
Four-Position/Part-Time Transfer Case
This electronically shifted transfer case provides
four positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH)
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
N (NEUTRAL)
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
For additional information on the appropriate use
of each transfer case position, see the following:
2WD
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
4WD HIGH
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range provides additional traction for
loose, slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides
low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to
the front wheels, forcing the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. This range provides
additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be
used for flat towing behind another vehicle
Ú page 229.
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed
to be driven in the two-wheel drive position
(two-wheel drive) for normal street and highway
conditions on dry, hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the transfer
case 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions can be
used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This is accomplished by rotating the
four-wheel drive Control Switch to the desired
position.
For specific shifting instructions Ú page 157.
The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Driving in the 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions
on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased
tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
NOTE:
The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on
the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control
Switch. The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to
be used for recreational towing only Ú page 229.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD
and 4WD LOW) are located in the instrument cluster
and indicate the current and desired transfer case
selection. When you select a different transfer case
position, the indicator lights will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash
until the transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and
remain ON.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions
Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will
remain ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will
continue to flash.
3. The transfer case
will not shift.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (Neutral) position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The transfer case
N (Neutral) position disengages both the front
and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and
will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection,
turn the control switch back to the current position, wait
five seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift
requirements
Ú
page 157.
The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the
electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this light
remains on after engine start-up or illuminates
during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive
system is not functioning properly and that service
is required.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the two-wheel drive or 4WD HIGH positions at a
given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
conditions permit.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the
transfer case will not shift. The position indi-
cator light for the previous position will remain
ON and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been met.
To retry a shift: return the control switch back to
the original position, make certain all shift
requirements have been met, wait five seconds
and try the shift again.
If all the requirements to select a new transfer
case position have been met, the current posi-
tion indicator light will turn OFF, the selected
position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift. When the
shift is complete, the position indicator light for
the selected position will stop flashing and
remain ON.
2WD TO 4WD HIGH
Push the desired position on the four-wheel drive
control switch to shift the transfer case. Shifts
between two-wheel drive and 4WD HIGH can be
done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentarily release the
accelerator pedal after turning the control switch. If
the vehicle is stopped, the ignition switch must be in
the ON/RUN position with the engine either running
or off. This shift cannot be completed if the ignition
switch is in the ACC position.
NOTE:
The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD/4WD HIGH if the front and/or rear
wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation,
the selected position indicator light will flash and
the original position indicator light will remain on.
At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the
wheels to complete the shift.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake
may allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause
personal injury.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
2WD OR 4WD HIGH TO 4WD LOW
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling
2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped.
You can use either of the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to
2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the desired position on
the transfer case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is on (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position and the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Push the desired position on the transfer case
control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is on (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alter-
nate Procedure are not satisfied prior to
attempting the shift, then the desired position
indicator light will flash continuously while the
original position indicator light is on, until all
requirements have been met.
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN posi-
tion for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
switch is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift
will not take place and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
MANUALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER CASE —
I
F EQUIPPED
The transfer case provides four positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H)
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4H)
N (Neutral)
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L)
For additional information on the appropriate use
of each transfer case position, see the following:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range
locks the front and rear driveshafts together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery
road surfaces only.
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be
used for flat towing behind another vehicle
Ú page 229.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks
the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the
2H position for normal street and highway
conditions such as dry, hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L
positions can be used to lock the front and rear
driveshafts together and force the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by simply moving the gear selector
to the desired positions once the appropriate
speed and gear requirements are met.
Ú page 159 for further information.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and
4L positions on dry, hard surfaced roads may
cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster will alert the driver that the
vehicle is in four-wheel drive and that the front and
rear driveshafts are locked together. This light will
illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into
either the 4H or 4L position. There is no light for the
2H or N (Neutral) positions on some models.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2H
or 4H positions at a given road speed. Take care
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference will
adversely affect shifting and can cause damage to
the drivetrain.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause
damage to driveline components.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
conditions permit.
NOTE:
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be expe-
rienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold
temperatures.
Shifting Procedure — Manually Shifted
Transfer Case
2H TO 4H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion,
shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentarily release the
accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Apply a
constant force when shifting the transfer case lever.
2H OR 4H TO 4L
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of 4L some gear noise
may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detri-
mental to the vehicle or occupants.
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h),
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the
vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h),
shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired
position. Do not pause in transfer case Neutral.
NOTE:
Pausing in transfer case N (Neutral) in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission may
require shutting the engine off to avoid gear clash
while completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift
the transmission into N (Neutral), hold your foot on
the brake, and turn the engine off. Complete the
range shift to the desired position.
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped, however difficulty may occur
due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for teeth align-
ment and shift completion to occur. The preferred
method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage
4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph
(3 to 5 km/h).
Do not attempt to shift into or out of 4L while the
transmission is in gear.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
N (Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even
if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in
the vehicle.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transfer Case Position Indicator Light
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that
the front axle is fully engaged and all four wheels
are driving.
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
This air suspension system is a rear leveling ride
height system. The main purpose of this system is
to maintain the truck’s rear ride height level. There
are two selectable heights that can be chosen
based on your operating conditions.
The system requires that the ignition be in the
ON/RUN position or the engine running with zero
vehicle speed for all user requested changes and
load leveling.
Rear Leveling Ride Height Switch
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for normal
driving. It will automatically adjust to maintain the
rear ride height as conditions change.
Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) – Lowers the vehicle
approximately 1 inch (25 mm) for a level truck, to
be used as required while trailer towing. It will
automatically adjust to maintain the rear ride
height as conditions change.
Trailer Decoupling/Unloading
– The air suspension
system will continue to load level after the vehicle
has been turned off for 10 minutes without
compressor activation. This allows for easy removal
of a trailer and/or load from the back of the truck by
maintaining the ride height. After 10 minutes you
will need to turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position
for the air suspension to re-level due to addition/
removal of load in the vehicle. If the air suspension
system is disabled using the settings menu (Tire
Jack Mode, Transport Mode, Alignment Mode, or
Bed Lowering Mode) the system will remain disabled
when the vehicle is turned off. Reactivating the air
suspension can be accomplished via the settings
menu or driving the vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h)
for Tire Jack Mode, Alignment Mode, Transport
Mode and Bed Lowering Mode.
NOTE:
Most 3500 models will not lower to Alternate
Trailer Height (ATH) when unloaded.
For further information Ú page 216.
AIR SUSPENSION MODES
The air suspension system has multiple modes to
protect the system in unique situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension
system has a feature which allows the automatic
leveling to be disabled
Ú
page 104 or
Ú
page 236.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running.
Transport Mode
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the
road, the air suspension system has a feature
which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit height
and disable the automatic load leveling system
Ú page 104 or Ú page 236.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure
volume of air to operate the system. To avoid
personal injury or damage to the system, see an
authorized dealer for service.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode
must be enabled Ú page 104 or Ú page 236.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running.
Bed Lowering Mode
This setting is used to lower the rear suspension to the
lowest possible height and disable the air suspension
system. It enables easier loading/unloading of the
truck and makes it easier to hook up trailers
Ú
page 104 or
Ú
page 236.
Protection Strategy
In order to protect the air suspension system,
the vehicle will disable load leveling as required
(suspension overloaded, battery charge low, etc.).
Load leveling will automatically resume as soon as
system operation requirements are met. See an
authorized dealer if system does not resume.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message
will appear in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 104.
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system
error has been detected.
See an authorized dealer for system service if
normal operation does not resume.
OPERATION
Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) button
once while at Normal Ride Height (NRH), will lower
the vehicle to Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) and will
illuminate the LED.
NOTE:
The LED will continuously blink until vehicle
Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) has been achieved
and the LED will turn on.
Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) again
will raise the vehicle to Normal Ride Height (NRH).
NOTE:
The LED will continuously blink until Normal Ride
Height (NRH) has been achieved and the LED will
turn off.
Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illu-
minated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving
the vehicle, or deselecting the mode via the
interface.
Tire/Jack Mode – No indicator lamps will be illu-
minated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving
the vehicle, or by deselecting the mode via the
interface.
Wheel Alignment Mode – No indicator lamps will
be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is
disabled by driving the vehicle, or by deselecting
the mode via the interface.
Bed Lowering Mode – Telltale on the cluster will
be illuminated. Bed Lowering Mode is disabled
by driving the vehicle, or deselecting the mode
via the interface.
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — POWER WAGON
MODELS ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)
This vehicle is equipped with electronically locking
front and rear differentials. These differentials,
when engaged, mechanically lock together the axle
shafts forcing the wheels to spin at an equal rate.
This allows the vehicle to maintain its momentum
and prevents it from becoming stuck. The locking
front and rear differentials should only be engaged
during low-speed, extreme off-road situations
where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with
the ground. It is not recommended to drive the
vehicle with the differentials locked on pavement
due to the reduced ability to turn and speed
limitations.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
AXLE Lock Selector
The locking axles are controlled by the axle lock
buttons.
Under normal driving conditions, the vehicle
should be left in the AXLE UNLOCK position.
NOTE:
Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK
position, the limited slip differential in the rear
axle still provides torque biasing capability for
moderate low traction environments.
During the command to lock the axle, the indicator
light will flash until the axle is locked. After the lock
command has been successfully executed, the
light will remain on solid.
To lock the rear axle, place the vehicle in 4WD
LOW, 4WD HIGH or two-wheel drive Ú page 152.
Push the REAR LOCK button while traveling less
than 10 mph (16 km/h). The REAR LOCK indicator
light will remain on when the rear axle is locked.
NOTE:
Left to right wheel speed difference may be
necessary to allow the axle to fully lock. If the indi-
cator light is flashing after placing the vehicle in
the REAR LOCK or FRONT/REAR LOCK position,
drive the vehicle in a turn or on loose gravel to
expedite the locking action.
To lock the front axle, push the FRONT/REAR LOCK
button while traveling less than 10 mph (16 km/h)
in 4WD LOW. The FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator
light will be solid when the front axle is locked.
NOTE:
The rear axle must be locked before the front axle
will lock.
When both the axles are locked, to unlock the front
axle, push the REAR LOCK button while in 4WD
LOW. The FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator light will go
out when the axle is unlocked.
NOTE:
The axle lockers could be torque locked due to side
to side loads on the axle. Driving slowly while
turning the steering wheel from a left hand turn to
a right hand turn or driving in REVERSE for a short
distance may be required to release the torque
lock and unlock the axles.
To unlock the rear axle, push the AXLE UNLOCK
button. The REAR LOCK indicator light will go out
when the rear axle is unlocked.
1 — FRONT/REAR LOCK – the front and rear axles
are locked
2 — REAR LOCK – the rear axle is locked
3 — AXLE UNLOCK – the front and rear axles are
unlocked
CAUTION!
Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard
surfaced roads. The ability to steer the vehicle
is reduced and damage to the drivetrain may
occur when the axles are locked on hard
surfaced roads.
Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is
stuck and the tires are spinning. You can damage
drivetrain components. Lock the rear axle before
attempting situations or navigating terrain, which
could possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck.
WARNING!
Do not use the locked axle position for normal
driving. A locked front axle is intended for off-road
driving only. Locking the front axle during on-road
driving will reduce the steering ability. This could
cause a collision and you may be seriously injured.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER
WAGON ONLY
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system
allows greater front suspension travel in off-road
situations.
Due to the use of taller springs, this vehicle has an
increased ride height of approximately 1.9 inches
(48.3 mm) in the front and 1.5 inches (38.1 mm)
in the rear. A major advantage to increasing ride
height is the positive effect it has on approach/
departure and break over angles.
This system is controlled by the electronic control
sway bar switch located below the instrument
panel.
SWAY BAR Disconnect Button
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system.
Push the switch again to deactivate the system.
The Sway Bar Indicator Light (located in the
instrument cluster) will illuminate when the bar is
disconnected. The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash
during activation transition, or when activation
conditions are not met. The stabilizer/sway bar
should remain in On-Road mode during normal
driving conditions.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either
4WD HIGH or 4WD LOW and push the SWAY BAR button
to obtain the Off-Road position
Ú
page 152. The Sway
Bar Indicator Light will flash until the stabilizer/sway
bar has been fully disconnected.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due
to left and right suspension height differences.
This condition is due to driving surface differences
or vehicle loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway
bar to disconnect/reconnect, the right and left
halves of the bar must be aligned. This alignment
may require that the vehicle be driven onto level
ground or rocked from side to side.
To return to the On-Road mode, push the SWAY
BAR button again.
WARNING!
Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on
hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph
(29 km/h), you may lose control of the vehicle, which
could result in serious injury or death. The front
stabilizer bar enhances vehicle stability and assists
in maintaining control of the vehicle. The system
monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect
the stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h).
This is indicated by a flashing off road light and solid
on road light. Once vehicle speed is reduced below
14 mph (22 km/h), the system will attempt to return
to the Off-Road mode.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to On-Road
mode, vehicle stability is reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h). Driving
faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) may cause loss of
control of the vehicle, which could result in serious
injury or death. Contact your local service center for
assistance.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER
WAGON ONLY
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS AND VEHICLE
C
HARACTERISTICS
Your vehicle has excellent on and off-road
capabilities. These off-road capabilities will allow
you to explore those wilderness trails where few
travel, providing a source of exciting and satisfying
recreation. Before you venture out, you should
contact your local governmental agency to
determine the designated Off-Road Vehicle (ORV)
trails or recreation areas. You should always tread
lightly and only use established roads, trails or ORV
recreational areas.
The National Forest Service, Bureau of Land
Management, or local Department of Natural
Resources are a wealth of information and usually
have maps with marked trails.
Skid Plates And Underbody Protection
Steel skid plates protect the major driveline
components of the truck including the fuel tank,
transfer case and steering damper. In addition, this
vehicle is equipped with boxed cross members and
fore/aft rails. This additional protection allows the
vehicle to be utilized in severe off-road situations
that would be considered impassable by a normal
truck.
Ramp Travel Index (RTI)
The RTI is the distance, in inches, that you can drive
your vehicle with one wheel on a 20-degree ramp
without lifting any other wheel off the ground. This
distance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of
the vehicle and multiplied by 1,000 is the RTI. This
vehicle has an RTI of 429 (connected sway bar) or an
RTI of 538 (disconnected sway bar), which means
you can articulate one front wheel 22 inches (56 cm)
or 27.5 inches (70cm) in the air while the other
three wheels remain in contact with the ground.
Water Fording Characteristics
Water fording characteristic is the vehicle's ability
to cross a body of still water, where the powertrain
and drivetrain are safe from water ingestion.
This vehicle has high water fording characteristics
with the ability to cross a pool of water, without
stopping, 24 inches (60 cm) deep at a maximum
speed of 10 mph (16 km/h) and a pool of water
30 inches (76 cm) deep at a maximum speed of
5 mph (8 km/h), both with an entrance ramp angle
of 1.3 degrees.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle
Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the
simultaneous use of the brake and throttle (two
footed driving). When climbing rocks, logs, or other
stepped objects, using light brake pressure with
light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or
lurching. This technique is also used when you
need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep
incline.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving
off-road. You should be familiar with the terrain and
area before proceeding. There are many types of
surface conditions: hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks,
grass, sand, mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a
different effect on your vehicle's steering, handling
and traction. Controlling your vehicle is one of the
keys to successful off-road driving, so always keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good
driving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations, turns or
braking. In most cases there are no road signs,
posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore you
will need to use your own good judgment on what is
safe and what isn't. When on a trail you should
always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and
changes in terrain. The key is to plan your future
driving route while remembering what you are
currently driving over.
CAUTION!
The door sill height is 25 inches (63.5 cm).
Water may intrude into the interior of the vehicle
at greater depths.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
When To Use Low Range
When driving off-road, shift into 4WD LOW for
additional traction or to improve handling and
control on slippery or difficult terrain. Due to the
lower gearing, low range will allow the engine to
operate in a higher power range. This will allow
you to idle over obstacles and down hills, with
improved control and less effort. Also, use 4WD
LOW in rain, ice, snow, mud, and sand to get heavy
loads rolling, improve traction, or whenever 4WD
HIGH traction will not do the job.
DRIVING IN SNOW, MUD AND SAND
There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving
in snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less
responsive to steering, acceleration and braking
inputs. Therefore you should accelerate slowly,
leave greater stopping distances and avoid abrupt
vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a slow
constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the
vehicle's momentum.
Snow – In heavy snow or for additional control
and traction at slower speeds, shift the trans-
mission to a low gear and shift the transfer case
to 4WD LOW if necessary. Do not shift to a lower
gear than necessary to maintain headway.
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and
traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop,
try turning your steering wheel no more than a
quarter turn quickly back and forth, while still
applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get a
fresh "bite" and help maintain your momentum.
Mud
– Deep mud creates a great deal of suction
around the tires and is very difficult to get
through. You should use 4WD LOW with a gear
low enough to maintain your momentum without
shifting. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning
your steering wheel no more than a quarter turn
quickly back and forth for additional traction. Mud
holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage
and getting stuck. They are normally full of debris
from previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good
practice before entering any mud hole, get out
and determine how deep it is, if there are any
hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely
recovered if stuck.
Sand
– Soft sand is very difficult to travel through
with full tire pressure. When crossing soft sandy
spots in a trail, maintain your vehicle's
momentum and do not stop. The key to driving in
soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure,
accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers
and maintaining the vehicle's momentum. If you
are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas
or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a minimum
of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire
surface area. Reduced tire pressure will drasti-
cally improve your traction and handling, while
driving on the soft sand, but you must return the
tires to normal air pressure before driving on
pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure you
have a way to air the tires back up prior to
reducing the pressure.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles
in an off-road situation.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your
vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPMs or vehicle speeds because engine
braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
CROSSING OBSTACLES (ROCKS AND
O
THER HIGH POINTS)
While driving off road, you will encounter many
types of terrain. These varying types of terrain bring
different types of obstacles. Before proceeding
review the path ahead to determine the correct
approach and your ability to safely recover the
vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a firm
grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a
complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward
until it makes contact with the object. Apply the
throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure
and ease the vehicle up and over the object.
Using A Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the
obstacle or determine the correct path.
Determining the correct path can be extremely
difficult when you are confronting many obstacles.
In these cases have someone guide you over,
through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
stand a safe distance in front of you where they
can see the obstacle, watch your tires and
undercarriage, and guide you through.
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path
which ensures you drive over the largest with your
tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the
obstacle. The tread of the tire is tougher and
thicker than the side wall and is designed to take
the abuse. Always look ahead and make every
effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout
Or Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or
a large rut, the angled approach is the key to
maintaining your vehicle's mobility. Approach
these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let each
tire go through the obstacle independently. You
need to use caution when crossing large obstacles
with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross any large
obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough
to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get
caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left
at a 45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use
the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout
you just created. You should now be able to drive
out following the trench you just created at a
45-degree angle.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire
unseating and total loss of air pressure.
To reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at a
reduced tire pressure, reduce your speed and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering
system loading which could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large
enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is
large enough to contact the door sills.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing
an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle
(approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one
front tire to be on top of the log while the other just
starts to climb the log. While climbing the log,
modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid
spinning the log out from under your tires. Then
ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
Getting High Centered
If you get hung up or high centered on an object, get out
of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is
hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and
what is the best direction to recover the vehicle.
Depending on what you are in contact with, jack the
vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the
weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle
down. You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching
the vehicle off the object.
HILL CLIMBING
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good
understanding of your abilities and your vehicle's
limitations. Hills can cause serious problems.
Some are just too steep to climb and should not be
attempted. You should always feel confident with
the vehicle and your abilities. You should always
climb hills straight up and down. Never attempt to
climb a hill on an angle.
Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach
a hill consider its grade or steepness. Determine
if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction is
on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and
down? What is on top and the other side? Are
there ruts, rocks, branches or other obstacles
on the path? Can you safely recover the vehicle
if something goes wrong? If everything looks
good and you feel confident, then change trans-
mission into a lower gear, shift the transfer case
into 4WD LOW and proceed with caution. You
should use first gear and 4WD LOW for very
steep hills.
Driving Uphill – Once you have determined your
ability to proceed and have shifted into the
appropriate gear, line your vehicle up for the
straightest possible run. Accelerate with an easy
constant throttle and apply more power as you
start up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep
grade, the abrupt change of grade could cause
you to lose control. If the front end begins to
bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring all
four tires back on the ground. As you approach
the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and
slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start
to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, ease
off the accelerator and maintain headway by
turning the steering wheel no more than a
quarter turn quickly back and forth. This will
provide a fresh "bite" into the surface and will
usually provide enough traction to complete the
climb. If you do not make it to the top, place the
vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the
grade using engine resistance along with the
vehicle brakes.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater
diameter than the running ground clearance or
the vehicle will become high centered.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Downhill
– Before driving down a steep
hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a
safe descent. What is the surface traction? Is the
grade too steep to maintain a slow controlled
descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight
descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of
the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends
too fast? If you feel confident in your ability to
proceed then make sure you are in 4WD LOW with
the transmission in FIRST gear (manually select
FIRST gear on automatic transmissions) and
proceed with caution. Allow engine braking to
control the descent and apply your brakes if
necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
Driving Across An Incline – If at all possible
avoid driving across an incline. If it is necessary,
know your vehicle's abilities. Driving across an
incline places more weight on the downhill
wheels, which increases the possibilities of a
downhill slide or rollover. Make sure the surface
has good traction with firm and stable soils.
If possible transverse the incline at an angle
heading slightly up or down.
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you
stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
and immediately apply the brake. Restart the
engine and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly
down the hill allowing the compression braking
of the engine and transmission to help regulate
your speed. If the brakes are required to control
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid
locking or skidding the tires.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type
of water. Water crossings should be avoided if
possible and only be attempted when necessary, in
a safe responsible manner. You should only drive
through areas which are designated and approved.
You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the
environment. You should know your vehicle's
abilities and be able to recover it if something goes
wrong. You should never stop or shut a vehicle off
when crossing deep water unless you ingested
water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls
do not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has
ingested water first. The key to any crossing is low
and slow. You want to use FIRST gear in 4WD LOW
and proceed very slowly with a constant slow
speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h] maximum) and light
throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
around on a steep grade. Driving across an
incline increases the risk of a roll over, which
may result in severe injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL.
Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine
braking. Descending a grade too fast could
cause you to lose control and be seriously
injured or killed.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a
rollover, which may result in severe injury.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may
result in tipping and rolling the vehicle, which
may result in severe injury. Always back carefully
straight down a hill in REVERSE. Never back
down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle
brakes. Never drive diagonally across a hill,
always drive straight up or down.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
accelerate through the crossing. After crossing
any water higher than the bottom of the axle
differentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle
fluids for signs of water ingestion.
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water
– As you
approach any type of water you need to determine if
you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary,
get out and walk through the water or probe it with a
stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach
angle, current and bottom condition. Be careful of
murky or muddy waters, check for hidden obstacles.
Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife
and you can recover the vehicle if necessary. The
key to a safe crossing is the water depth, current and
bottom conditions. On soft bottoms the vehicle will
sink in, effectively increasing the water level on the
vehicle. Be sure to consider this when determining
the depth and the ability to safely cross.
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or
Other Standing Water – Puddles, pools, flooded
or other standing water areas normally contain
murky or muddy waters. These water types
normally contain hidden obstacles and make it
difficult to determine an accurate water depth,
approach angle, and bottom condition. Murky or
muddy water holes are where you want to hook
up tow straps prior to entering. This makes for a
faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery. If
you are able to determine you can safely cross,
than proceed using the low and slow method.
Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or
Other Flowing Water – Flowing water can be
extremely dangerous. Never attempt to cross a
fast running stream or river even in shallow
water. Fast moving water can easily push your
vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control.
Even in very shallow water, a high current can
still wash the dirt out from around your tires
putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy. There
is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle
damage with slower water currents in depths
greater than the vehicle's running ground clear-
ance. You should never attempt to cross flowing
water which is deeper than the vehicle's running
ground clearance. Even the slowest current can
push the heaviest vehicle downstream out of
control if the water is deep enough to push on
the large surface area of the vehicle's body.
Before you proceed determine the speed of the
current, the water's depth, approach angle,
bottom condition and if there are any obstacles,
then cross at an angle heading slightly
upstream using the low and slow technique.
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission,
transfer case, engine or vehicle interior can
occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of
water. Water can cause permanent damage to
engine, driveline or other vehicle components
and your brakes will be less effective once wet
and/or muddy.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system
effectiveness by depositing debris onto the
radiator.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It
can push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it
out of control. This could put you and your
passengers at risk of injury or drowning.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
AIRING DOWN FOR OFF-ROAD DRIVING
Running lower tire pressure off-road can improve
your ride comfort and vehicle traction. Reducing
the tire air pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly,
improving its surface area for better flotation and
ability to mold or form to the ground contour.
Different terrain, tires, and vehicles require
different tire pressure. Hard surfaces like rock and
heavier vehicles require higher pressures than
softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles.
You will need to experiment to determine what is
right for your situation. It is easier and faster to let
air out than it is to replace it. Start high and lower
it as required. Remember you must return the tires
to normal air pressure before driving on road or at
highway conditions. Be sure you have a way to
return the tires to their normal on road air
pressure.
VEHICLE RECOVERY
If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation
where you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehicle
recovery should always be given consideration before
attempting a questionable obstacle. You should never
go off-road driving without the ability to recover your
vehicle from a situation. Having another vehicle with
you usually works best for most situations. The first
thing to do is assess the situation. Why are you stuck?
Are you hung up on something? Would it be easier to go
forward or to go backward? Can you still move the
vehicle? Is there an anchor point to winch to? Are you
alone or do you have another vehicle to help? Is there
high risk of vehicle damage during the recovery
process? Answering these questions will help you
determine the best method of recovery. If you can still
move the vehicle slightly and the only issue is slick
ground, then rock cycling your vehicle would be the
first choice. If you have ample room, an additional
vehicle and there is low risk of vehicle impact on the
surroundings, then using a tow strap to the vehicle tow
hooks would be fast and easy. If the vehicle is severely
hung up or in a situation where great care needs to be
taken during the recovery, then nothing can do the job
better than a winch. If you are severely hung up on
something you should jack the vehicle up and stack
something under the wheels to allow the vehicle to roll
off the object without causing further damage. This
should be tried before attempting any recovery method.
Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your
vehicle is one of the easiest, fastest and most
commonly used methods. This simply involves
shifting your vehicle from DRIVE to REVERSE,
while applying throttle after each shift. During
this process, for additional traction, try turning
your steering wheel quickly left and right no
more than a quarter turn. If you are stuck in
mud, sand, or snow try spinning your tires during
this process to clean the debris from the tread
and improve the traction. You want to create a
rocking motion with the vehicle. This helps build
vehicle momentum, which hopefully gets you
out. Remember to ease off and on the acceler-
ator before and after the shift. If after a few rock
cycles your vehicle is not free, stop and try
another method of recovery. Continuous rock
cycling will only cause unnecessary damage to
your vehicle and the environment.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire
damage and may cause tire unseating with total
loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure,
drive at slower speeds and avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers.
CAUTION!
Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without first
clearing the object, may result in additional
underbody damage.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap
– Tow
straps are a quick and easy way to recover your
vehicle from minor situations if you have a
secondary vehicle which is not stuck. The tow
hooks on your vehicle are designed to take the
abusive force generated during vehicle recovery.
Do not use the bumper or any other vehicle
component as an attachment point. Using tow
straps requires coordination between the two
drivers. Good communication and line of sight are
required for a safe recovery. First connect the tow
strap to the correct attachment points on both
vehicles. There should be a least 20 to 30 feet (6
to 9 meters) between the vehicles to allow for a
safe recovery. If necessary join two tow straps
together using a 1.5 inch hard wood dowel. This
will keep the straps from becoming knotted and is
safer than using a clevis pin if the strap breaks.
Next have the tow vehicle back-up, leaving two to
three feet worth of slack in the strap. Then the
tow vehicle, using light throttle, should accelerate
tightening the strap providing the pulling force
needed to free the vehicle. The vehicle being
recovered should assist in the recovery, at the
time of the snap, by slowly spinning the tires in
the same direction as the pulling vehicle. After the
vehicle becomes free, the driver of the previously
stuck vehicle should signal they are free and
should hit their brakes stopping both vehicles.
The driver of the pulling vehicle should let off the
throttle without using the brakes, once signaled
by the other driver. This sequence is important to
avoid having the recovered vehicle hit the pulling
vehicle.
Winching (Refer To “Winch Operation” For Addi-
tional Information)
– Winching is most commonly
used in the following situations: there is no
support vehicle available, a high controlled force
is required to recover the vehicle, there is a high
risk of environmental or vehicle damage, or
where nothing else seems to work. A winch can
deliver a high pulling force with a great deal of
control. It allows you to walk the vehicle out of the
situation in a slow controlled manner. This control
works well for avoiding further vehicle damage.
Once you decide it is time to use the winch look
for a good anchor point. It needs to be strong
enough to hold more than the vehicle's weight
and provide a direction of pull as straight as
possible. Use block and tackle if necessary to
improve the angle of pull or increase the winch's
pulling force. If the anchor point is a tree use a
strap around its base and hook the cable to the
strap. If it is another vehicle, then place that
vehicle in PARK and block the front tires. If you
cannot find an anchor point within reach try using
your spare tire by burying it. Once you have deter-
mined an anchor point hook up the cable,
ensuring there are a least five wraps of cable left
on the drum, and place a floor mat or something
else over the strung out cable. Placing something
over the strung out cable helps keep the cable on
the ground if it breaks. Next, place the vehicle in
FIRST gear and apply a very light throttle as you
power the winch in. Be careful not to allow slack
in the cable as you recover the vehicle. Do not try
to guide the cable into the drum. If it starts to
bunch up on one end, let it. You can re-spool the
cable afterwards. Never use a winch cable as a
tow strap and always stand back while winching.
CAUTION!
Damage can occur when spinning your tires at
an excessive high speed. Do not spin your tires
faster than an indicated 30 mph (48 km/h).
WARNING!
Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two
straps with a clevis pin. These heavy metal
objects could become projectiles if a strap
breaks, which could cause severe injury. Never
leave more than 2 to 3 feet (0.60 to 1 meter) of
slack in the strap. More slack than this greatly
increases the risk of injury and vehicle damage.
Always keep everyone at least 30 feet (9 meters)
away from a strapping or winching situation.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
AFTER DRIVING OFF-ROAD
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going
off-road, it is always a good idea to check for
damage. That way you can get any problems taken
care of right away and have your vehicle ready
when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, partic-
ularly on the chassis, drivetrain components,
steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if
required, and torque to the values specified in
the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They might
hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle
pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes
inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving
in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the
wheels for impacted material. Impacted mate-
rial can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing
the wheels of it will correct the situation.
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
The limited-slip differential provides additional
traction on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel,
particularly when there is a difference between the
traction characteristics of the surface under the
right and left rear wheels. During normal driving
and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs
similarly to a conventional differential. On slippery
surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of
the driving effort to the rear wheel having the
better traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful
during slippery driving conditions. With both rear
wheels on a slippery surface, a slight application
of the accelerator will supply maximum traction.
When starting with only one rear wheel on an
excessively slippery surface, slight momentary
application of the parking brake may be necessary
to gain maximum traction.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden
accelerations when both rear wheels are on a
slippery surface. This could cause both rear wheels
to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on
the crowned surface of a road or in a turn.
WARNING!
Winch cables are under high tension when in
use and can become a projectile if they fail.
Never stand over or straddle the winch cable.
Never jerk or overload the winch cable. Never
stand in front of the vehicle while winching.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in
serious or fatal injury.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking.
You might not have full braking power when you
need it to prevent a collision. If you have been
operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get
your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip
differential never run the engine with one rear
wheel off the ground since the vehicle may drive
through the rear wheel remaining on the ground.
You could lose control of the vehicle.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY
(IF EQUIPPED)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE USING YOUR
W
INCH
General Winch Information
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle
recovery winch. This winch uses the electrical
power from the vehicle charging system to power a
motor that winds the winch rope onto the winch
drum via planetary gear reduction. By nature, a
winch is capable of generating very high forces and
should be used with care. Do not operate the winch
without reading and understanding the complete
winch Owner's Manual.
Tensioning The Winch Rope
The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use.
Follow the instructions below to tension the rope:
1. Un-spool the rope leaving five wraps of rope
on the winch drum.
2. Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point.
3. Apply at least 1,000 lb (454 kg) of tension to the
rope while winding the rope. Always use care to
ensure the rope does not pile up on one side of the
drum and is neatly wound onto the drum.
Low Voltage Interrupt
Your winch is equipped with a device that will
interrupt winch function if the vehicle charging
system voltage drops to a low level. The winch will
not power-in or out for 30 seconds if this device
is tripped. If the interrupt is tripped, the vehicle
should be operated at high idle for a few minutes
to allow the vehicle charging system to recover
before continuing to winch.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF
Y
OUR WINCH
Winch Components
1.
Remote Control:
The remote control provides
the interface between the winch operator and
the winch. The remote control provides the
ability to power the winch in, out, and stop the
winch. To operate the winch, the toggle switch is
pushed down to power the winch in and up to
power the winch out. The winch will stop if the
switch is left in the neutral (center) position.
2. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the
vehicle charging system.
CAUTION!
Be certain the anchor will withstand the load
required to tension the winch rope.
CAUTION!
The winch rope must spool on the winch drum in
the direction indicated on the drum rotation
decal on the winch.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
3. Remote Socket: The remote socket (which will
be located on the bumper assembly) allows
the remote control to be attached to the
control pack to allow the winch to function.
4.
Winch Drum With Integral Brake: The winch
drum allows the rope to be stored on the winch
and transmits force to the rope. The winch is
equipped with an integral brake that will stop
rotation of the winch drum if the winch motor
is stopped.
5.
Synthetic Rope: The synthetic rope allows the
winch to be connected to an anchor to provide
a pulling force. This synthetic rope is highly
flexible, lightweight, and it floats.
6.
Clutch Lever:
The clutch lever allows the winch
drum to be disconnected from the winch motor to
allow the rope to be pulled from the winch by hand.
Fairlead: The hawse fairlead acts as a guide for the
synthetic rope and minimizes damage to the rope.
WINCH ACCESSORIES
The following accessories are necessary to attach
the winch to anchors, change direction of pull, and
for safe winching.
Gloves: It is extremely important to wear
protective gloves while operating the
winch or handling the winch rope. Avoid
loose fitting clothes or anything that
could become entangled in the rope and other
moving parts.
Snatch/Block Pulley: Used properly, the
multi-purpose snatch block allows you to
(1) increase the winch's pulling power;
and (2) change your pulling direction
without damaging the winch rope. Proper use of
the snatch block is covered in “Before You Pull.”
Clevis/D-Shackles: The D-Shackle is a
safe means of connecting the looped
ends of cables, straps and snatch blocks.
The shackle's pin is threaded to allow
easy removal.
Tree Trunk Protector: Typically made of
tough, high-quality nylon, it provides the
operator an attachment point for the
winch rope to a wide variety of anchor
points and objects, as well as protects living trees.
Abrasion Sleeve: The abrasion sleeve is provided
with the synthetic rope and must be used with the
synthetic rope at all times to protect the rope from
potential abrasion wear. The sleeve has a loose fit
so it can easily be positioned along the synthetic
rope to protect from rough surfaces and sharp
corners.
OPERATING YOUR WINCH
CAUTION!
If not installed, the hook strap must be placed
on the hook.
WARNING!
Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding
proper winch usage may result in severe injury.
Always use supplied hook strap to hold the
hook when spooling wire rope in or out.
Never use as a hoist.
Never use to move persons.
Never exceed winch or synthetic rope rated
capacity.
Always wear heavy leather gloves when
handling the synthetic rope.
Never touch synthetic rope or hook while in
tension or under load.
Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is
under load, synthetic rope is in tension, or
rope drum is moving.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
(Continued)
General Information
Practice using your winch before you get stuck.
Some key points to remember when using your
winch are:
Always take your time to assess the situation
and plan your pull carefully.
Always take your time when using a winch.
Use the right equipment for the situation.
Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the
synthetic rope to slip through your hands when
handling the rope.
Only the operator should handle the synthetic
rope and remote control.
Think safety at all times.
Vehicle Recovery Using The Winch
Always stand clear of synthetic rope and load
and keep others away during winching.
Always keep hands and clothing clear of the
synthetic rope, hook and fairlead opening
during operation and when spooling.
Never wrap synthetic rope back onto itself.
Always use a choker chain, wire choker rope or
tree trunk protector on the anchor.
Never attach a recovery strap to the winch
hook to increase the length of a pull.
Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovery
strap attached directly to the winch hook.
Never use bungee or kinetic straps that
develop tremendous and potentially
dangerous amounts of force when stretched.
Always disconnect the remote control when
not in use.
Never winch when there are less than 10 wraps of
synthetic rope around the winch drum.
WARNING!
Always pass remote control through a window
to avoid pinching lead in door, when using
remote inside a vehicle.
Never leave the remote control plugged into the
winch while free spooling, rigging or sitting idle.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Always know your winch: Take the time to fully
read and understand the included Installation
and Operations Guide, and Basic Guide to
Winching Techniques, in order to understand
your winch and the winching operation.
Always inspect winch installation and synthetic
rope condition before operating the winch. Frayed,
kinked or damaged rope must be replaced imme-
diately. Loose or damaged winch installation must
be corrected immediately.
Always be sure any element which can inter-
fere with safe winching operations is removed
prior to initiating winching.
Always keep remote control lead clear of the
drum, synthetic rope and rigging.
Inspect for cracks, pinches, frayed rope, or
loose connections. Replace if damaged.
Be careful not to pull the winch rope collar
through the rollers. Watch and listen to winch
for proper snugness.
Never power hook through fairlead. Could
cause damage.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Inspect the winch, winch mount, and
synthetic rope for damage. Do not use the
winch if the mount is loose or rope shows
excessive wear, frays, or damage.
Winch Rope
2. Put on gloves.
3. Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of
the winch drum, rotate the clutch lever on the
winch to disengage. Freespooling conserves
battery power.
Free Spool Lever
4. Free the winch hook and attach the hook
strap. Free the winch hook from its anchor
point. Attach the hook strap to the hook
(if not attached).
Hook Strap
5. Pull the wire to the anchor point. Pull out
enough wire rope to reach your anchor point.
To prevent losing the end, hold the hook strap
while you work.
Pulling Synthetic Rope
WARNING!
Never touch winch rope or hook while
someone else is at the control switch or during
winching operation.
Never touch winch rope or hook while under
tension or under load.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have
established your anchor point, secure the
tree-trunk protector or choker-chain around
the object.
Tree Trunk Protector
NOTE:
How to choose an anchor point: A secure anchor is
critical to winching operations. An anchor must be
strong enough to hold while winching. Natural
anchors include trees, stumps and rocks. Hook the
cable as low as possible. If no natural anchors are
available when recovering another vehicle, your
vehicle becomes the anchor point. In this case, be
sure to put the transmission in NEUTRAL, apply the
hand brake and block its wheels to prevent your
vehicle from moving. Ideally, you'll want an anchor
point that will enable you to pull straight in the
direction the vehicle will move. This allows the
synthetic rope to wind tightly and evenly onto the
spooling drum. An anchor point as far away as
possible will provide the winch with its greatest
pulling power.
7. Attach the Clevis/D-Shackle and Tree Trunk
Protector. Attach the shackle to the two ends
of the strap or chain and through the hook,
being careful not to over tighten (tighten and
back-off 1/2 turn).
Clevis/D-Shackles
8. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by rotating
the clutch lever on the winch to engage.
NOTE:
Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or disen-
gaged.
9. Connect the remote control to the winch control
box, located on the front fascia/bumper. Be
careful not to let the remote control cord dangle
in front of the winch. If you choose to control the
winch from inside your vehicle, always pass the
remote through a window to avoid pinching the
cord in the door. Always disconnect the remote
control when not in use.
Winch Box Remote Control Connector
CAUTION!
Always be certain the anchor you select will
withstand the load.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
10. Put synthetic rope under tension. Using the
remote control switch, slowly wind the rope
until no slack remains. Once the rope is under
tension, stand well clear of it and never step
over it.
Pulling Synthetic Rope Under Tension
11. Check your anchor. Make sure all connections
are secured and free of debris before
continuing with the winching procedure.
12. Check synthetic rope. The rope should be
neatly wound around the spooling drum.
Improper winding can cause damage to the
synthetic rope.
Synthetic Rope Neatly Wound Around The Spooling Drum
Heavy Blanket Over Rope
In certain situations you may decide to throw a
heavy blanket or similar object over the rope.
A heavy blanket can absorb energy should the
synthetic rope break. Place it on the rope mid-
way between the winch and the anchor point.
Do this before the rope is put under tension. Do
not approach or move the blanket once tension
is applied. Do not allow it to get pulled into the
fairlead. If it is necessary to move or remove the
blanket, slack the tension on the rope first.
13.
Establish "no people" zones:
Make your
intentions clear. Be sure that everyone in the
immediate vicinity surrounding the winching
operation is completely aware of your intentions
before you pull.
Declare where the spectators
should not stand — never behind or in front of
the vehicle and never near the synthetic rope
or snatch block. Your situation may have other
"no people" zones.
No People Zones
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
14. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles
engine on and light tension already on the
synthetic rope, begin winching slowly and
steadily. Be sure that the rope is winding
evenly and tightly around the spooling drum.
For additional assistance, the winched vehicle
can be slowly driven while being pulled by the
winch. Continue pulling until the vehicle is on
stable ground. If you are able to drive the
vehicle, the winching operation is complete.
Using The Remote Control
NOTE:
Avoid overheating the winch motor. For
extended winching, stop at reasonable inter-
vals to allow the winch motor to cool down.
What to look for under load:
The synthetic
rope must always spool onto the drum as
indicated by the drum rotation decal on
the winch. As you power-in, make sure the
synthetic rope winds evenly and tightly on the
drum. This prevents the outer rope wraps
from drawing into the inner wraps, binding
and damaging the synthetic rope. Avoid
shock loads by using the control switch inter-
mittently to take up rope slack. Shock loads
can momentarily far exceed the winch and
synthetic rope ratings. During side pulls the
synthetic rope tends to stack up at one end
of the drum. This stack can become large
enough to cause serious damage to the
winch. So, line up pulls as straight ahead as
possible and stop winching if the synthetic
rope comes close to the tie rods or mounting
plate. To fix an uneven stack, spool out that
section of the rope and reposition it to the
opposite end of the drum, which will free up
space for continued winching.
15. Secure the vehicle. Once recovery of the
vehicle is complete, be sure to secure the
vehicle's brakes and shift the transmission to
PARK. Release tension in the synthetic rope.
16. Disconnect the synthetic rope, and disconnect
from the anchor.
17. Rewind the synthetic rope. The person
handling the synthetic rope should walk the
rope in and not let it slide through the hand,
control the winch at all times.
Rewinding The Synthetic Rope
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury, NEVER put your fingers
inside the hook area as you are powering-in.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
How to spool under no load: Arrange the remote
control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch.
Arrange the synthetic rope so it will not kink or
tangle when spooled. Be sure any synthetic rope
already on the spooling drum is wound tightly and
evenly layered. Tighten and straighten the layer if
necessary. Keep the synthetic rope under light
tension and spool the rope back and onto the
winch drum in even layers. Stop frequently to
tighten and straighten the layers as necessary.
Repeat this process until the winch hook is the
same distance as the full length of the remote
control from the winch. Pinch the hook between
your thumb and forefinger and attach the hook
strap. Hold the hook strap between the thumb and
forefinger to keep tension on the synthetic rope.
Walk the synthetic rope towards the fairlead, care-
fully spooling in the remaining rope by pulsing the
remote control switch.
18. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of
the hawse fairlead.
Hook In Stored Position
19. Disconnect the remote control. Disconnect the
remote control cord from the control box and
store in a clean and dry place. Winching
operations are now complete. Put the cap on
the solenoid plug-in.
NOTE:
Always store the remote control in a protected,
clean, dry area.
RIGGING TECHNIQUES
Various winching situations will require application
of other winching techniques. These could range
from too little distance to achieve maximum pull
using straight line rigging, simply increasing pulling
power, or maintaining a straight-line pulling
situation. You will have to assess what technique is
correct for your situation. Think "safety" at all times.
How To Change The Pulling Direction
Change Pulling Directions
All winching operations should have a straight
line from the winch to the object being pulled.
This minimizes the synthetic rope collecting on one
side of the drum affecting pulling efficiency and
damaging synthetic rope. A snatch block, secured to
a point directly in front of the vehicle will enable you
to change your pulling direction while still allowing
the synthetic rope to be at 90° to wind properly onto
the spooling drum.
Increasing Pulling Power
In some cases, you may find yourself needing more
pulling power. The use of snatch blocks increases
mechanical advantage and that increases your
pulling power.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
Double Line
Wire Rope Routing
Because pulling power decreases with the number
of layers of synthetic rope on the winch drum, you
can use a snatch block to double line out more
rope. This decreases the number of layers of
synthetic rope on the drum, and increases pulling
power. Start by feeding out enough synthetic rope
to free the winch hook. Attach the hook to your
vehicle's frame/tow hook and run the rope through
a snatch block. Disengage the clutch and, using
the snatch block, pull out enough synthetic rope to
reach your anchor point. Do not attach the hook to
the mounting kit. Secure to the anchor point with a
tree trunk protector or choker chain. Attach the
clevis/shackle. Attach the shackle to the two ends
of the strap/chain, being careful not to over tighten
(tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted,
it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under
these conditions, you will observe a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at very low
vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not
indicate that there is a problem with the power
steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power
steering pump may make noise for a short
amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick
fluid in the steering system. This noise should
be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING FLUID
C
HECK
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should
only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal
noises are apparent, and/or the system is not
functioning as anticipated. Check fluid level when
the engine is cold and off. Coordinate inspection
efforts through an authorized dealer.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper
indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled
fluid from all surfaces Ú page 450.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at
the end of the steering wheel travel will increase
the steering fluid temperature and it should be
avoided when possible. Damage to the power
steering pump may occur.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface
and with the engine off to prevent injury from
moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level
reading. Do not overfill. Use only manufacturer's
recommended power steering fluid.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a
constant preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the
vehicle speed up to the preset speed to main-
tain a distance with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not
enabled, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control
is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be
unavailable, and vice versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument
cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the on/off button a second time. The
cruise indicator light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a
speed has been set, a message “CRUISE CONTROL
SET TO MPH (km/h)” will appear indicating the set
speed. A cruise indicator light, along with set speed
will also appear and stay on in the instrument
cluster display when the speed is set.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-)
button.
1 — On/Off Button
2 — CANCEL
3 — RES (+)
4 — SET (-)
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always leave the system off when
you are not using it.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When Cruise Control is set, you can increase the
speed by pushing the RES (+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the RES (+) button, or SET (-) button
once will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button is
released, then the new set speed will be estab-
lished.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the RES (+) button, or SET (-) button
once will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button is
released, then the new set speed will be estab-
lished.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Controls is set, press the
accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal
is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or
gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive
without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Cruise Control without
erasing the set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Cruise Control without erasing the set speed from
memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button, or placing the ignition in
the OFF position, erases the set speed from
memory.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident.
Do not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while
traveling on highways and major roadways.
However, it is not a safety system and not designed
to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control function
performs differently if your vehicle is not equipped
with ACC
Ú page 182.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the
constant need to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a
radar sensor and a forward facing camera designed
to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you to maintain
a set speed.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC
will apply limited braking or acceleration (not to
exceed the original set speed) automatically to
maintain a preset following distance, while
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Colli-
sion Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled)
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
Always be aware of the feature selected
Ú page 455.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active
driver involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
and weather conditions, vehicle speed,
distance to the vehicle ahead and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a
disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be limited
upon adverse sight distance conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a vehicle ahead and hold
the vehicle for approximately two seconds
in the stop position. At this point, there
will be an “ACC May Cancel Soon” chime
and warning to the driver. When ACC is
canceled, the system will release the
brakes and the driver must take over
braking. The system can be resumed
when the vehicle ahead drives off by
releasing the brake and pushing the
resume button on the steering wheel.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway
off-ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have
steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving
at a constant speed.
WARNING!
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the ACC on/off button until one of the
following appears in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the RES (+) or the SET(-) button is pushed,
the display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC
display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following condi-
tions:
When in 4WD Low
When brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speed
When Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Full Off
mode is active
1 — Adaptive Cruise Control On/Off Button
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off Button
3 — CANCEL
4 — Distance Button
5 — RES (+)
6 — SET (-)
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time,
the system will turn off and the instrument cluster
display will show “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push
the SET (-) button and release. The instrument
cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
ACC enabled. To change between the different
modes, push the ACC on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off.
Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) Fixed
Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is
below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond
the set speed. If this occurs, the message “ACC
DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the instrument
cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while ACC is enabled, the system will not
be controlling the distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will
only be determined by the position of the accel-
erator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANCEL button is pushed.
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.
Driver door is opened at low speeds.
A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
The trailer brake is applied manually
(if equipped).
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it to
go faster than you want. You could lose control
and have a collision. Always leave the system off
when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode (ACC not
enabled), the system will not react to vehicles
ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does
not activate and no alarm will sound even if you
are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure
to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which
mode is selected.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
is pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (+)
button and then remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display
will display the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to
a complete stop longer than two seconds, the
system will cancel. The driver will have to apply
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the RES (+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the RES (+) button, or SET (-) button
once will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the RES (+) button, or SET (-) button
once will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
When ACC Is Active
When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
The ACC system applies the brake down to a full
stop when following a vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
your vehicle will release the brakes two seconds
after coming to a full stop.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic
and road conditions could cause the vehicle to
accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe
operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while climbing
uphill or descending downhill. This is normal
operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) can be set by varying the
distance setting between four bars (longest), three
bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed,
ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
ahead. This distance setting displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
To adjust the distance setting, push the Distance
button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer). When the farthest distance is set, pushing
the Distance button again will reset to the shortest
distance.
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle
is detected in the same lane, the instrument
cluster displays the ACC Set With Target Detected
Indicator Light, and the system adjusts vehicle
speed automatically to maintain the distance
setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above
the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
force.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the Forward
Collision Warning system is applying the brakes
autonomously.
Trailer Detect — If Equipped
When a trailer is detected, the ACC system
automatically defaults to the longest setting (four
bars). The setting can be overridden by pushing the
Distance button on the steering wheel.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is
triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on the
left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a vehicle ahead, your vehicle will
resume motion, without any driver interaction, if
the vehicle ahead starts moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the
brakes will release. A cancel message will display
on the instrument cluster display and produce a
warning chime. The driver must now manually
operate the vehicle’s accelerator and brakes.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the
driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop system
will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel
message will display on the instrument cluster
display and produce a warning chime. The driver
must now manually operate the vehicle’s
accelerator and brakes.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow,
or tunnels with reflective tiles). The ACC system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning
or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located
in the camera in the center of the windshield, on
the forward side of the rearview mirror.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully clear
the windshield.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc-
tion or failure and require a sensor realignment.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or after-
market grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC
system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is
no longer present, the system will return to the
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume
function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
sensor realigned at your authorized dealer.
Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor
and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance. This most often occurs at times of
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and
fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily
blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or
ice on windshield, driving directly into the sun and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the
instrument cluster display will show “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and
the system will have degraded performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
system will recover after the vehicle has left these
areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning
may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rearview
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an
obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality
is no longer present, the system will return to full
functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and
forward facing camera inspected at your autho-
rized dealer.
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may
be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction
that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating
ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the
problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
Precautions While Driving With ACC
NOTE:
Aftermarket add-ons such as snowplows, lift
kits, and brush/grille bars can hinder module
performance. Ensure the radar/camera has no
obstructions in the field of view.
Height modifications can limit module perfor-
mance and functionality.
Do not put stickers or easy passes over the
camera/radar field of view.
Any modifications to the vehicle that may
obstruct the field of view of the radar/camera
are not recommended.
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert
and may need to intervene. The following are
examples of these types of situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only
with an Integrated Trailer Brake Controller.
Aftermarket trailer brake controllers will not
activate the trailer brakes when ACC is braking.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle
merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may
move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause
your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
curve the system will resume your original set
speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle
in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load,
traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills,
ACC performance may be limited.
ACC Hill Example
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the
vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the
vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take
action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in
situations where the vehicle you are following
exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in
your lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect
movement from it. Always be attentive and ready
to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between
the rear, and/or front fascia/bumper, and a
detected obstacle when backing up or moving
forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
For limitations of this system and
recommendations, see Ú page 196.
ParkSense will retain the system state (enabled or
disabled) from the previous ignition cycle when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector
is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at
one of these gear selector positions, the system will
remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A warning
will appear in the instrument cluster display when
the vehicle is in REVERSE, indicating the vehicle is
above ParkSense operating speed. The system
will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
NOTE:
If equipped as a dually, the ParkSense system has
six rear sensors to assist in detection around the
dually flares.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from
the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction,
depending on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
NOTE:
The dually flares are only protected when the
vehicle is in REVERSE. There is no detection for the
flares when the vehicle is moving forward.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and
the detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or
when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has
been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear
regions based on the obstacle’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear region and the system will produce a tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone
to slow, to fast, to continuous.
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the
vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 236.
The chime volume settings include low, medium,
and high. The factory default volume is medium.
ENABLING AND DISABLING FRONT
A
ND/OR REAR PARKSENSE
Front ParkSense can be enabled and
disabled with the Front ParkSense
switch.
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the Rear ParkSense switch.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
Front or Rear system is disabled, the instrument cluster
display will show a vehicle graphic with an “Off”
message overlay over the system that is off (Front or
Rear system). This vehicle graphic will be displayed for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be
on when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or
requires service. The Front or Rear ParkSense
switch LED will be off when the Front or Rear
system is enabled. If the Front or Rear ParkSense
switch is pushed, and the system requires service,
the Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE FRONT/
R
EAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the Front/Rear
ParkSense System has detected a faulted condition,
the instrument cluster display will show the "Front/Rear
ParkSense Unavailable Service Required" or the
"Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Sensors"
message.
When the gear selector is moved into REVERSE, a
vehicle graphic will show in the instrument cluster
display, along with the display overlay “Wipe Sensors.”
If the system needs service, the display overlay will read
“Service.” Under this condition, ParkSense will not
operate.
If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Wipe
Sensors" appears in the instrument cluster display
make sure the outer surface and the underside of
the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction, and then cycle
the ignition. If the message continues to appear,
see an authorized dealer.
If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service
Required" appears in the instrument cluster
display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers
are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to
keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and Front or Rear ParkSense
is turned off, the instrument cluster display will
show "Off" on the vehicle graphic arcs. This
vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers,
trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 18 inches
(45 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the
“Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service
Required” message to be appear in the instru-
ment cluster display.
On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the
lowered or open position. A lowered tailgate
could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety
and must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure
to do so can result in injury or damage to vehi-
cles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). It uses a forward-facing camera to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle
position within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane while no turn signal
has been applied OR the driver departs the lane on the
opposite side of the applied turn signal (if the left turn
signal is applied and the vehicle departs to the right),
the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the
form of torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. The
LaneSense system will also provide a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque to the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and
the driver unintentionally drifts across that lane
marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense
system provides a visual warning through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane. When only a single lane
marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will
not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provides an
audible and visual warning to the driver when the
driver’s hands are not detected on the steering
wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does not
return their hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch
Uconnect Display screen, the LaneSense button is
located above the display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense
On” message is shown in the instrument cluster
display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button again (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state (on or off) from the last ignition cycle when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument cluster
display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines
are gray when both of the lane boundaries have
not been detected and the LaneSense telltale
is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense Telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the left side.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has
been approached and is in a lane departure situa-
tion, the visual warning in the instrument cluster
display will show the left lane line flashing yellow
(on/off). The LaneSense telltale changes from
solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With Yellow
Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the
right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected
When the LaneSense system is on and both the lane
markings have been detected, the system is
"armed" to provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the steering
wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. The
lane lines turn from gray to white and the LaneSense
telltale is solid green.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left lane line turns solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Solid Yellow Lane Line) With Solid
Yellow Telltale
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has
been approached and is in a lane departure situ-
ation, the left lane line flashes yellow (on/off). The
LaneSense telltale changes from solid yellow
to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the
lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With Flashing
Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the
intensity of the torque warning and the warning zone
sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure
through the Uconnect system
Ú
page 236.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
The system will not apply torque to the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages
(Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System,
Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision
Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to
see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
Uconnect display along with a caution note to
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView Camera is located in the center of the
tailgate handle.
NOTE:
Removing the tailgate will disable the Rear View
Camera function.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View
Camera
1. Press the Vehicle button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display and then
select the Controls menu.
2. Press the Back Up Camera icon to turn the
Rear View Camera system on.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
Camera delay turned off, the rear Camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
Camera delay turned on, the rear Camera image
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting
to another gear, unless the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
PARK, the ignition is placed in the OFF position, or
the touchscreen X button to disable display of the
Rear View Camera image is pressed.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated
through the Back Up Camera button in the Controls
menu, and the vehicle speed is greater than, or
equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer for the
image is initiated. The image will continue to
be displayed until the display timer exceeds
10 seconds.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be
displayed continuously until deactivated via the
touchscreen X button, the transmission is shifted
into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
The touchscreen X button to disable display of
the camera image is made available ONLY when
the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
Cargo Camera Icons — If Equipped
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen
button is made available to indicate the current
active Camera image being displayed whenever
the Rear View Camera image is displayed.
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen
button to switch the display to Cargo Camera
image is made available whenever the Rear View
Camera image is displayed.
A touchscreen X button to disable display of the
camera image is made available when the vehicle
is not in REVERSE gear.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the Back Up camera image to illustrate the width
of the vehicle and its projected back up path
based on the steering wheel position. The active
guidelines will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
The corresponding settings can be adjusted within
Uconnect Settings
Ú
page 236.
A dashed centerline overlay indicates the center of
the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
hitch/receiver. The following table shows the
approximate distances for each zone:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is located in
the center of the tailgate handle.
Back Up Camera Touchscreen Button
Cargo Camera Touchscreen Button
AUX Camera Touchscreen Button
Zones
Distance To The Rear Of The
Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety
of your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is
being displayed, and the vehicle speed is
below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear
selector position, Zoom View is available.
By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in the
upper left of the display screen, the image will
zoom in to four times the standard view. Pressing
the icon a second time will return the view to the
standard Back Up Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
view will display the standard Back Up Camera
view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE
gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
REVERSE.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the
icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
For information on Auxiliary Cameras (if equipped),
see Ú page 210.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Surround View Camera system allows you to see
an on-screen image of the surroundings and the Top
View of your vehicle. This occurs whenever the gear
selector is in REVERSE or when enabled through the
Uconnect system. The Top View of the vehicle will
also show if any doors are open. The image will be
displayed on the Uconnect display along with a
caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”. After
five seconds, this note will disappear. The Surround
View Camera system is comprised of four cameras
located in the front grille, rear tailgate and side
mirrors.
NOTE:
Removing the tailgate will disable the Rear View
Camera function.
The Surround View Camera system has
programmable settings that may be selected
through the Uconnect system Ú page 236.
Press this button on the touchscreen to
enter the Surround View Camera menu in
the Uconnect system.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear
View and Top View is the default view of the
system.
If the camera delay is turned on, the camera image
will display for up to 10 seconds after shifting out
of REVERSE. The camera image will not display for
10 seconds if the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. The X button
on the touchscreen disables the display of the
camera image.
If the camera delay is turned off, the camera image
will close and display the previous screen after
shifting out of REVERSE.
If active guidelines are enabled, the lines are
overlaid on the image in the Rear View to illustrate
the width of the vehicle. The view will also include
the side view mirrors and its projected back up
path based on the steering wheel position.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
There are different colored zones to indicate the
distance to the rear of the vehicle. Refer to the
chart below:
Modes Of Operation
Standard Rear View can be manually activated by
selecting “Back Up Camera” through the Controls
menu within the Uconnect system.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with
Rear View and Front View in a split screen display.
There are integrated ParkSense arcs in the image
at the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will
change color from yellow to red corresponding the
distance zones to the oncoming object.
The fifth button of the ParkSense Camera View
screen will change based on vehicle options. If not
equipped with a Cargo Camera or Trailer Reverse
Guidance, the Back Up Camera soft button will be
displayed. If equipped with a Cargo Camera but no
Trailer Reverse Guidance, the Cargo Camera soft
button will be displayed. If equipped with both a
Cargo Camera and Trailer Reverse Guidance, the
Cargo/Trailer Reverse Guidance soft button will be
displayed.
ParkSense Camera View
NOTE:
Front tires will display on the image when the
tires are turned.
Due to wide angle cameras in mirrors, the image
will appear distorted.
Top View will show which doors are open.
Open front doors will cancel the outside image.
Top View Plus Rear View
This is the default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the
Top View of the vehicle with optional
active guidelines for the projected path
when enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
The Rear Cross Path will give the driver a
wider angle view of the Back Up Camera
system. The Top View will be disabled
when this is selected.
Top View Plus Front View
The Front View will show what is immediately
in front of the vehicle and is always paired
with the Top View of the vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
The Front Cross Path will give the driver a
wider angle view of the front camera
system. The Top View will be disabled
when this is selected.
Back Up Camera View
The Back Up Camera will provide a full
screen rear view with Zoom View.
NOTE:
If the Back Up Camera view was selected through
the Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of the
Rear View screen will return to the Surround View
menu. If the Back Up Camera was manually acti-
vated through the Controls menu of the Uconnect
system, exiting out of the display screen will return
to the Controls menu.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of The
Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cargo Camera
The Cargo Camera will provide a full
screen view of the cargo area.
NOTE:
If the Cargo Camera view was selected through the
Surround View screen, exiting out of the Cargo
Camera screen will return to the Surround View
screen. If the Cargo Camera was manually acti-
vated through the Controls menu of the Uconnect
display, exiting out of the display screen will return
to the Controls menu.
Trailer Reverse Guidance
NOTE:
Trailer Reverse Guidance can only be selected
through the Surround View screen; exiting out of
the Trailer Reverse Guidance screen will return to
the Surround View screen.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is being
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph
(13 km/h) while in any gear, Zoom View is available.
By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in the upper
left of the display screen, the image will zoom in to
four times the standard view. Pressing the icon a
second time will return the view to the standard
Back Up Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
view will display the standard Back Up Camera
view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE
gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
(13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the
icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
Deactivation
The system is deactivated in the following
conditions if it was activated
automatically:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds,
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h),
the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. There is a touchscreen X
button to disable the display of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the Surround View
Camera mode is exited and the last known
screen appears again.
The system is deactivated in the following
conditions if it was activated
manually from the
Uconnect controls menu via the Surround View
button, Back Up Camera button, Cargo Camera
button or Forward Facing Camera button:
The X button on the display is pressed
Vehicle is shifted into PARK
The Trailer Reverse Guidance will
provide a full screen view of the
cargo area and trailer.
Pressing the Left & Right Tow Mirror
Split Screen View button within the
Trailer Reverse Guidance screen will
display a split screen to allow the
driver to see both sides of the trailer
at the same time. This view allows
the driver to pan left/right to better
frame the trailer in the image.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
Ignition is placed in the OFF position
Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
10 seconds
NOTE:
If the Surround View Camera, Cargo Camera, Back Up
Camera, or Forward Facing Camera is activated
manually, and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE,
deactivation methods for automatic activation are
assumed.
The camera delay system is turned off manually
through the Uconnect Settings menu Ú page 236.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
If a malfunction with the system has occurred,
see an authorized dealer.
Cargo Camera With Dynamic Centerline —
If Equipped
The Dynamic Centerline feature provides an overlay
on the Cargo Camera display screen that aligns to
the center of the pickup box to aid in hooking up a
fifth-wheel camper or gooseneck trailer. The centerline
auto aligns to the center of the pickup box, and can also
be manually adjusted. The centerline will adjust in
response to steering angle inputs, and will not obstruct
the gooseneck receiver or an approaching trailer
gooseneck in the camera feed.
Activation
The Dynamic Centerline feature can be activated
through the Uconnect settings by pressing the Cargo
Camera soft button, followed by the Dynamic
Centerline soft button on the touchscreen.
If the Dynamic Centerline feature is turned on, the
overlay will display any time the Cargo Camera
image is displayed.
Adjusting Centerline
Follow the steps below to manually adjust the
centerline:
1. Press the Adjust Centerline soft button
located in the bottom right corner of the
Cargo Camera display.
2. Use the arrows on the bottom left corner of the
Cargo Camera display to adjust the centerline
horizontally or vertically.
3. Once the desired position is achieved, press
the Accept button to set the centerline to the
newly specified position.
Deactivation
The Dynamic Centerline feature will automatically
be deactivated whenever the Cargo Camera
display is deactivated. It can also be manually
deactivated through the Uconnect Settings.
Cargo Camera Zoom View
When the Cargo Camera image is being
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below
8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear
selector position, Zoom View is available.
By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in the
upper left of the display screen, the image will
zoom in to four times the standard view. Pressing
the icon a second time will return the view to the
standard Cargo Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
view will display the standard Cargo Camera view.
If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear
from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
Zoom View is available until the gear selector is
placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds are at or
above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the
icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the dynamic centerline will
not be visible.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Forward Facing Camera With Tire Lines —
If Equipped
The Forward Facing Camera displays a front view
image of the road ahead, along with tire lines to
guide the driver when driving on narrow roads.
Tire lines can be activated/deactivated through
the Uconnect Settings.
Activation
The Forward Facing Camera can be activated in
the following ways:
Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button in
the Controls screen or Apps menu
Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button
located in the upper left corner of the Back Up
camera display
Once activated, the camera image will remain on
as long as the vehicle speed is below 8 mph
(13 km/h).
Deactivation
The Forward Facing Camera is deactivated in the
following conditions:
The vehicle exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), except
when vehicle is in 4WD Low
The X button on the display is pressed.
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in 4WD Low, the Forward Facing
Camera image will be displayed until the X button
is pressed or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
Trailer Reverse Guidance — If Equipped
The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature assists the
driver in backing up a trailer by providing adjustable
camera views of the trailer and surrounding area.
The cameras are mounted on the side mirrors and
the images will be displayed side-by-side on the
touchscreen. Left and right camera images are
swapped and mirrored on the touchscreen to show
the equivalent area behind the vehicle as though the
driver is using the side mirrors.
Activation
The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature can be
activated by pressing the Trailer Reverse Guidance
button on the Back Up/Cargo Camera Display.
Deactivation
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless
the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. There is a touchscreen button X
to disable the display of the camera image.
If Trailer Reverse Guidance is selected through
manually activated Surround View, Back Up
Camera, or Cargo Camera, the below deactivation
conditions apply:
The X button on the display is pressed
The vehicle is shifted into PARK
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
The vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
10 seconds
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Surround View Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for the safety of your
surroundings and must continue to pay attention
while backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View
should only be used as a parking aid.
The Surround View Camera is unable to view
every obstacle or object in your drive path.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not equipped with a Pickup Box:
The bottom wedge of the Top View will be
displayed in black.
The Rear Cross Path soft button will be grayed out.
The guidelines will not be overlaid on Top
View/Rear View and Full Screen of Back Up
Camera view.
Black video will be displayed for the right side of
the Top and Rear View, and full screen of the
Back Up Camera view when the Rear View
Camera is not connected.
To access all camera options when the vehicle is in
REVERSE, select the More Cams button on the
surround view screen.
For information on Auxiliary Cameras (if equipped),
see Ú page 210.
TRAILER CAMERAS — IF EQUIPPED
TRAILER SURROUND VIEW CAMERA
S
YSTEM
The Trailer Surround View Camera system allows
you to see an on-screen image of the surroundings
and the Top View of a trailer using four mountable
cameras. This occurs whenever the More Cams
soft button is selected, or when enabled through
the Uconnect system. The image will be displayed
on the Uconnect display along with a caution note
“Check Entire Surroundings”. After five seconds,
this note will disappear.
NOTE:
Trailer Surround View Camera kit is only avail-
able for vehicles equipped with the Surround
View Camera system.
The Trailer Surround View Camera system has
programmable settings that may be selected
through the Uconnect system Ú page 236.
Set Up
The Trailer Surround View Camera system includes
an installation kit with a Trailer Surround View
Module and four Trailer Surround View Cameras
that must be installed on your trailer prior to
connecting to your vehicle. See the installation
instructions included with the Trailer Surround
View installation kit for more information.
NOTE:
The trailer will be connected to the vehicle via the
12-way connector, and the installation location
varies for Conventional or Gooseneck trailers.
For Conventional trailers, the connection from the
rear fascia goes to the receptacle in the bumper.
Conventional Trailer Connection
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using Surround View to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen.
It is recommended that the driver look
frequently over his/her shoulder when using
Surround View.
CAUTION!
1 — Rear Fascia Connector
2 — Receptacle
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
For Gooseneck trailers, the connection from the
rear fascia goes to the rear chassis inline.
Gooseneck Trailer Connection
NOTE:
When the 12-way connector goes to the rear
chassis, there is a black cap on the bumper
receptacle for protection.
In order to make the connection from the rear
chassis to the bumper, the cap must be unplugged
from the bumper and put on the rear chassis after
making the 12-way connection and vice versa.
Once the Trailer Surround View Module and
cameras are installed and the trailer is connected
to the vehicle via the 12-way connector, the Trailer
Surround Camera settings can be accessed.
The Trailer Surround Camera settings can be
accessed through Uconnect Settings by pressing
the Trailer soft button in the Trailer Settings or the
Camera Settings. The system requires input of the
trailer dimensions prior to use of the system.
NOTE:
If a trailer is connected but the trailer dimen-
sions have not been entered in the Trailer
Surround settings page, the system will default
to the settings page.
If a trailer is not connected and any soft button is
selected, a message will appear: “Connect Trailer
Equipped With Trailer Surround View System”.
Inputting Trailer Values
For the Trailer Surround View Camera system to
function, all fields must be entered. When a value
is needed the screen will display “Required”.
When the Trailer Type soft button is selected two
options are available: Conventional or Gooseneck/
Fifth Wheel.
Activation
The Trailer Surround Camera can be activated
through the Uconnect system when the vehicle is
in PARK, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, Surround
View Camera showing the Top View and Back Up
Camera is the default view of the system. Press the
More Cams soft button and press the Trailer tab to
access the Trailer Cameras. Press Trailer Surround
Camera soft button to access Top View and Rear View
of the trailer.
If the camera delay is turned on, the camera image
will display for up to 10 seconds after shifting out
of REVERSE. The camera image will not display for
10 seconds if the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. The X button
on the touchscreen disables the display of the
camera image.
If the camera delay is turned off, the camera image
will close and display the previous screen after
shifting out of REVERSE.
1 — Rear Chassis Inline
2 — Rear Fascia Connector
Setting Description
Trailer Length
Input the total length of
the trailer
Trailer Width
Input the total width of
the trailer
Camera Height
Input the height of the
mounted camera
Trailer Type
Choose the trailer type
from menu
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
Modes Of Operation
The Trailer Surround View Camera system offers
two different camera displays:
Top View split screen with one selected
mounted camera
Full screen view of a selected mounted camera
Press the More Cams soft button on the Surround
View screen and select the Trailer tab to access the
Trailer Cameras. Press Trailer Surround Camera
soft button to access the default Top View and
Rear View of the trailer.
Top View
The Trailer Top View will show in the Uconnect
system with Top View and Rear View in a split
screen display.
Trailer Top and Rear Camera View
NOTE:
Due to wide angle cameras, the image will appear
distorted.
Rear View
Pressing the Rear View soft button will
show the Top View and Rear View in a
split screen display.
Front View
Pressing the Front View soft button will
show you what is immediately in front of
the trailer and is paired with the Top View
of the trailer.
Left View
Pressing the Left View soft button will
give the driver a wider angle view of the
left side trailer camera and is paired with
the Top View of the trailer.
Right View
Pressing the Right View soft button will
give the driver a wider angle view of the
right side trailer camera and is paired
with the Top View of the trailer.
Full Screen Camera View
To display a full screen image of the Trailer
Surround View mounted cameras, select one of
the following options from the Trailer Cameras
screen: Trailer Left, Trailer Right, Trailer Front,
Trailer Rear. Exiting out of the full screen view will
return the system to the previous screen.
NOTE:
If the Trailer Surround Camera was selected
through the More Cameras menu, an option to
return to the More Cameras menu will display.
If the Trailer Surround Camera was manually acti-
vated through the Controls menu of the Uconnect
system, exiting out of the display screen will return
to the Controls menu.
Deactivation
The system is deactivated in the following
conditions if it was activated
automatically:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds,
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h),
the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. There is a touchscreen
button X to disable the display of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the Trailer Surround
View Camera mode is exited and the last known
screen appears again.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system is deactivated in the following
conditions if it was activated
manually from the
Uconnect controls menu via the Trailer Surround
Camera soft button:
The X button on the display is pressed
Vehicle is shifted into PARK
Ignition is placed in the OFF position
Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
10 seconds
NOTE:
If the Trailer Surround Camera is activated
manually, and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE,
deactivation methods for automatic activation are
assumed.
The camera delay system is turned off manually
through the Uconnect system Ú page 236.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
If a malfunction with the system has occurred,
see an authorized dealer.
AUX CAMERA
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two AUX
Cameras, which display rearview and side view
images from the trailer on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
Two Aux Cameras are only available on vehicles
with NAV equipped radios if the vehicle is not
equipped with a Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) and Surround View Camera system.
Activation
The AUX Camera is activated by first pressing the
Back Up Camera or Cargo Camera (if equipped)
button on the touchscreen, followed by the AUX
button located in the upper left corner of the
rearview display. On vehicles with Surround View
Camera (if equipped), the AUX Camera can be
activated when the vehicle is in REVERSE by first
pressing the More Cams button in the Surround
view screen, followed by the AUX tab. The AUX
camera can also be activated when the vehicle is
in REVERSE by pressing the AUX button.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Trailer Surround View Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety
of your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Trailer Surround View
should only be used as a parking aid. The Trailer
Surround View Camera is unable to view every
obstacle or object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using Trailer Surround
View to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the
driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using Trailer Surround View.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can switch
between each camera by pressing the AUX 1 or
AUX 2 buttons on the Trailer Camera display.
Deactivation
The AUX Camera is deactivated by pressing the X in
the upper right corner of the touchscreen. This will
return the display back to the previously displayed
screen.
NOTE:
If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX Camera
is connected, the touchscreen will display a
blue screen along with the message “Camera
System Unavailable.” The screen can be exited
out by pressing the X in the upper right hand
corner. This will return the display back to the
previously displayed screen.
Zoom View is not available with the AUX Camera
feature.
The display will always default to the Trailer
Camera display AUX 1.
ENGINE RUNAWAY — DIESEL ENGINE
Diesel engine runaway is a rare condition affecting
diesel engines, where the engine consumes its
own lubrication oil and runs at higher and higher
RPM until it overspeeds to a point where it destroys
itself due to either mechanical failure or engine
seizure through lack of lubrication.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE
ENGINE
The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the
fuel filler door, on the left side of the vehicle. Open
the fuel door and remove the fuel filler cap by
turning it counter-clockwise.
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE:
When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
AUX 1 Camera Button
AUX 2 Camera Button
WARNING!
In case of engine runaway due to flammable
fumes from fuel spills or turbocharger oil leaks
being sucked into the engine, do the following to
help avoid personal injury and/or vehicle damage:
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Using a CO2 or dry chemical type fire extin-
guisher, direct the spray from the fire extin-
guisher into the grille on the driver side so that
the spray enters the engine air intake.
The inlet for the engine air intake is located
behind the driver’s side headlamp and receives
air through the grille.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is
tightened properly. The MIL in the instrument
cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured
properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tight-
ened each time the vehicle is refueled.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that
the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or
damaged, a loose gASCAP indicator will display in the
instrument cluster telltale display area
Ú
page 104.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the
RIGHT button to turn off the message. If the problem
continues, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Open the fuel filler door.
Fill Locations
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine
is running.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place gas
containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emissions
control system could result from using an
improper fuel tank filler tube cap.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impuri-
ties into the fuel system.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the
fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
WARNING!
Always place container on the ground before
filling.
Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the
container when you are filling it.
Use only approved containers for flammable
liquid.
Do not leave container unattended while filling.
A static electric charge could cause a spark
and fire hazard.
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
NOTE:
There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
filler pipe seals the system.
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe –
the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door
while refueling.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
4. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE:
In the event that you run the vehicle out of fuel,
once refueled, place the ignition in the ON position
for 30 seconds, then turn the ignition OFF and wait
30 seconds. Repeat this procedure three times,
prior to cranking the engine.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic
Reduction (SCR) system to meet the very stringent
diesel emissions standards required by the
Environmental Protection Agency.
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels of
NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted from engines) that
are harmful to our health and the environment to a
near-zero level. A small quantity of Diesel Exhaust
Fluid (DEF) is injected into the exhaust upstream
of a catalyst where, when vaporized, it converts
smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into harmless
nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two natural
components of the air we breathe. You can operate
with the comfort that your vehicle is contributing to a
cleaner, healthier world environment for this and
generations to come.
System Overview
This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF) injection system and a Selective Catalytic
Reduction (SCR) catalyst to meet the emission
requirements.
The DEF injection system consists of the following
components:
DEF tank
DEF pump
DEF injector
Electronically-heated DEF lines
DEF control module
NOx sensors
Temperature sensors
SCR catalyst
UQS Sensor
For system messages and warnings Ú page 104.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection
system. You may occasionally hear an audible
clicking noise. This is normal operation.
The DEF pump will run for a period of time after
engine shutdown to purge the DEF system.
This is normal operation.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very
stable product with a long shelf life. If DEF is kept
in temperatures between 10°F and 90°F (-12°C
and 32°C), it will last a minimum of one year.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest temperatures.
For example, DEF may freeze at temperatures at or
below 12°F (-11°C). The system has been designed to
operate in this environment.
NOTE:
When working with DEF, it is important to know that:
Any containers or parts that come into contact
with DEF must be DEF compatible (plastic or
stainless steel). Copper, brass, aluminum, iron
or non-stainless steel should be avoided as they
are subject to corrosion by DEF.
If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up completely.
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid
The DEF gauge (located on the instrument cluster)
will display the level of DEF remaining in the tank
Ú page 104.
NOTE:
Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load,
etc.) will affect the amount of DEF that is used in
your vehicle.
Another factor is that outside temperature can affect
DEF consumption. In cold conditions, 12°F (-11°C)
and below, the DEF gauge needle can stay on a fixed
position and may not move for extended periods of
time. This is a normal function of the system.
There is an electric heater inside the DEF tank
that automatically works when necessary. If the
DEF supply does freeze, the truck will operate
normally until it thaws.
DEF FILL PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For the correct fluid type Ú page 447.
Remove cap from DEF tank (located on drivers side
of the vehicle or in fuel door).
Fill Locations
NOTE:
The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of DEF to
the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to the
DEF system, the gauge may not update to the
new level. See an authorized dealer for service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF tank
heater will possibly warm up the DEF fluid and
allow the gauge to update after a period of run
time. Under very cold conditions, it is possible
that the gauge may not reflect the new fill level
for several drives.
At 40°F (4°C) you could see some increase in
the DEF gauge due to the tank thawing. The
gauge and level sensor are working properly and
are just updating with proper thawed DEF.
Excessive overfilling of the DEF tank can result
in a MIL lamp/fault code and inaccurate level
readings.
Refilling With Nozzles
You can fill up at any DEF distributor.
Proceed as follows:
Insert the DEF nozzle in the filler tube, start
refilling and stop refilling at the first shut-off
(the shut-off indicates that the DEF tank is full).
DO NOT proceed with the refilling, to prevent
spillage of DEF.
Extract the nozzle.
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
(Continued)
Refilling With Containers
Proceed as follows:
Check the expiration date.
Read the advice for use on the label before pouring
the content of the bottle into the DEF tank.
After the indication appears on the instrument
cluster display Ú page 104 fill the DEF tank
with no more than 4 gallons (15 liters).
Stop filling the DEF tank immediately if DEF
splashes or wells back in the filler neck.
Reinstall cap onto DEF filler tube.
Filling The Def Tank In Cold Climates
Since DEF will begin to freeze at 12°F (-11°C), your
vehicle is equipped with an automatic DEF heating
system. This allows the DEF injection system to
operate properly at temperatures below 12°F
(-11°C). If your vehicle is not in operation for an
extended period of time with temperatures below
12°F (-11°C), the DEF in the tank may freeze. If the
tank is overfilled and freezes, it could be damaged.
Therefore, do not overfill the DEF tank.
Extra care should be taken when filling with
portable containers to avoid overfilling. Note the
level of the DEF gauge in your instrument cluster.
You may safely add a maximum of 2 gallons
(7.5 liters) of DEF from portable containers when
your DEF gauge is reading ½ full.
VEHICLE LOADING
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options
and cargo. The label also specifies maximum
capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR).
Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and
rear GAWR are not exceeded.
PAYLOAD
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight
of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed
in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is
not exceeded.
CAUTION!
To avoid DEF spillage, and possible damage to
the DEF tank from overfilling, do not “top off”
the DEF tank after filling.
DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below 12ºF
(-11ºC). The DEF system is designed to work in
temperatures below the DEF freezing point,
however, if the tank is overfilled and freezes,
the system could be damaged.
When DEF is spilled, clean the area immedi-
ately with water and use an absorbent mate-
rial to soak up the spills on the ground.
Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is
accidentally added to the diesel fuel tank as it
can result in severe damage to your engine,
including but not limited to failure of the fuel
pump and injectors.
Never add anything other than DEF to the tank –
especially any form of hydrocarbon such as diesel
fuel, fuel system additives, gasoline, or any other
petroleum-based product. Even a very small
amount of these, less than 100 parts per million or
less than 1 oz. per 78 gallons (295 liters) will
contaminate the entire DEF system and will
require replacement. If owners use a container,
funnel or nozzle when refilling the tank, it should
either be new or one that has only been used for
adding DEF. Mopar® provides an attachable
nozzle with its DEF for this purpose.
CAUTION!
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components
in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity
(axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or
suspension components sometimes specified by
purchasers for increased durability does not
necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
TIRE SIZE
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
RIM SIZE
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
INFLATION PRESSURE
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
CURB WEIGHT
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle
fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants
or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo
are added.
LOADING
The actual total weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and
ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not
been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle should then be determined separately
to be sure that the load is properly distributed over
the front and rear axles. Weighing the vehicle may
show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axle
has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the
weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items
securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing-related definitions will
assist you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 215.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of
all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 215.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion to
dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions
while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies individual
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow
small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight
to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering
more consistent steering and brake control, thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/
hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by
traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
and a weight-distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
requirements.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg) or
more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you
use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
ADJUSTMENT
Towing With 2500/3500 Air Suspension
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to
the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
NOTE:
Normal Ride Height (NRH) or Alternate Trailer
Height (ATH) can be used. The vehicle must remain
in the engine running position while attaching a
trailer for proper leveling of the air suspension
system. It may not be possible to enter Alternate
Trailer Height (ATH) while lightly loaded.
2. Measure the height from the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to the ground,
this is height H1.
Measuring Height (H)
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing
hitch system may reduce handling, stability
and braking performance and could result in a
collision.
Weight-distributing systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
additional information.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height from the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to the ground,
this is height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
distributing bars per the manufacturers’
recommendations so that the height of the
front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1
(about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1
above normal ride height [H1]).
6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and
weight distributing hitch to confirm manufacturer’s
recommendations have been met.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with TOW/HAUL mode engaged.
Towing With All Other 2500/3500
(Non-Air Suspension)
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to
the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
2. Measure the height of the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is
height H1.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is
height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
distributing bars per the manufacturer’s
recommendations so that the height of the
front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1
(about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1
above normal ride height [H1]).
6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and
weight-distributing hitch to confirm manufacturer’s
recommendations have been met.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with TOW/HAUL mode engaged.
Fifth-Wheel Hitch
The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with
a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow
vehicle in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and
fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin.
Your truck may be equipped with a fifth-wheel hitch
option. Refer to the separately provided fifth-wheel
hitch safety, care, assembly, and operating
instructions.
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling
arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of
a pickup truck. The coupling arm connects to the
hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed.
Measurement
Example
Example 2500/3500
Height (mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
Measurement
Example
Example 2500/3500
Height (mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH TYPE AND MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM
T
RAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
ramtruck.ca (Canada)
rambodybuilder.com
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max. Tongue Weight
Class V - 2500 Models 20,000 lb (9,071 kg) / 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class V - 3500 Models 23,000 lb (10,432 kg) / 2,300 lb (1,043 kg)
Fifth-Wheel - 2500 Models 25,000 lb (11,339 kg) / 3,750 lb (1,700 kg)
Fifth-Wheel - 3500 Models 30,000 lb (13,607 kg) / 4,500 lb (2,041 kg)
Gooseneck - 2500 Models 20,000 lb (9,071 kg) / 3,000 lb (1,360 kg)
Gooseneck - 3500 Models 35,250 lb (15,989 kg) / 5,287 lb (2,398 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
(Continued)
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. For the maximum combined weight of
occupants and cargo for your vehicle Ú page 421.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled
Servicing” Ú page 367. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle Ú page 417.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer Ú page 417.
For the proper tire replacement procedures
Ú page 417. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's
GVWR and GAWR limits.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
can cause a loss of control, poor performance
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure
or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission
in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block
or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized.
WARNING!
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is
not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) —
If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an ITBM for Electric and
Electric Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes.
NOTE:
This module has been designed and verified with
electric trailer brakes and new electric over
hydraulic systems. Some previous EOH systems
may not be compatible with ITBM.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
The user interface consists of the following:
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to
activate power to the trailer's electric brakes
independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the
manual brake control lever is activated while the
brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs
determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle’s stop lamps will come
on when braking normally with the vehicle brake
pedal. Only the trailer stop lamps will come on
when the manual brake control lever is applied.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
brake system and cause it to fail. You might
not have brakes when you need them and
could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection
status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the
ignition is turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment
button or sliding the manual brake control lever
will display the GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light will not
be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the
ITBM, the Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning
Light will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control
power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments.
The GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10
or decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake
control for the specific towing condition and should
be changed as towing conditions change. Changes
to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle
load, road conditions and weather.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE:
This should only be performed in a traffic free envi-
ronment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally and
properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if
necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical
connections according to the trailer
manufacturer's instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is
plugged in, the trailer connected message
should appear in the instrument cluster
display (if the connection is not recognized
by the ITBM, braking functions will not be
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and
the correct type of trailer must be selected
from the instrument cluster display options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering
wheel until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the
screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to
enter “TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer
Brake Type appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or
DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake
Type appears on the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on
a dry, level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual brake
control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by
squealing tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the
trailer wheels turn freely, increase the GAIN
setting.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point
just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier
trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even
with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
* The suggested selection depends and may
change depending on the customer preferences
for braking performance. Condition of the trailer
brakes, driving and road state may also affect the
selection.
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the
instrument cluster display. Display messages,
along with a single chime, will be displayed when a
malfunction is determined in the trailer connection,
trailer brake control, or on the trailer
Ú
page 104.
NOTE:
An aftermarket controller may be available for
use with trailers with air or EOH trailer brake
systems. To determine the type of brakes on
your trailer and the availability of controllers,
check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer.
Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it
may cause damage to the electrical system and
electronic modules of the vehicle. See an autho-
rized dealer if an aftermarket module is to be
installed.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes
Electric Over Hydraulic Trailer Brakes Electric Over Hydraulic Trailer Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) *Above 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) *Under 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) *Above 10,000 lb (4,536 kg)
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with
the ITBM system may result in reduced or
complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a
increase in stopping distance or trailer instability
which could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with
the ITBM system may result in reduced or
complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a
increase in stopping distance or trailer instability
which could result in damage to your vehicle,
trailer, or other property.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
NOTE:
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from
the vehicle (or any other device plugged into
vehicle’s electrical connectors) before
launching a boat into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
Trailer Light Check
This feature will run the trailer lights through a
sequence to check the trailer light function. It is
available in the instrument cluster under the
Trailer Tow menu Ú page 108.
When activated the feature will enable all of the
exterior lights sequentially for up to five minutes
for time to walk around and verify functionality. The
following exterior lights will remain on for the
entirety of the sequence:
Park/Running Lamps
Side Marker Lamps (if equipped)
License Lamp
Signature Lamp (if equipped)
Low Beams
Fog Lamps (if equipped)
Daytime Running Lamps
During this time the following lights will sequence,
each activating for three seconds:
1. Brake and CHMSL (third brake light)
2. Left turn signal
3. Right turn signal
4. Reverse Lamps
5. High Beam
This light check sequence will continue for a total
of five minutes.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
The sequence will only activate if the following
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow
Package
Vehicle is in PARK
Vehicle is not in motion
Ignition in ACC or RUN
Remote start is inactive
Brakes are not applied
Left turn signal is not applied
Right turn signal not applied
Hazard switch is not applied
The sequence will cancel if any of the following
conditions occur:
Brakes are applied
Vehicle is shifted from PARK
Vehicle is no longer stationary
Left turn signal activated from stalk
Right turn signal is activated from stalk
Hazard switch is activated
Any button on the key fob is pushed
Ignition button is pushed
High Beam stalk position is changed
Sequence is canceled in the instrument cluster
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select
TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower gear range
(using the Electronic Range Select [ERS] shift
control).
NOTE:
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower gear
range (using the ERS shift control) while operating
the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will
improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
This action will also provide better engine braking.
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce potential for automatic transmission
overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when
driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear range
(using the Electronic Range Select [ERS] shift
control) on more severe grades.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising
speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
Air Suspension System
To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from the
vehicle, the air suspension system can be used
Ú page 160.
NOTE:
The vehicle must remain in the engine running
position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling
of the air suspension system.
SNOWPLOW
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory
installed option. These packages include
components necessary to equip your vehicle with a
snowplow.
NOTE:
Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recom-
mended that the owner/installer obtain and follow
the recommendations contained within the current
Body Builder’s Guide. See an authorized dealer,
installer or snowplow manufacturer for this infor-
mation. There are unique electrical systems that
must be connected to properly ensure operator
safety and prevent overloading vehicle systems.
BEFORE PLOWING
Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper
fluid level.
Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper
tightness.
Check the runners and cutting edge for exces-
sive wear. The cutting edge should be ¼ to
½ inches (6 cm to 1.2 cm) above ground in
snow plowing position.
Check that snowplow lighting is connected and
functioning properly.
SNOWPLOW PREP PACKAGE MODEL
A
VAILABILITY
For Information about snowplow applications visit
www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Body
Builder’s Guide.
1. The maximum number of occupants in the
truck should not exceed two.
2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear
GAWR should never be exceeded.
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition
of options or passengers, etc.
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow
system, all aftermarket accessories, driver,
passengers, options, and cargo, must not exceed
either the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). These weights are
specified on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label on the driver's side door opening.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could
adversely affect performance of the airbag
system in a collision. Do not expect that the
airbag will perform as described earlier in this
manual.
CAUTION!
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if
exterior lamps are not properly installed.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Detach the snowplow when transporting
passengers.
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to
specifications at the factory without consideration
for the weight of the plow. Front end toe-in should
be checked and reset if necessary at the beginning
and end of the snowplow season. This will help
prevent uneven tire wear.
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle
is parked.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow
equipment following the recommendations
provided by the specific snowplow manufacturer.
OVER THE ROAD OPERATION WITH
S
NOWPLOW ATTACHED
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and
causes the engine to operate at higher than normal
temperatures. Therefore, when transporting the
plow, angle the blade completely and position it as
low as road or surface conditions permit. Do not
exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The operator should
always maintain a safe stopping distance and allow
adequate passing clearance.
OPERATING TIPS
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph
(32 km/h) should be maximum operating speed.
The operator should be familiar with the area and
surface to be cleaned. Reduce speed and use
extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar areas or
under poor visibility.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Snowplows should be maintained in accordance
with the plow manufacturer's instructions.
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and
battery terminals clean and free of corrosion.
When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and
drivetrain damage, the following precautions
should be observed.
Operate with transfer case in 4WD LOW when
plowing small or congested areas where speeds
are not likely to exceed 15 mph (24 km/h).
At higher speeds operate in 4WD HIGH.
Vehicles with automatic transmissions should
use 4WD LOW when plowing deep or heavy
snow for extended periods of time to avoid
transmission overheating.
Do not shift the transmission unless the engine
has returned to idle and wheels have stopped.
Make a practice of stepping on the brake pedal
while shifting the transmission.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be placed in Transport mode before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck Ú page 160.
If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow
these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Automatic transmission in PARK
Transfer case in N (Neutral)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING — TWO-WHEEL
D
RIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed
ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the
ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure
the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place
automatic transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
5. Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key fob.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed
for towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
F
OUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
NOTE:
Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer
cases must be shifted into N (Neutral) for recre-
ational towing. Automatic transmissions must be
shifted into PARK for recreational towing. Refer to
the following for the proper transfer case N (Neutral)
shifting procedure for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do not disconnect the driveshaft because
fluid may leak from the transmission, causing
damage to internal parts.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all
four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the
ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage
to the transfer case.
Before recreational towing, the transfer case
must be in N (Neutral). To be certain the
transfer case is fully in N (Neutral), perform
the procedure outlined under “Shifting Into
N (Neutral)”. Internal transmission damage
will result, if the transfer case is not in
N (Neutral) during towing.
The transmission must be placed in PARK for
recreational towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case, causing
damage to internal parts.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow
bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will
be damaged.
CAUTION!
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
Shifting Into N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level
ground, with the engine running. Firmly apply
the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure
the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Shift the transfer case into N (Neutral):
With manual shift transfer case, shift the
transfer case lever into N (Neutral).
With electronic shift transfer case, push and
hold the transfer case N (Neutral) button.
Some models have a small, recessed “N”
button (at the center of the transfer case
switches) that must be pushed using a ball-
point pen or similar object. Other models
have a rectangular N (Neutral) switch,
below the rotary transfer case control knob.
The N (Neutral) indicator light will blink
while the shift is in progress. The light will
stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift
to N (Neutral) is complete. After the shift is
completed and the N (Neutral) light stays
on, release the N (Neutral) button.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and
ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 with automatic
transmission in DRIVE.
9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly
apply the parking brake. Turn off the engine.
For vehicles with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, push
and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until
the engine shuts off.
10. Shift the transmission into PARK. On 8-speed
transmissions the shifter will automatically
select PARK when the engine is turned off.
11. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode, then cycle
the ignition to the RUN mode and back to the
OFF mode. Remove the key fob from the
ignition.
12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
13. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
With electronic shift transfer case:
Steps 2 through 3 are requirements that must
be met before pushing the N (Neutral) button,
and must continue to be met until the shift has
been completed. If any of these requirements
are not met before pushing the N (Neutral)
button or are no longer met during the shift, the
N (Neutral) indicator light will flash continuously
until all requirements are met or until the
N (Neutral) button is released.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in
the N (Neutral) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral)
position disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain, and will allow the
vehicle to roll, even if the automatic transmission
is in PARK. The parking brake should always be
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain
that the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension, the
engine should be started and left running for a
minimum of 60 seconds (with all the doors closed)
at least once every 24 hours. This process allows the
air suspension to adjust the vehicle’s ride height to
compensate for temperature effects.
Shifting Out Of N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving
it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
With manual shift transfer case, shift the
transfer case lever to the desired position.
With electronic shift transfer case with
rotary selector switch, push and hold the
transfer case N (Neutral) button until the
N (Neutral) indicator light turns off. After the
N (Neutral) indicator light turns off, release
the N (Neutral) button. After the N (Neutral)
button has been released, the transfer case
will shift to the position indicated by the
selector switch.
With electronic shift transfer case with
push-button selector switch, push and hold
the switch for the desired transfer case
position, until the N (Neutral) indicator light
turns off and the desired position indicator
light turns on.
NOTE:
When shifting out of transfer case N (Neutral),
turning the engine off is not required, but may
be helpful to avoid gear clash. With the 8-speed
automatic transmission, the engine must remain
running, since turning the engine off will shift the
transmission to PARK (and the transmission must
be in NEUTRAL for the transfer case to shift out of
NEUTRAL).
5. Turn the engine off. Shift automatic
transmission into PARK. On 8-speed
transmissions the shifter will automatically
select PARK when the engine is turned off.
6. Release the brake pedal.
7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
8. Start the engine.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
10. Release the parking brake.
11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the
brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
NOTE:
With electronic shift transfer case:
Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be
met before pushing the button to shift out of
N (Neutral), and must continue to be met until
the shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the
button or are no longer met during the shift, the
N (Neutral) indicator light will flash continuously
until all requirements are met or until the button
is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
(Continued)
(Continued)
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to
pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon
occurs when there is a difference in the surface
traction under the rear (driving) wheels.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following
Cautions and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden
pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose control
of the vehicle and possibly have a collision.
Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there
is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud,
loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm
run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road
or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink
into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or
rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing
water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases
stopping distances. Therefore, after driving
through standing water, drive slowly and
lightly press on the brake pedal several times
to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom
of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize
wave effects.
WARNING!
4
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Care should be taken when attempting to climb
steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or
slope. If natural obstacles force you to travel
diagonally up or down a hill, choose a mild angle
and keep as little side tilt as possible. Keep the
vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
cautiously.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down
using REVERSE gear. Never back down in
NEUTRAL or diagonally across the hill.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain,
shift to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the
accelerator slowly to avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of
driving.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going
off-road, it is always a good idea to check for
damage. That way you can get any problems taken
care of right away and have your vehicle ready
when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, partic-
ularly on the chassis, drivetrain components,
steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if
required, and torque to the values specified in
the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They might
hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle
pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes
inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving
in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the
wheels for impacted material. Impacted mate-
rial can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing
the wheels of it will correct the situation.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
or foamy in appearance) after driving through
standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated,
as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause
serious internal damage to the engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking.
You might not have full braking power when you
need it to prevent a collision. If you have been
operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get
your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
235
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5/5 NAV
With 8.4-inch Display system or your Uconnect 5 NAV
With 12-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
computer or other devices, your vehicle may
require software updates to improve the usability
and performance of your systems or to reduce the
potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
WARNING!
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the Customer Programmable Features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/
ENTER control knob located on the right side. Turn the
control knob to scroll through menus and change
settings. Push the center of the control knob one or
more times to select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF
and MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
For the Uconnect 5 systems, push and hold the
Power button on the radio’s faceplate for a
minimum of 15 seconds to reset the radio.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display Touchscreen And
Faceplate Buttons
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, the
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display, and
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display
For Uconnect 3, push the SETTINGS button on the
side of the faceplate. In this menu, the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available
programmable features.
For Uconnect 5, press the Vehicle button on the
touchscreen, then press the Settings tab on the
top of the touchscreen. In this menu, the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available
programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
the desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting option until a check mark appears next to
the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Once the setting is complete, press the
Vehicle button to exit to the screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through
the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
MULTIMEDIA 237
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display.
The available languages are English (United States), Español (Mexico), Italiano (Italy), and Français
(Canada).
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it automatically.
The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will
allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting,
Display Mode must be set to “Manual”, the headlights must be on, and the dimmer wheel must be in
the lowest position. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting,
Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease
the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units
This setting will allow you to change the units to “US”, “Metric”, or “Custom”. The available options
within Custom are “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Current Consumption” (MPG [US],
MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power”
(HP [US], Gal HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque” (lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
Keyboard
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable keyboards are “ABCDEF
Keyboard”, “QWERTY Keyboard”, and “AZERTY Keyboard”.
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 MULTIMEDIA
My Profile
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”.
Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes the theme with the headlights.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five seconds or stay
open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Fuel Saver Display This setting will enable fuel saver mode in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display. The available
languages are English (United States), Español (Mexico), Italiano (Italy), and Français (Canada).
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display brightness for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows for
more customization with the radio display brightness.
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting,
Display Mode must be set to “Manual”, the headlights must be on, and the dimmer wheel must be in
the lowest position. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
MULTIMEDIA 239
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting,
Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will
decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units
This setting will allow you to change the units to “US”, “Metric”, or “Custom”. The available options
within Custom are “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Current Consumption” (MPG [US],
MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power”
(HP [US], Gal HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque” (lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”.
Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes the theme with the headlights.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be “Off” for this
setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting
will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or “Female”.
“Wake Up” Word
This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available options are “Off”, “Hey,
Uconnect”, and “Hey, Ram”.
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown. The options are “On” and “Off”.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is
opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec” and “45 sec”.
Setting Name Description
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 MULTIMEDIA
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated
Steering Wheel
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated steering wheel when
the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort
systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Radio Power Off
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened,
the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Radio Off With Door This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of the doors are opened.
App Drawer Favoriting Popups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Popups This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
New Text Message Popups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. Setting options are “On”
and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Popups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Settings
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
Audio Settings This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings Ú page 251.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory default.
Trip B This setting will turn the Trip B feature in the cluster on or off.
Audio Info On Cluster This setting will turn the audio info on the cluster on or off.
Digital Speed On All Cluster Screens This setting will show the digital speedometer on all cluster screens.
Consumption Bar On Cluster Screen This setting will show the digital fuel consumption bar on all cluster screens.
Custom Areas On Cluster This setting will allow you to customize the information displayed on the cluster.
Setting Name Description
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
MULTIMEDIA 241
Safety/Driving Assistance
Audio Repetition This setting will turn the system audio repetition on or off.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Setting Name Description
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These
options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a
subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In
Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium”
setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected.
The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will
have the FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic
Emergency Braking Submenu
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will deactivate
the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is
detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake
pressure when a collision is detected.
LaneSense Warning — Located In LaneSense
Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane departure feedback.
The available settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength — Located In LaneSense
Submenu
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a lane departure. The
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected and can provide
both an audible chime and a visual display.
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 MULTIMEDIA
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”,
“Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”,
“Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a vehicle’s blind spot.
The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert
lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside
mirrors and an audible chime.
Trailer Length For Blind Spot Alert
This setting will auto detect the length of an attached trailer. The “Auto” setting will have the system
automatically set the trailer length. The “Max” setting will always set the length to the maximum 39.5 ft (12 m).
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
Power Side Steps
This setting will raise and lower or stow the Power Side Steps. The available options are “Automatic” to
raise and lower the Power Side Steps and “Stow” to deactivate the Power Side Steps.
Setting Name Description
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
MULTIMEDIA 243
Clock & Date
When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control the time via the
GPS location.
Set Time
This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting
to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours or minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the
hours or minutes.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting
will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Date
This setting will allow you to set the day, month and year. Using “+” or “-”, you can scroll through the
available days, months, and years.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Show Time and Date During Screen Off
This setting will allow you to show the time and date while the screen is off. Available options are “On”
and “Off”.
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
Voice
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All settings menu. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones
This setting will enable or disable two active phones within the vehicle. The setting options are “On”
and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word
This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available options are “Off”,
“Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Ram”.
Voice Barge-In
This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement is completed by the
system. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
MULTIMEDIA 245
Navigation — If Equipped
Trailer Brake/Trailer — If Equipped
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will always show the
Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and provide a brief description of
what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
Setting Name Description
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can
change which icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
When the Trailer Brake/Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Trailer 1
Options for each trailer are “Use This Trailer”, “Braking” (Light Electric, Heavy Electric, Light Electric
Over Hydraulic, and Heavy Electric Over Hydraulic), “Trailer Name”, and “Tire Pressure” (Setup All Tires,
Replace Single Tire, Set Target Tire Pressure, and Delete Tire Settings).
Trailer 2
Options for each trailer are “Use This Trailer”, “Braking” (Light Electric, Heavy Electric, Light Electric
Over Hydraulic, and Heavy Electric Over Hydraulic), “Trailer Name”, and “Tire Pressure” (Setup All Tires,
Replace Single Tire, Set Target Tire Pressure, and Delete Tire Settings).
Trailer 3
Options for each trailer are “Use This Trailer”, “Braking” (Light Electric, Heavy Electric, Light Electric
Over Hydraulic, and Heavy Electric Over Hydraulic), “Trailer Name”, and “Tire Pressure” (Setup All Tires,
Replace Single Tire, Set Target Tire Pressure, and Delete Tire Settings).
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
Trailer 4
Options for each trailer are “Use This Trailer”, “Braking” (Light Electric, Heavy Electric, Light Electric
Over Hydraulic, and Heavy Electric Over Hydraulic), “Trailer Name”, and “Tire Pressure” (Setup All Tires,
Replace Single Tire, Set Target Tire Pressure, and Delete Tire Settings).
Trailer Surround Camera This setting will let you access options related to the Trailer Surround Camera.
Trailer Select
Select from “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3”, and “Trailer 4”. These trailer designations can be used to
save different trailer settings.
Trailer Brake Type
This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available options are “Light Electric”,
“Heavy Electric”, “Light Electric Over Hydraulic”, and “Heavy Electric Over Hydraulic”.
Trailer Name
This setting will personalize the trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are hauling. Select the
trailer name from the following list: trailer, boat, car, cargo, dump, equipment, flatbed, gooseneck,
horse, livestock, motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utility, and 5th wheel.
Setting Name Description
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Surround View Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
MULTIMEDIA 247
Mirrors & Wipers
Lights
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position and the
transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous
position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of
the vehicle purchased.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the
vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the
vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key
fob on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Steering Directed Lights This setting will turn the headlights with the steering wheel. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
MULTIMEDIA 249
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(19 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key
fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off” setting will
not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when
the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key
Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed to unlock all
the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock
button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked to the key fob.
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options
When the Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort
systems when remote start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated
Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated steering wheel
when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort
systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Easy Exit Seats
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut off. The available
settings are “On” and “Off”.
When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings
will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay/Engine Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened,
the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the vehicle has
been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
MULTIMEDIA 251
Suspension/Air Suspension
Audio
When the Suspension/Air Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Display Suspension Messages
This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster Display. The “All” setting will
display all available messages. The “Warnings Only” setting will only display warning messages.
Tire Jack Mode This setting will disable the Air Suspension system to assist in changing a spare tire.
Transport Mode This setting will disable the Air Suspension system for flat towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode
This setting must be activated before performing a wheel alignment. Contact an authorized dealer for
further information.
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade — Located In the Audio Settings
Submenu
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right of the
vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume — Located In the Audio
Settings Submenu
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume will increase
more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 MULTIMEDIA
Notifications
Surround Sound — Located In the Audio Settings
Submenu
This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset — Located In the Audio Settings
Submenu
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The available
settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Auto-On Radio — Located In the Audio Settings
Submenu
This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is started. The available settings are
“Off”, “On”, and “Recall Last”. With Recall Last, the system resumes the previous task before vehicle
shut off.
Volume Adjustment — Located In the Audio Settings
Submenu
This setting will allow you to set the audio volume levels for each option (Media, Phone, Navigation,
etc.). You can set the volume between 0 and 38.
Loudness — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
Setting Name Description
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Notification Sounds
This setting will turn off the Notification chime that plays when a new notification is sent. The options
are “On” and “Off”.
App Drawer Favoriting Popups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Popups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
MULTIMEDIA 253
SiriusXM® Setup
New Text Message Popups This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone on or off.
Navigation Popups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or off.
Setting Name Description
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used
to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one
of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display of the skipped
channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate
subscription.
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® settings menu within the SiriusXM® menu.
Block Explicit This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 MULTIMEDIA
Software Updates — If Equipped
System Information
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options for the setting are
“On” and “Off”.
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Version Information
When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear, displaying information about
the version of your radio.
License Information
When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear, displaying the licensing
information of your radio.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
MULTIMEDIA 255
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings.
These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order
This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available options are “Yes” and
“Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory default.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from the system,
including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection
This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone projection. The available
options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Reset Performance Values This setting will reset the performance values from your vehicle.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — RADIO Button 6 — COMPASS Button
2 — MEDIA Button 7 — SETTINGS Button
3 — PHONE Button 8 — MORE Button
4 — VOLUME & On/Off Button 9 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL Knob
5 — MUTE Button 10 — SCREEN OFF Button
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
MULTIMEDIA 257
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press/Push the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode and access the radio
functions and external audio sources Ú page 259.
Phone
Press/Push the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free phone system
Ú page 269.
Settings Press/Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 236.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted selection on the screen.
Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system off. Push it again to turn
the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off button on the faceplate to
turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the VOLUME & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to reset the radio manually.
Doing this can also recover the radio screen from freezing or being stuck.
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using the
system. It contains instructions on how to use the
system in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety precautions.
Failure to do so may result in injury or property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required, park
in a safe location and set the parking brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to
the product. See an authorized dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a
level that still allows you to hear outside traffic
and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use the
system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on the
system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture
away from the system. Besides damage to the
system, moisture can cause electric shocks as
with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed
dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or
sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.),
which could scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on
the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens
cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu-
tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent
manufacturer's precautions and directions
Ú page 455.
Feature Description
Compass Push the COMPASS button on the faceplate to access the vehicle’s compass.
More Push the MORE button on the faceplate to access additional options.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all
risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
MULTIMEDIA 259
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on
the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three
and nine o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the
rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on which
mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for the
next available station and pushing the bottom of
the switch will Seek Down for the next available
station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that you
have programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next track on
the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing
the switch up twice will go forward two tracks. Pushing
the bottom switch goes to the beginning of the current
track, or the beginning of the previous track if it is within
eight seconds after the current track begins to play.
Double pressing the bottom button switch will skip to
the previous track if it is after eight seconds into the
current track.
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — All Preset Radio Stations
3 — Seek Down
4 — Radio Band (AM/FM)
5 — Tune
6 — Station Info
7 — Audio Settings
8 — Seek Up
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 MULTIMEDIA
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter
the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM,
FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the
corresponding button in Radio Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on
and off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping.
Turning the VOLUME & On/Off control knob
clockwise increases the volume, and
counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will
be set at the same volume level as last played.
Mute Button
Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the
system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by
pressing the double arrow buttons on the touchscreen
to the right and left of the radio station display or by
pushing the left steering wheel audio control button up
or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down
button to tune the radio to the next available station or
channel. During a Seek Up/Down function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing through the
entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up
or Seek Down button to advance the radio
through the available stations or channels at a
faster rate. The radio stops at the next available
station or channel when the button on the
touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
Info — If Equipped
Press the Info button to display information related
to the currently playing song and radio station.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the
radio screen to directly tune to a desired radio
station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station.
Once a number has been entered, any numbers
that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be
reached) will become deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been entered,
press “GO”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and
the system will automatically tune to that station.
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like
to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio trial required.)
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
MULTIMEDIA 261
Push the VR button on the steering wheel and wait
for the beep to say a command. See an example:
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “
Help”. The system
provides you with a list of commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode —
If Equipped
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
NOTE:
Some SiriusXM® features are not supported by all
SiriusXM® channels or content, for example song
and artist favorites, sport game notifications, tune
start, and others.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit
www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or review
your SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new vehicle
purchase. If you decide to continue your service at
the end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose
will automatically renew and bill at then-current rates
until you call SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel.
See SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete
terms at
www.siriusxm.com
(US) or
www.siriusxm.ca
(Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change.
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to those at
least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous US and D.C. Our
SiriusXM® satellite service is also available in Canada
and Puerto Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM®
Internet radio service is available throughout their
satellite service area and in AK. © 2022 SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio
does not receive a signal in underground parking
garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the radio
does not have the necessary subscription, the radio is
able to receive the Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio subscription, US residents visit
www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or
call: 1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents visit
https://
www.siriusxm.ca/
or call: 1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 MULTIMEDIA
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top
of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in
the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed
below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions
common to all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/
Weather button, and Favorite button functions are
available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
REPLAY
Replay provides a means to store and replay up to
22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk
radio. Once the channel is switched, content in
replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen.
The Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons
will display at the top of the screen, along with the
replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the
touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
1 — Browse
2 — Radio Bands
3 — Direct Tune
4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing of live or rewound content at any time.
Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button again on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the
Rewind button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds rewinds the content. The radio begins playing
the content at the point at which the press is released.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
MULTIMEDIA 263
FAVORITES
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to
activate the favorites menu, which will time out
within 20 seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the
X button.
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite
artist or song that is currently playing. The radio
then uses this information to alert you when either
the favorite artist or song is being played at any
time by any of the SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite artist, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist button on
the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite song, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Song button on
the touchscreen.
BROWSE IN SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse screen. After
pressing the All button, the following categories
become available:
All: Press the All button to display all the Siri-
usXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll the list
by pressing the Up and Down arrows, located on
the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also be
done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touch-
screen to display a list of Genres. You can select
any desired Genre by pressing the Genre List.
The radio tunes to a channel with the content in
the selected Genre.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five seconds.
Forwarding of the content can only be done when the content is previously rewound, and therefore, cannot
be done for live content. A continuous press of the Forward button on the touchscreen also forwards the
content. The radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is released.
Live Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the playing of live content.
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 MULTIMEDIA
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the
Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings,
along with providing a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the
TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete Faves button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press the
Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu allows
you to choose from a visual alert or audible and
visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on
any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of
the Browse screen. This feature provides you with
the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and
set alerts.
On-Air — If Equipped
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen.
The On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio
to that channel.
Add/Delete — If Equipped
Press the Add/Delete button on the touchscreen to
activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen
league and a scroll list of all teams within the
league will appear, then you can select a team by
pressing the corresponding box. A check mark
appears for all teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen
to delete all of the selections or press the Trash Can
icon next to the selection to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen.
The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from
“Alert me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert
upon score update” or both when one or more of
your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music channel
using one of the 12 presets. This feature occurs
the first time the preset is selected during that
current song.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
MULTIMEDIA 265
Setting Presets
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pressing any of the Preset
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save as
a preset, press and hold the numbered button on
the touchscreen for more than two seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio Modes.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
A set of four presets will appear on the screen.
Press the All button to view all saved presets.
To remove a saved preset, a new preset must be
saved over the old one.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between the front speakers or
fade the audio between the rear and front speakers. Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right button or press
and drag the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or - button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease each of the equalizer bands.
The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”. This alters the
automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases
automatically as speed increases to compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction as in a movie theatre or
home theatre system.
Loudness When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate.
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source
Select button on the touchscreen and the desired
mode button on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and
Bluetooth® are the Media sources available.
When available, you can select the Browse button
on the touchscreen to be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media
Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button
located on the faceplate.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and - buttons. This alters the AUX input audio volume.
The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
Radio Off With Door
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or passenger door
is opened or until the “Radio Off Delay” selected time has expired.
Auto Play
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is connected to one of the
vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press “Off” to turn the setting off.
Audio Setting Description
1 — Seek Down
2 — Browse
3 — Source
4 — Pause/Play
5 — Info
6 — More Options
7 — Seek Up
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
MULTIMEDIA 267
Types of Media Modes
USB MODE
Overview
USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into
the USB port, by pushing the MEDIA button on the
faceplate and then selecting the USB button.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you insert
a USB device with the ignition in ON/RUN, the unit
will switch to USB Mode and begin to play. The
display will show the track number and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start
of track 1.
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode
is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device,
containing music, to the Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate
with the Uconnect system.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the
MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once in
Media Mode, press the Source button on the
touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button
Ú page 269.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth®
button on the left side of the touchscreen or under the
Source Select/Select Source button (if equipped).
AUX MODE
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX
device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into
the AUX port, or by pushing the MEDIA button on
the faceplate, selecting the Source button, and
then the AUX button.
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the
radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode and
begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting
playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be
provided by the radio; use the device controls
instead. Adjust the volume with the Volume button,
Volume/Mute rotary knob, or the On/Off rotary
knob, or with the volume of the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the
volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too
low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the
radio unit to play the music on the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device. Press and release the Seek Down button
on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or to return to the beginning
of the previous selection if the USB device is within
the first three seconds of the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the
Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next
selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen
to return to the beginning of the current selection,
or return to the beginning of the previous selection
if the Bluetooth® device is within the first second
of the current selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to display the browse window. In USB
Mode, the left side of the browse window displays a list
of ways you can browse through the contents of the
USB device. If supported by the device, you can browse
by Folder, Artist, Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the
desired button on the touchscreen on the left side of
the screen. The center of the browse window shows
items and their sub-functions, which can be scrolled
through by pressing the Up and Down buttons to the
right. The TUNE/SCROLL knob can also be used to
scroll.
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 MULTIMEDIA
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate the
ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate or press
the Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll
through and select a desired track on the device.
Press the Exit button on the touchscreen if you
wish to cancel the Browse function.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source: USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button
on the touchscreen to select the desired audio
source: Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source: AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality.
The Repeat button on the touchscreen is
highlighted when active. The Radio will continue to
play the current track, repeatedly, as long as the
repeat is active. Press the Repeat button again
to enter Repeat All. The radio will continue to play
all the current tracks, repeatedly, as long as the
repeat function is active. To cancel Repeat, press
the Repeat button a third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
Audio button Ú page 259.
Info
In USB Mode, press the Info button on the
touchscreen to display the current track
information. Press the Info or X button on the
touchscreen a second time to cancel this feature.
Tracks
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the
touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List.
The song currently playing is indicated by an arrow and
lines above and below the song title. When in the
Tracks List screen you can rotate the TUNE/SCROLL
knob to highlight a track (indicated by the line above
and below the track name) and then push the
ENTER/BROWSE knob to start playing that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
supports this feature, press the Tracks button on
the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song
List. The currently playing song is indicated by a red
arrow and lines above and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®,
and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering
wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
commands and follow the prompts to switch your
media source or choose an artist:
“
Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“
Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest
Hits”; “
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre
Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match exactly
how the artist, album, song, and genre information
is displayed.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
MULTIMEDIA 269
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to
dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith
Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for
John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they
are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy
access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through
your vehicle’s audio system; the system will
automatically mute your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as you
enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute
the system's microphone for private conversation.
The Phone feature is driven through your Bluetooth®
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth® technology — the global standard that
enables different electronic devices to connect to each
other without wires or a docking station. Ensure you
phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and has
been paired to the Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile
phones or audio devices are allowed to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and
one audio device can be used with the system at a time.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all
risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel
is used to get into the Phone Mode and
make calls, show recent, incoming or
outgoing calls, view phonebook, etc.
When you push the button you will hear a BEEP.
The BEEP is your signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your
steering wheel is only used for “barge in”
and when you are already in a call or
want to make another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used to
access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice
Command features if your vehicle is equipped.
Phone Operation
OPERATION
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu
structure. Voice commands are required after
most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two
general methods for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and
then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait
for the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt
or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound commands
can be used. For example, instead of saying
“Call” and then “John Smith” and then “mobile”,
the following compound command can be said:
“Call John Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts
and say each part of the command when you are
asked for it. For example, you can use the compound
command form voice command “Search for John
Smith,” or you can break the compound command
form into two voice commands: “Search Contacts”
and when asked, “John Smith.” Please remember,
the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
NATURAL SPEECH
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences.
The system filters out certain non-word utterances
and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The system
handles fill-in words such as “I would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or
sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call
was requested but the specific name was not
recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system requires more information from the user, it
will ask a question to which the user can respond
without pushing the Voice Command button on the
steering wheel.
HELP COMMAND
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want
to know your options at any prompt, say “Help”
following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply
push the Phone button (if active) on your steering
wheel and say a command or say “Help”. All Phone
sessions begin with a push of the VR button or the
Phone button.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
MULTIMEDIA 271
CANCEL COMMAND
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel”
and you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button
on your steering wheel when the system is listening
for a command and be returned to the main or
previous menu.
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
PHONE
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
To begin using your Uconnect Phone,
you must pair your compatible
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Mobile phone pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to
reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please
visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile
phone compatibility information.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow these steps to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters Phone Mode and no other device(s)
have previously been paired. If the system
has a phone previously paired, even if no
phone is currently connected with the
system, this pop-up will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is enabled.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to
search for Bluetooth® connections.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the PIN
from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing
or Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button or the Add
Device button.
Search for available devices on your Blue-
tooth®-enabled mobile phone. When
prompted on the phone, select “Uconnect”
and accept the connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 MULTIMEDIA
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept
the connection request from Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite phone.
Selecting “Yes” will make this phone the highest
priority. This phone will take precedence over other
paired phones within range and will connect to the
Uconnect system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected to the
Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected,
simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth® screen, and the Uconnect
system will reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which
it was paired. The most recent phone paired will
have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
system to access your “messages” and “contacts”.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen
on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect
system may interfere with the Bluetooth® connection.
If this happens, simply repeat the pairing process.
However, first make sure to delete the device from the
list of phones on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure
to remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device
within range. If you need to choose a particular
phone or audio device follow these steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources
button.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR
AUDIO DEVICE
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
button.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources
button.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right
of the device name for a different phone or
audio device than the currently connected
device or press the preferred Connected
Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
MULTIMEDIA 273
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
FAVORITE
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen,
press the Settings button located to the right
of the device name for a different phone or
audio device than the currently connected
device or press the preferred “Connected
Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has
the ability to download contact names and number
entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook
Access Profile may support this feature. Your
mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking for
permission for the Uconnect system to access your
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow”
will sync your contacts with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website,
UconnectPhone.com,
for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook Ú page 277.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made
to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four
numbers per contact will be downloaded and
updated every time a phone is connected to the
Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay before
the latest downloaded names can be used. Until
then, if available, the previously downloaded
phonebook is available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected
mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and
then press one of the +Add Favorite Contact
buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press the
Down Arrow button or the Settings Gear button
next to the selected number to display the
option’s pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to
Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from
the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the
Settings Gear icon next to the contact you want
to remove from your favorites. This will bring
up the options for that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available
and supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile
service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that
you have.
Here are the phone options with Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
CALL CONTROLS
The touchscreen allows you to control the following
call features:
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
enter the number and press “Dial/Call”.
RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of
the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your
steering wheel and perform the above operation.
For example, say “Show my incoming calls”.
1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Ignore
4 — Transfer
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
MULTIMEDIA 275
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL — NO
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system.
Push the Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is in
progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an
incoming call or ignore it.
DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications
from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep
your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel.
For your convenience, there is a counter display to
keep track of your missed calls and text messages
while Do Not Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, “Conference Call” can
be selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhone® devices.
Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold
button on the Phone main screen.
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 MULTIMEDIA
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
CALL IS IN PROGRESS
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button
on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the
keypad (if supported by your mobile phone), recent
calls, SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks.
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the Swap Calls button on the phone
main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold
at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
JOIN CALLS
When two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the
Phone main screen to combine all calls into a
conference call.
CALL TERMINATION
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone
End button on the steering wheel. Only the active
call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on
hold, it will become the new active call.
REDIAL
Push the VR button and after the
“Listening” prompt and the following
beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
CALL CONTINUATION
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call
on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition
has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system
until the phone becomes out of range for the Blue-
tooth® connection. It is recommended to press the
Transfer button on the touchscreen when leaving
the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
PHONE
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from
your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or
vice versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone
main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
VOICE COMMAND
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
MULTIMEDIA 277
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not always
work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names in
your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in
motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and
network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is
ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile
phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to
say a command. Here are some examples:
“
Call John Smith”
“Dial 123 456 7890”
“Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
“
Call back” (call previously answered incoming
phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command,
push the Phone button and say “
Call”, then
pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your
phonebook. When a contact has multiple phone
numbers, you can say “
Call John Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce
incoming
text messages.
Push the VR button or Phone button and say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an incoming
text message. (Must have compatible mobile
phone paired to Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messages
and follow the system prompts.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume
all risks related to the use of the Uconnect
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to
do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose the
message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the
full implementation of the
Message Access Profile
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on your
Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone® “User
Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible
with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a
text message.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected
to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use
your voice to send text messages, select media,
place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean
and responds back to confirm your requests. The
system is designed to keep your eyes on the road
and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, you
can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is
recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
POWER-UP
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either
the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language
change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to
using the system Ú page 455.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
MULTIMEDIA 279
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
will be used in such a manner that the radio is
8 in (20 cm) or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on
the wireless radio
Ú
page 455.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road Pages
which display vehicle information related to the
drivetrain, transfer case, and coolant/oil gauges.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Vehicle
button on the touchscreen, select the Offroad tab,
and then select the OFF ROAD button on the main
screen. Off-Road Pages can also be accessed
through the app drawer.
Off-Road Button
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 MULTIMEDIA
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the
bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of
the four selectable page options. It provides
information for the following items:
1. Transfer Case Status
2. Latitude/Longitude
3. Altitude of the vehicle
4. Status of Hill Descent Control and Speed in
MPH (km/h)
Status Bar 2WD/4WD
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Latitude/Longitude
3 — Altitude
4 — Hill Descent Control Status
5 — Current Vehicle Speed
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
MULTIMEDIA 281
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s transfer case and
steering angle.
The following information is displayed:
1. Status of Transfer Case
2. Status of Front Axles — If Equipped
3. Status of the Rear Axles
4. Steering angle in degrees
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Transfer Case Status
3 — Rear Axle Locker Status
4 — Rear Axle
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 MULTIMEDIA
ACCESSORY GAUGE
The Accessory Gauge page displays the current
status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil
Temperature, Oil Pressure, Transmission
Temperature, and Battery Voltage.
Accessory Gauge Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Oil Temperature
2 — Coolant Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure
4 — Battery Voltage
5 — Transmission Temperature
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
MULTIMEDIA 283
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to
side) in degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a
visualization of the current vehicle angle.
NOTE:
Pitch & Roll values may show upon startup. These
numbers will update once the vehicle is driven.
Pitch & Roll Menu
5
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 MULTIMEDIA
SUSPENSION
The Suspension page displays the current status of
the vehicle’s suspension system and the current
ride height of the vehicle. The Suspension page will
also indicate when the vehicle’s height changes.
Suspension Menu
FORWARD FACING CAMERA
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Forward
Facing Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the front view of your vehicle. The image
will be displayed on the touchscreen along with a
caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across
the top of the screen.
To activate, press the Forward Facing Camera
button on the touchscreen.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
285
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and
brake performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle
is started and driven. During this self-check, you
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are beginning
to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops
may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification
may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion
of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally if
the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits
of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SAFETY
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system
includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and
Traction Control System (TCS). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer
Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and amount
of brake application and then applies optimum
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking
distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive
the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous
braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do
not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once
the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
or comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and that
immediate service is required. If the Brake System
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to
prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle
instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
entering Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before the
front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM) determines that the rate of change of the
steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel
lift occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other
factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). For a complete explanation of
the available ESC modes, see Ú page 287.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the
user's safety or the safety of others.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SAFETY 287
(Continued)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability
of the vehicle under various driving conditions.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) corrects for
oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to
counteract the above conditions. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS
is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on
the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used for
most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes
should only be used for specific reasons as noted
in the following paragraphs.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur.
ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
especially those that involve leaving the roadway
or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
or the safety of others.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from exces-
sive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle
control due to inappropriate driver input for the
conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of
an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
may negatively affect the performance of the
ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
suspension, braking system, tire type and size
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte-
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING!
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SAFETY
(Continued)
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the
ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the
push and release of the button will toggle the ESC
modes. Multiple attempts may be required to
return to "ESC On" mode.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To
enter the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the ESC OFF
button for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with
the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will
sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, and
the “ESC OFF” message will display in the instrument
cluster. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial
Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined
speed. When the vehicle speed slows below the
predetermined speed the system will return to ESC
“Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes
(if equipped).
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN mode. It should go out with the
engine running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
(located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as
soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system
becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function-
ality of ESC, except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section, has been
disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will
not engage to assist in maintaining stability.
ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot
prevent all accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slip-
pery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent collisions.
WARNING!
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SAFETY 289
Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active.
If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
that the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
is in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on
momentarily each time the ignition is placed in
the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON posi-
tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving
while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed
while descending hills during various driving
situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively
controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver is
actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically
if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The
set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and
can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The
following summarizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will
not activate.
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the
gear chosen by the transmission. When actively
controlling HDC the transmission will shift appro-
priately for the driver-selected set speed and corre-
sponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SAFETY
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any
of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or
brake application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill
grade.
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback
to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate
and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or
activated. This is the normal operating condition
for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the driver
pushes the HDC switch but enable conditions
are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when HDC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when
HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes.
The flashing will stop and HDC will activate
again once the brakes have cooled sufficiently.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for
a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for
HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the trans-
mission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles
equipped with a manual transmission, if the
clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending hills.
The driver must remain attentive to the driving
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a
safe vehicle speed.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
SAFETY 291
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
display, see Ú page 104.
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see
Ú page 236.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking situation
may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is
released by the driver. The Electronic Brake
Control system will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the
Traction Control System (TCS) may apply brake
pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine
power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD)
functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel.
This will allow more engine power to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled
even if TCS and Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in
reduced modes.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there
may not be enough brake pressure to hold
both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
rolling down an incline while resuming accel-
eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
Also, be certain to place the transmission in
PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 SAFETY
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations
Ú
page 216.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the
taillights, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter
the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of
the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear and enters standby mode when the
vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one
lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m).
The zone length starts at the outside rearview mirror
and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the
rear fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system may experience dropouts
(blinking on and off) of the side mirror warning
indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small
object remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple of
seconds).
The vehicle’s taillights, where the radar sensors
are located, must remain free of snow, ice, and
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system
can function properly. Do not block the taillights
with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle
racks, etc.).
The system may also detect blockage if the vehicle
is operated in areas with extremely low radar
returns such as a desert or parallel to a large
elevation drop. If blockage is detected, a “Blind
Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Wipe Rear Corners”
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
SAFETY 293
message will display in the cluster, both mirror
lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP alerts will
not occur. This is normal operation. The system will
automatically recover and resume function when
the condition clears.
Radar Sensor Locations
If the system detects degraded performance due
to contamination or foreign objects, a message will
warn you of a blocked sensor and the warning
indicators in the side view mirrors will be on.
The warning indicators will remain illuminated until
blockage clearing conditions are met. First clear
the taillights around the sensors of the blockage.
After removing the blockage, cycle the ignition
from ON to OFF and then back ON.
If the blockage message is still present after
cycling the ignition and driving in traffic, check
again for a blockage.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning
Light located in the outside mirrors in addition to
sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the
radio volume Ú page 295.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM
system will issue an alert during these types of
zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with
a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SAFETY
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle
remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5
seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the
difference in speed between the two vehicles is
greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light
will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts,
walls, foliage, berms, snow banks, car washes, etc.
However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle
in adjacent lanes Ú page 455.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
SAFETY 295
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out
of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear
end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects
moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
(32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles,
the system will not be able to alert the driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot Alert has three selectable modes of
operation that are available in the Uconnect
system.
For further information, see Ú page 236.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Only mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected
object. However, when the system is operating in Rear
Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object
is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the
radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert
in the appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. If the turn signal is then activated,
and it corresponds to an alert present on that side
of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio
(if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts when
a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/
hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state
always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking
lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you,
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SAFETY
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
vehicle is started the previously stored mode will
be recalled and used.
Trailer Merge Assist
NOTE:
When Trailer Merge Assist is activated, Rear Cross
Path is disabled.
NOTE:
When a trailer with an electric brake is connected
to the vehicle, the instrument cluster display will
provide a menu to allow a selection of the trailer
type. There will be two options provided: Conven-
tional and Goose/Fifth Wheel. Goose/Fifth Wheel
Trailer is incompatible and when selected, the
BSM system will disable until the trailer is discon-
nected. If the wrong option is selected, the system
can be reset by either disconnecting and recon-
necting the trailer harness connector or disabling
then re-enabling the Blind Spot Monitoring system
in the customer settings in the Uconnect system.
This will prompt the trailer selection menu again to
allow for the correct selection.
Trailer Merge Assist is a function of the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) system that extends the blind
spot zone to work while pulling a trailer. Trailer
Merge Assist consists of three sub functions:
Automatic Trailer Detection
Trailer Length Detection
Trailer Merge Warning
Blind Spot Zones With Trailer Merge Assist
Automatic Trailer Detection
There are two modes of operation for the detection
of the trailer length:
Automatic Mode — When “Auto Mode” is
selected, the system will use the blind spot
sensors to automatically determine the pres-
ence and length of a trailer. The presence of a
trailer will be detected using the blind spot radar
within 90 seconds of forward movement of the
vehicle. The vehicle must be moving above
6 mph (10 km/h) to activate the feature. Once
the trailer has been detected, the system will
default to the maximum blind spot zone until the
length has been verified. You will see “Auto” in
the instrument panel cluster .
Maximum Mode — When “Max Mode” is
selected, the system will default to the
maximum blind spot zone regardless of what
size trailer is attached .
NOTE:
Selected setting is stored when the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. To change this setting,
it must be selected through the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 236.
1 — Vehicle
2 — Trailer
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SAFETY 297
Trailer Length Detection
Once the trailer presence has been established,
the trailer length will be established (by making a
90 degree turn) and then the trailer length category
(e.g. 10-20 ft (3 m to 6 m)) will be displayed. This
can take up to 30 seconds after completing the turn.
NOTE:
During the same ignition cycle, if the vehicle is at a
standstill for a minimum of 90 seconds, a new
“trailer detection request” is enabled by the
system once the vehicle resumes motion.
Maximum length supported by the Trailer Merge
Assist feature is 39.5 ft (12 m). Trailer length is
considered the forward most portion of the trailer
hitch to the rearward most portion of the body,
fascia/bumper, or ramp of the trailer.
Maximum width supported by the Trailer Merge
Assist feature is 8.5 ft (2.59 m). Trailer width is
measured at the widest portion of the trailer and
may include wheels, tires, finders, or rails.
NOTE:
Fifth wheel or gooseneck trailers are not supported
by Trailer Merge Assist.
Trailer Length Detection
Trailer length will be identified and placed into one
of the following categories:
Trailer length up to 10 ft (3 m) — Blind Spot zone
will be adjusted to 10 ft (3 m) .
Trailer length between 10 ft to 20 ft (3 m to
6 m) — Blind Spot zone will be adjusted to
20 ft (6 m) .
Trailer length between 20 ft to 30 ft (6 m to
9 m) — Blind Spot zone will be adjusted to
30 ft (9 m) .
Trailer length between 30 ft and 39.5 ft (9 m to
12 m) — Blind Spot zone will be adjusted to Max
distance .
NOTE:
Trailer length is determined within +/- 3 ft (1 m) of
actual length. Trailers that are the same size as the
category limit, 10/20/30 ft (3/6/9 m), could be
subject to being placed in the category above or
below the correct one.
Trailer Merge Warning
Trailer Merge Warning is the extension of the blind spot
function to cover the length of the trailer, plus a safety
margin, to warn the driver when there is a vehicle in the
adjacent lane. The driver is alerted by the illumination
of the BSM Warning Light located in the outside mirror
on the side the other vehicle is detected on. In addition,
an audible (chime) alert will be heard and radio volume
reduced
Ú
page 295.
NOTE:
The Trailer Merge Alert system DOES NOT alert
the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles
that are outside the detection zones.
The BSM system may experience dropouts
(blinking on and off) of the side mirror warning
indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small
object remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple
of seconds).
Crowded areas such as parking lots, neighbor-
hoods, etc. may lead to an increased amount of
false alerts. This is normal operation.
1 — Trailer Length
2 — Trailer Hitch
3 — Trailer Width
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SAFETY
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument
cluster display), and may apply a haptic warning in the
form of a brake jerk, to warn the driver when it detects
a potential frontal collision. The warnings are intended
to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver will
be provided with audible and visual warnings as
well as a possible haptic warning in the form of a
brake jerk.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide
a limited level of active braking to help slow the
vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and
the system determines that the driver intends to
avoid the collision by braking but has not applied
sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
When towing a trailer, the system will also respond
to activate the trailer brakes (if equipped).
If an FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide
the maximum braking possible to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle
completely, the system will hold the vehicle at
standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated Ú page 455.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
3 mph (5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guardrails or sign
posts based on the course prediction. This is
expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system, after four Active
Braking events within a key cycle, the Active
Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until
the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec-
essary warnings to the surroundings.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading
vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavail-
able screens.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians,
bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is
equipped with the BSM system, always check your
vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use
your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
SAFETY 299
During an FCW event when towing a trailer, your
Electronic Brake system will respond by acti-
vating the trailer brakes (if equipped).
Turning FCW On Or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display
in the control settings. For further information, see
Ú page 236.
To turn the FCW system on, press the Forward
Collision button once.
To turn the FCW system off, press the Forward
Collision button once.
NOTE:
When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front.
When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system
from warning the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”,
“FCW OFF" will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this
prevents the system from providing limited
Active Braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event of
a potential frontal collision.
When FCW status is set to “Warning and
Braking”, this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
The FCW system state is defaulted to “Full On”
from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system
is turned off, it will reset to “Full On” when the
vehicle is restarted.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 236.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium”
setting and the system status is “Warning &
Braking”. This allows the system to warn the driver of
a possible collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings and it applies autonomous
braking.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Far", the
system provides possible collision warnings on
objects farther away. This results in earlier
warnings and provides the most reaction time to
avoid possible collisions.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Near", the
system provides possible collision warnings on
objects closer to the vehicle. This results in later
warnings and provides less reaction time than the
"Far" and "Medium" settings, which allows for a
more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event of
a potential frontal collision, but maintains the
audible and visual warnings.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential
frontal collision.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW
detect every type of potential collision. The driver
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering.
Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 SAFETY
The system will retain the last setting selected
by the driver after ignition shut down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading
vehicles with the same or higher rates of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavail-
able screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a
condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the
vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, Active
Braking may not be fully available. Once the condition
that limited the system performance is no longer
present, the system will return to its full performance
state. If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active
road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values in a
different color, or the Uconnect radio will display
a TPMS message. When this occurs you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire
pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always
be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven — this is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
See Ú page 417 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss
through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the
recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low
TPMS Warning Light illuminates, you must increase
the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard
pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn
off. The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard
pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
SAFETY 301
20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning
Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure
to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance or to provide warning of
a tire failure or condition.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the Tire Fill
Alert feature the TPMS should not be used as a
tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire
pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
rate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire.
Example: Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel
as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four TPMS sensors
Various TPMS messages, which display in the
instrument cluster
TPMS Warning Light
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. After-
market wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor
to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to
have your sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster when tire pressure is
low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire
with the low tire pressure values in a different
color. An "Inflate to XX" message will also be
displayed.
Example: Low Tire Pressure Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message.
Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically update,
the graphic display in the instrument cluster will
return to its original color, and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light off.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the
system fault no longer exists, the TPMS Warning
Light will no longer flash, and the "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message will no longer display, and a
pressure value will display in place of the dashes.
A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices or
driving next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
Installing aftermarket window tinting that
contains materials that may block radio wave
signals.
Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels
or wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
A system fault may occur due to an incorrect TPMS
sensor location condition. When a system fault
occurs due to an incorrect TPMS sensor location,
the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system
fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a “Tire Pressure
Temporarily Unavailable” message in place of the
tire pressure display screen. If the ignition switch
is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer
exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash
and the tire pressure display screen will be displayed
showing the tire pressure values in the correct
locations.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
SAFETY 303
Vehicles With Non-Matching Full Size Spare Or
Compact Spare
The non-matching full size spare or compact
spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. There-
fore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
the non-matching full size spare or compact
spare tire.
If you install the non-matching full size spare or
compact spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
TPMS Warning Light and a “LOW TIRE” message
will remain on and a chime will sound. In addi-
tion, the graphic in the instrument cluster will
still display a pressure value in a different color
and an “Inflate to XX” message.
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a
chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid, and the instrument cluster will display
a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
non-matching full size spare or compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off and the
graphic in the instrument cluster will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pres-
sure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up
to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TTPMS) — If Equipped
The Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TTPMS) is a feature that displays the trailer tire
pressure values and warns the driver of a low tire
pressure event based on the drivers set target tire
pressure value, through the TTPMS settings found
in the radio.
The TTPMS monitors the pressure of each tire and
warns the driver through the instrument cluster,
when either a low tire pressure condition falls below
25% of the drivers set pressure or if a system
malfunction occurs. The instrument cluster will
display the actual tire pressure or dashes for each of
the trailer tires in the correct trailer position, based
on trailer configuration. The TTPMS can support up
to 12 trailer tires per configured trailer on up to four
configurable trailers
Ú
page 236.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Pairing
In order use this feature, the provided tire pressure
sensors must be installed in the desired trailer
tires and the sensors must be paired to the truck.
If the target trailer requires more than the provided
four sensors, additional sensors can be purchased
at an authorized Ram dealership.
With the sensors installed and the trailer near or
connected to your Ram truck, initiate the pairing
process by entering the settings menu in the radio
and selecting trailer. Select the desired trailer
profile to pair to, open the “Tire Pressure” menu,
and hit “Setup All Tires” Ú page 236.
NOTE:
The vehicle may not be driven until the pairing
process is complete.
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 SAFETY
Trailer Tire Pressure Settings
Trailer Tire Pressure Pairing
Follow the on screen prompts to select the number
of axles (1 - 3), the number of trailer tires (2, 4, 6,
8, or 12), and the set trailer tire pressure.
The range is selectable anywhere between
25-125 psi (172-862 kPa).
Once psi (kPa) is programmed, the pairing screen
appears. Tire sensors must be paired in order
shown. Starting with Tire 1, deflate tire by 5 psi
(34 kPa) and wait for a horn chirp. It may take up to
three minutes for the chirp to occur, indicating that
the sensor has paired. Repeat process on each tire,
in order, until complete. Do not exit the pairing
screen until process is complete. If pairing was
unsuccessful, a double horn chirp will sound, and a
prompt on the touchscreen will allow you to retry the
procedure; “Retry” will only appear when setup fails.
Each tire must be successfully paired during a single
pairing process to receive the success screen.
NOTE:
If the pairing process times out after three minutes
of no communication with a sensor, a double horn
chip will occur indicating the pairing has failed and
a message will display on the radio indicating the
process was unsuccessful. Under certain circum-
stances, the double horn chirp may continue to
happen every three minutes indicating the failed
pairing. If this happens, the horn chirping may be
canceled by cycling the ignition button OFF and
then back to RUN position.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
When a tire pressure low in one or more of the active
road tires is detected, the instrument cluster will
display a message stating “Trailer Tire Pressure
Low”. The instrument cluster will then display the
TTPMS graphic showing the pressure values of each
tire with the low tire pressure values in a different
color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition
(those in a different color in the instrument cluster
graphic) to the customer programmed target tire
pressure value as shown at the top of the TTPMS
instrument cluster graphic. Once the tire(s) are inflated,
the system will automatically update the graphic
display in the instrument cluster, returning to its
original color. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TTPMS to receive the updated information.
Service TTPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster
will display a “Trailer Tire Pressure System Service
Required” message for a minimum of five seconds.
Once the system fault is corrected the "Trailer Tire
Pressure System Service Required" message will
no longer be displayed. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TTPMS to receive the
trailer tire pressure information.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
SAFETY 305
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System Not
Configured
A “Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured”
message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster on the TTPMS instrument cluster graphic
when a trailer number is selected that has not had
trailer tire pressure sensors paired. To correct this
condition, see Ú page 236.
Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active
Trailer
The “Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match
Active Trailer” message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster when the trailer sensors being
received by the TTPMS module do not match the
trailer sensors paired to the current trailer number
selected. This message will be displayed when the
sensors being received completely match the
sensors paired to another trailer number
configured in the TTPMS module.
To correct this condition, the correct trailer number
must be selected in the radio Ú page 236.
System Limitations
The TTPMS may have difficulty transmitting
through steel-walled tires or on trailers longer than
30 ft. It is recommended to use standard tires and
trailers less than 30 ft long to avoid dropouts or
difficulty when pairing.
NOTE:
The vehicle may not be driven until the pairing
process is complete.
Tire Fill Alert
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the
tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the
Tire Fill Alert feature through use of the customer
settings in the radio.
NOTE:
Only one tire can be filled at a time when using
the Tire Fill Alert system.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the
system is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the system
detects an increase of tire pressure, while filling
the fire. The ignition must be in the RUN mode, with
the transmission in PARK (P).
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to
enter Tire Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
If the hazard lamps do not come on while inflating
the tire, the TPMS sensor may be in an inoperative
position, preventing the TPMS sensor signal from
being received. In this case, the vehicle may need
to be moved slightly forward or backward.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
pressure display screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once to let the user know
when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches
recommended pressure.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over-
filled and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to inflate the tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough air
is let out to reach proper inflation level.
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is
then underinflated and will continue to chirp
every five seconds if the user continues to
deflate the tire.
NOTE:
After use, the TFA feature will NOT remain active
after ignition shut down. The feature will need to be
re-enabled when the vehicle is restarted
Ú
page 236.
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SAFETY
SELECTABLE TIRE FILL ALERT (STFA)
The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an
optional feature that is included as part of the
normal Tire Fill Alert system. The system is designed
to allow the customer to select a pressure to inflate
or deflate the vehicle's front and rear axle tires to
and to provide feedback to the customer while
inflating or deflating the vehicle's tires.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is
located in the apps menu of the Uconnect system,
the customer will be able to select a pressure setting
for both the front and rear axle tire pressures by
scrolling through a pressure range from XX to 15 psi
in 1 psi increments for each axle setting. XX = the
vehicle’s cold placard pressure values for the front
and rear axles as shown on the vehicle placard
pressure label.
NOTE:
The Tire Fill Alert feature disables every time the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. The feature
must be re-enabled through the radio each time
the ignition is placed back in the ON/RUN position
Ú page 236.
The customer may also store the pressure values
chosen for each axle in the radio as a preset
pressure. The customer will be allowed to store up
to two sets of preset values in the radio for the
front and rear axle pressure values.
Once the customer selects the tire pressures for
the front and rear axles that they want to inflate or
deflate to, they can begin inflating or deflating one
tire at a time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or
deflating one tire at a time.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the
STFA feature through use of the TFA settings in the
radio. If STFA appears grayed out it must be turned
on prior to selecting.
In order to use STFA, the Tire Fill Alert feature must
be enabled through the radio Ú page 236.
The system will be activated when the TPMS
receiver module detects a change in tire pressure.
The ignition must be in the RUN mode, with the
transmission in PARK (P).
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
If the hazard lamps do not come on while inflating or
deflating the tire, the TPMS sensor may be in an
inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor
signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle
may need to be moved slightly forward or backward.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
pressure display screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once when the selected pres-
sure is reached to let the user know when to
stop inflating or deflating the tire.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over-
inflated or over deflated and will continue to
chirp every five seconds if the user continues to
inflate or deflate the tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough air
is added or removed to reach proper selected
pressure level.
Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
3500 Series Trucks
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TPIS.
The TPIS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to transmit tire
pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel
as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPIS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four TPMS sensors (Single Rear Wheel (SRW)
applications)
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SAFETY 307
Six TPMS sensors (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW)
applications)
Pressure display in the instrument cluster
The TPIS will display all four (Single Rear Wheel
(SRW) applications) or six (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW)
applications) tire pressure values in the instrument
cluster display.
If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster
will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the
system fault no longer exists, the "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed, and
a pressure value will display in place of the dashes.
A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices or
driving next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
Installing aftermarket window tinting that
contains materials that may block radio wave
signals.
Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels
or wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others.
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly must be secured in the
appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning
booster seat in a rear seating position
Ú
page 323.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 323.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow the
front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
into the space between occupants and the
door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see Ú page 452 for customer service contact
information.
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SAFETY
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
a poor driver and could cause a collision that
includes you. This can happen far away from home
or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active whenever
the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard
front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied).
The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking
the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by
an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
SAFETY 309
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Mega Cab and
Crew Cab front center seating position have
combination lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
WARNING!
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
could ride too high on your body, possibly
causing internal injuries. Always buckle your
seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
WARNING!
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing
head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under
the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t
as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt
over your shoulder so that your strongest bones
will take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and
shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a colli-
sion and leave you with no protection. Inspect the
seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is
involved in a collision, or if you have questions
regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
WARNING!
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
SAFETY 311
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt away
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in
the upward position without pushing or squeezing
the release button. To verify the shoulder belt
anchorage is latched, pull downward on the
shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
position.
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 SAFETY
First Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions (Regular Cab Only)
The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only)
features a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and
buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from
the lower anchor when the seat is folded. The latch
plate and regular latch plate can then be stored
out of the way in the seat for added convenience to
open up utilization of the storage areas behind the
front seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch
plate from its stowed position on the seat.
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt
over the seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the
right head restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until
you hear a “click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt
in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that
it is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
SAFETY 313
(Continued)
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch
plate into the center red slot on the mini-buckle.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch
plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt
to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and
regular latch plate into its stowed position.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
First Row Center Lap Belt Operating
Instructions — If Equipped
The center seating position for the Mega Cab and
Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To buckle
the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click." To lengthen the lap belt, tilt
the latch plate and pull.
To remove slack, pull the loose end of the webbing.
Wear the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back
and upright in the seat, then adjust the seat belt as
tightly as is comfortable.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable
upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its
lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you
with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for
a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used
by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able
to provide proper restraint and will increase
the risk of injury in a collision.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow
the preceding procedure to detach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the
webbing, and reattach the mini-latch plate
and mini-buckle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original
seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt
Extender if, when worn, the distance between
the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender
buckle and the center of the occupant’s body
is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
can increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender
when the lap belt is not long enough and only
use in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for the mother and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the
seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a
collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing
in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) — If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
may be equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a
child restraint system Ú page 333.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for
each seating position.
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
SAFETY 315
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully
pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section.
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
"click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
that have a harness for restraining the child.
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 SAFETY
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others.
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors — If Equipped
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system,
it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled.
In this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
SAFETY 317
(Continued)
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light
is detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared.
In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and
a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on
while driving have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light, see
Ú
page 114.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
for both the driver and front passenger. The front air
bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air
bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the
glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
2500 Series Truck
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors
(if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher
energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-
ably extending your arms to reach the steering
wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 SAFETY
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front
Air Bags based upon seat position.
3500 Series Truck
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors
(if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger seat
belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
Bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air
bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in
rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will
not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that
may produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and
angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of whether
or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects
a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the
inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually.
You may damage the air bags and you could
be injured because the air bags may no longer
be functional. The protective covers for the air
bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
though you have air bags.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
SAFETY 319
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
of the driver and front passenger, and position the
front occupants for improved interaction with the
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled
“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing
serious injury.
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 SAFETY
(Continued)
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response
to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after-
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add
roof racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can
be seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessary for your protection in all
collisions. They also help keep you in position,
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
SAFETY 321
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags
and seat belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing
system determines if a rollover event may be in
progress and whether deployment is appropriate.
In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or
near rollover event, and deployment is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will deploy the side air
bags and seat belt pretensioners on both sides of
the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors — If Equipped
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as
the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are
similar to friction rope burns or those you might
get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor.
They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi-
cantly within a few days, or if you have any blis-
tering, see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
by-product of the process that generates the
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
WARNING!
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 SAFETY
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System perform the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(if equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes
from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident
Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any
of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump (if equipped)
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting
the system and starting the engine. If there are no
fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices
(e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If you
have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to
ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel
leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground
near the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must
be towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected
and to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System reset.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air
bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt
retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
SAFETY 323
Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as
an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle,
data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
who works on your vehicle that it has an air
bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally
or may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat,
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may
be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 SAFETY
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers
or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have not reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown
the height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
SAFETY 325
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child
seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat
belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees
bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s
back is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear
support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this
vehicle is not designed to manage the crash
forces of this type of car seat. In a crash, the
support leg may not function as it was designed
by the car seat manufacturer, and your child may
be more severely injured as a result.
WARNING!
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
their back is against the seatback, should use the
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat while the child is
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
or slouching can move the belt out of position.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it
in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or
seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
which may result in serious injury or death.
A child must always wear both the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
SAFETY 327
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH
system has three vehicle anchor points for installing
LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower
anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback and one top tether
anchorage located behind the seating position.
These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Regular Cab LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
SAFETY 329
Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions Mega Cab LATCH Positions
Crew Cab Full Bench LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage
system to attach the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of
the child and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5 kg). Use the seat
belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat
owner’s manual for more information.
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 SAFETY
Can a child seat be installed in the center position
using the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the
outboard seating positions?
N/A – Regular Cab/Mega Cab
No – Crew Cab Full Bench rear seat
Regular Cab Front / Crew Cab with full bench rear seat: Use the
seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
Crew Cab with split bench rear seat / Mega Cab: Child restraints
can be installed using the supplied lower anchorages for the
center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if
the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every rear seating position
if they interfere with the installation of the child restraint
Ú page 40.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
SAFETY 331
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Mega Cab/Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats (Driver Side)
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Regular Cab models have tether strap
anchorages behind the front center and
right seats. Mega Cab and Crew Cab
models have tether strap anchorages
located behind each of the rear seats.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
Crew Cab Outboard Tether Anchorage
Crew Cab Center Tether Anchorage With Head Restraint In
Raised Position
Mega Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
1 — Tether Anchor
2 — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 SAFETY
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Regular Cab Or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear Seat: No
Lower Center LATCH Anchorages Available
Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat Or Mega Cab Rear
Seat: Center LATCH Anchorages Available
If a child restraint installed in the center position
blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the
outboard position, do not use that outboard
position. If a child seat in the center position blocks
the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not
install a child seat in that outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 333 to check what type of seat belt each
seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it
to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú
page 337 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This position
is not approved for installing child seats using
the LATCH attachments. You must use the
seat belt and tether anchor to install a child
seat in the center seating position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. For typical installa-
tion instructions, see
Ú
page 332.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. For typical
installation instructions, see Ú page 332.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
SAFETY 333
(Continued)
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
Regular Cab
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
portion of the seat belt tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. See the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description Ú page 314 for additional
information on ALR.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
WARNING!
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 SAFETY
Crew Cab And Mega Cab
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or
both. Both types of seat belts are designed to keep
the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. See the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description
Ú
page 314 for additional information
on ALR. The cinching latch plate is designed to hold
the lap portion of the seat belt tight when webbing is
pulled tight and straight through a child restraint’s
belt path.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Cinching Latch plate — Cinching Latch plate
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with
the seat belt to attach a forward-facing child
restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a
forward-facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight
limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint
is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
SAFETY 335
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1.
For Mega And Crew Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be re-
clined, you may recline the seat and/or raise
the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better
fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move
it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
For Regular Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. Move the vehicle seat as far rearward
as possible to keep the child as far from the
passenger air bag as possible.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat
belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the
webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the
webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat
step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every rear seating position
if they interfere with the installation of the child restraint
Ú page 40.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat
belt against the belt path of the child restraint?
Yes – Cinching Latch Plate
No – ALR
In positions with cinching latch plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk
may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retractor.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 SAFETY
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether anchorage,
connect the tether strap to the anchorage and
tighten the tether strap. For directions to attach
a tether anchor, see
Ú
page 337.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing
from the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether anchorage,
connect the tether strap to the anchorage and
tighten the tether strap. See
Ú
page 337 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close
to the belt path opening of the child restraint, you
may have trouble tightening the seat belt. If this
happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle
and twist the short buckle-end belt up to three full
turns to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the
buckle with the release button facing out, away from
the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to
complete the installation of the child restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you
shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around one half turn,
and insert the latch plate into the buckle again.
If you still cannot make the child restraint
installation tight, try a different seating position.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
SAFETY 337
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
Regular And Mega Cab Trucks:
In the regular cab truck, the top tether
anchorages are located behind the center
and right passenger seats. In the mega cab
truck, the top tether anchorages are located
behind each rear seating position. There is a plastic
cover over each anchorage. To attach the tether strap
of the child restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back, under the head restraint
and to the tether anchor directly behind the
seat.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path between the anchorage and the
child seat. The tether strap should go between
the head restraint posts underneath the head
restraint. You may need to adjust the head
restraint to the upward position to pass the
tether strap underneath the head restraint
and between its posts.
3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the
hook to the square opening in the sheet metal.
Tighten the tether strap according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Crew Cab Trucks:
The top tether anchorages in this vehicle
are tether strap loops located between
the rear glass and the back of the rear
seat. There is a tether strap loop located
behind each seating position. Follow the steps
below to attach the tether strap of the child
restraint.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. For the
location of approved tether anchorages in your
vehicle, see
Ú
page 328.
1 — Tether Anchor
2 — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front
of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a
rear-facing child restraint.
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 SAFETY
Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between
the rear seat and rear glass to access the
tether strap loop.
Head Restraint In Raised Position
Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In Raised
Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust
the tether strap so that it will reach over the
seat back, under the head restraint, through
the tether strap loop behind the seat and over
to the tether strap loop behind the center seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head
restraint behind the child seat, though the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over to
the center tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop
(see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
NOTE:
If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left
and right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks
of both child seats should be connected to the
center tether strap loop. This is the correct way to
tether two outboard child seats.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
SAFETY 339
Center Seat:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between
the rear seat and rear glass to access the
tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust
the tether strap so that it will reach over the
seat back, under the head restraint, through
the tether strap loop behind the seat and over
to the tether strap loop behind either the right
or left outboard seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head
restraint behind the child seat, though the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over to
the right or left outboard tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
Installing Three Child Restraints:
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear
seat. Route the tether straps following the
directions for right and left seating positions,
above.
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap
loop, but do not tighten the straps yet.
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat.
Route the tether strap following the directions
for the center seating position, above.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop.
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions, tightening
the right and left tether straps before the
center tether strap.
Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 SAFETY
(Continued)
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer
to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”
Ú page 124.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
SAFETY 341
(Continued)
(Continued)
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is first placed in
the ON/RUN mode. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the
bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 307.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the windshield.
See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals.
Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using
the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of
position and interfere with the accelerator, brake
or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded,
or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners.
DO NOT install your floor mat upside
down or turn your floor mat over.
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat.
NEVER install or stack an additional
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only
use a FCA approved floor mat for the specific
make, model, and year of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the
engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to check
for interference. If your floor mat interferes with
the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to
the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle
and place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle
is moving. Objects can become trapped under
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could
cause a loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 SAFETY
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
be located and corrected immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
SAFETY 343
(Continued)
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an
authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
WARNING!
6
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on
the upper switch bank just below the radio.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch
Uconnect display, the Hazard Warning Flashers
button is located above the display.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use only
when your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety
hazard warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers
may wear down your battery.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 345
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles trim level, the overhead
console may vary.
Assist And SOS Buttons
Assist And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the overhead console contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber Ú page 455.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable 4G (data)
network, which comes as a built in feature.
Other Uconnect services will only be operable if
your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and
you are connected to an operable 4G (data)
network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you’ll be connected to someone who can help.
Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle
you’re driving and its location. Additional fees
may apply for roadside assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
7
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead
console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call
system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel
the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button
on the overhead console or press the cancellation
button on the Device Screen. Termination of the
SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the
overhead console.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and
SOS buttons on the overhead console will turn
green once a connection to a SOS operator has
been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to a SOS operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system to
determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open
a voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occur-
ring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected
with the SOS operator until the SOS oper-
ator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could
prevent operable network and GPS signal recep-
tion, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable network and GPS
signal reception is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 347
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The overhead console light located within the
ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illumi-
nate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message: “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
or stop the SOS Call system operation. These
include, but are not limited to, the following
factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
are damaged during a crash.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
4G (data) network and/or Global Positioning
Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility.
Operator error by the SOS operator.
4G (data) network congestion.
Weather.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after-
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s elec-
trical system. This may prevent your vehicle from
sending a signal to initiate an emergency call.
To avoid interference that can cause the SOS Call
system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system
or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR
VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY
REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to fail
when you need it. You could be injured if the
air bag system is not there to help protect you.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Ignoring the overhead console light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services.
If the overhead console light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns
on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the
system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the Occupant Restraint Control system
immediately.
7
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 4G
(data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent 4G
(data) and GPS signal reception, which can
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable 4G (data) network connection
and a GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
can immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to
your provided radio supplement for complete
information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension
system, there is a feature which allows the auto-
matic leveling to be disabled to assist with
changing a tire.
This feature can be activated through the
Uconnect system Ú page 251.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid
ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the transmission into PARK (P).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take
it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 349
6. Block both front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position.
For example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being raised or lifted.
JACK LOCATION
The jack and tools are stored under the front
passenger seat.
REMOVAL OF JACK AND TOOLS
To access the jack and tools, you must remove the
plastic access cover located on the side of the front
passenger’s seat. To remove the cover, pull the front
part of the cover (closest to the front of the seat)
toward you to release a locking tab. Once the front of
the cover is loose, slide the cover toward the front of
the seat until it is free from the seat frame.
Jack Access Cover
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then
slide the assembly out from under the seat.
Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools
7
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Remove the jack and tools from the bracket assembly.
Turn the jack turn-screw counterclockwise to release
jack from bracket assembly.
Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
Jacking Tools
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
Assembled For Jack Operation
Assembled For Jack Operation
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Extension 2
3 — Extension 3
4 — Extension 4
CAUTION!
The lug wrench can only be attached to exten-
sion two (2).
When attaching the tool to the winch mecha-
nism be sure the large flared end opening on
extension four (4) is positioned correctly over
the winch mechanism adjusting nut.
Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and
winch mechanism may occur from improper
tool assembly.
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Extension 2
3 — Extension 3
4 — Extension 4
5 — Jack Driver
CAUTION!
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 351
REMOVING THE SPARE TIRE
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up
the truck. Attach the lug wrench to the extension
tubes with the curved angle facing away from the
vehicle. Insert the extension tube through the
access hole between the lower tailgate and the
top of the fascia/bumper and into the winch
mechanism tube.
Winch Mechanism Tube
Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole
2. Rotate the lug wrench handle counterclockwise
until the spare tire is on the ground with enough
cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the
vehicle.
Pulling The Spare Tire Out
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to
gain access to the spare tire retainer.
4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of
the cable.
Removing The Retainer
5. Pull the retainer through the center of the
wheel.
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage
the winch.
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall
them in the original carrier and location. While
driving you may experience abrupt stopping,
rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A loose jack,
tools, bracket or other objects in the vehicle may
move around with force, resulting in serious
injury.
7
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
Lug Wrench Adapter Location
See the following steps for proper jacking and tire
removal:
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from
storage.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not
remove, the wheel nuts by turning them
counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground. Changing a dually tire
requires the lug wrench adapter.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with hub caps/wheel
covers they must be removed before raising the
vehicle off the ground Ú page 357.
Lug Wrench Adapter
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
the valve stem facing the ground.
WARNING!
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 353
Lug Wrench Adapter And Wrench
3. Place the assembled jack and tools into the
jacking position.
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations
are critical. Keep the jack and tools aligned while
raising the vehicle to prevent tool damage. See the
following images for proper jacking locations.
Jack / Extensions Placement
Front Jacking Location
When changing the front wheel, assemble the
jack driver to the jack and connect the jack
driver to the extension tubes. Place the jack
under the axle as close to the tire as possible
with the drive tubes extending to the front.
Connect the extension tubes and lug wrench.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
7
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Jacking Location
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the
jack driver to the jack and connect the jack
driver to the extension tubes. Place the jack
under the axle between the spring and the
shock absorber with the extension tubes ex-
tending to the rear.
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
4. Connect the extension tubes and lug wrench.
5. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
6. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off.
On Single Rear Wheel (SRW) trucks, install the
spare wheel and lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the wheel nuts toward the wheel. On 3500
Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) trucks, if the outer tire is
being replaced then leave the inner wheel on the
vehicle. If the inner wheel is being replaced remove
the outer wheel and replace the inner wheel.
The wheel nuts are a two-piece assembly with a flat
face. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To avoid the risk
of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully
tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has been
lowered.
Rear Inner Wheel Proper Placement
(Dual Rear Wheel Equipped)
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make
sure that the jack will not damage surrounding
truck parts and adjust the jack position as
required.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 355
Dual Rear Wheel Jack Placement
7. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
lug wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star
pattern until each nut has been tightened twice
Ú
page 439. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or service station.
8. Install the wheel center cap and remove
the wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or
aluminum wheel center caps on the spare
wheel. This may result in cap damage.
9. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
Stow the replaced tire, jack, and tools as
previously described.
NOTE:
The bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial
(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use
the jack driver in order to lower the jack.
10. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE:
Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not
substitute with chrome plated lug nuts.
TO STOW THE FLAT OR SPARE
1. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable and position it properly across the
wheel opening.
2. Position the wheel behind the rear fascia/
bumper facing outward. Push the end of the
winch’s cable, spring and steel sleeve through
the back of the road wheel. Making sure the
valve stem is facing the ground when the
wheel is stowed.
Reinstalling The Retainer
3. Lay the wheel flat after the retainer is installed.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop, could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided.
7
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes
with the curved angle facing away from the
vehicle. Insert the extensions through the
access hole between the lower tailgate and
the top of the fascia/bumper and into the
winch mechanism tube.
Stowing The Flat Or Spare
5. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until
the wheel is drawn into place against the
underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate
until you feel the winch mechanism slip, or
click three or four times. It cannot be
overtightened. Push against the tire several
times to ensure it is firmly in place.
NOTE:
Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immediately.
REINSTALLING THE JACK AND TOOLS
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning
the jack turn-screw counterclockwise until the
jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tools into bracket
assembly. Make sure the lug wrench is under
the jack near the jack turn-screw. Snap tools
into bracket assembly clips. Install the jack
into bracket assembly and turn the jack
turn-screw clockwise until jack is snug into
bracket assembly.
Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
3. Place the jack and tool bracket assembly in the
storage position holding the jack by the jack
turn-screw, slip the jack and tools under the
seat so that the bottom slot engages into the
fastener on the floor.
Jack Hold Down Fastener
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and can
damage the winch.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire
in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 357
NOTE:
Ensure that the jack and tool bracket assembly
slides into the front hold down location.
4. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the
floor pan. Reinstall the plastic cover.
Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools
HUB CAPS/WHEEL COVERS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The hub caps must be removed before raising the
vehicle off the ground.
For 2500/3500 Single Rear Wheel (SRW) models,
use the flat end of the lug wrench to hook and pull
off the hub cap. Find the opening in the hub cap,
insert the lug wrench, and pull off the cap. If you
need to pry against the wheel, protect the wheel
surface.
Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Hub Cap
On 3500 models with Dual Rear Wheels (DRW),
you must first remove the hub caps—use the
procedure noted for the single rear wheel. For the
wheel covers (wheel skins), insert the flat end of
the lug wrench between the outer edge of the
wheel cover and the wheel. Pry against the wheel
to remove the wheel cover. Repeat this procedure
around the wheel until the cover pops off.
Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Wheel Cover
Replace the wheel covers using a rubber mallet to
ease the installation. Align the wheel cover vent
holes to the wheel vent holes. Tap on the wheel
cover as needed to firmly seat it evenly around the
wheel.
CAUTION!
Use extreme caution when removing the front
and rear wheel covers. Damage can occur to the
center cap and/or the wheel if screwdriver type
tools are used. A pulling motion, not a pry off
motion, is recommended to remove the caps.
CAUTION!
Use a pulling motion to remove the hub cap.
Do not use a twisting motion when removing
the hub cap, damage to the hub cap; finish
may occur.
The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has
two pull off notches. Make sure that the hook
of the jack handle driver is located squarely in
the cap notch before attempting to pull off.
7
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow
the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer's operating instructions and
precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of
the engine compartment, behind the driver side
headlight assembly.
If you have a diesel engine, you may have two
batteries, jump start off the driver side battery.
Battery Location
The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap if equipped. Lift up on the cap to gain
access to the positive battery post. Do not jump off
fuses. Only jump directly off positive post which has
a positive
(+)
symbol on or around the post.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and turn the ignition
OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach apply the parking brake, make
sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter
motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 359
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive
(+)
post of the discharged
vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable to the positive
(+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground
must be away from the battery and the fuel
injection system.
Jump Starting Label
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, see the following
disconnection procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper
cable from the engine ground of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive
(+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable from the positive
(+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses
on the positive battery terminal. The resulting
electrical current will blow the fuse.
7
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
6–SPEED TRANSMISSION
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can
use the following procedure to temporarily move
the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the
access port (ringed circle) on the bottom of the
steering column, and push and hold the
override release lever up.
Gear Selector Override Access Port Location
Gear Selector Override Access Port
Engaging The Access Port
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 361
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
8–SPEED TRANSMISSION
To push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as
a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
available.
To activate the Manual Park Release see the
following steps:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the Manual Park Release access
cover, which is just above the parking brake
release handle, below and to the left of the
steering column.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
3. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push the
Manual Park Release lever locking tab (just
below the middle of the lever) to the right.
4. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged
position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever
rearward, until it locks in place pointing towards
the driver's seat. Release the locking tab and
verify that the Manual Park Release lever is
locked in the released position.
Manual Park Release Tether
5. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be
towed. Release the parking brake only when
the vehicle is securely connected to a tow
vehicle.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park
Release. In addition, you should be seated in the
driver’s seat with your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when activating the Manual Park Release.
Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
7
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock the
lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward
to its original position, until the locking tab
snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that
the lever is locked in its stowed position.
Manual Park Release Tether In Stowed Position
4. Reinstall the access cover.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle
motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
system and turning the A/C off can help remove
this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range.
If the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you
hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 363
(Continued)
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift
back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE
(R), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning
the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
For trucks equipped with an 8–speed transmis-
sion, shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF”
mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 287.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC
OFF button again to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause
damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire
could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of transmis-
sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear
(no transmission shifting occurring).
CAUTION!
7
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described on Ú page 229.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with the Air Suspension System Ú page 160 must be placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed
truck. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to
follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle,
not to fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
2WD Models 4WD Models
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
• 15 miles (24 km)
max distance (6–speed transmission)
• 30 miles (48 km)
max distance (8–speed transmission)
Detailed instructions
Ú page 229
• Automatic Transmission in
PARK
• Transfer Case in
NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in
forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly
Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 365
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery
is discharged, find Instructions on shifting the
transmission out of PARK Ú page 361.
TWO-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed
(with rear wheels
OFF the ground) under the
following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). Instruc-
tions on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL (N)
when the engine is off
Ú
page 361.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles
(48 km) for 8–speed transmission.
The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles
(24 km) for 6–speed transmission.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle
must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear
wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods to
tow the vehicle on a flatbed are as follows:
The front wheels raised and the rear wheels on
a towing dolly
Using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold
the front wheels in the straight position with the
rear wheels raised when and the front wheels
ON the ground.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle
raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may
result from improper towing.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used
(if the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel
lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
Front Tow Hooks
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 322.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 323.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged,
causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue
a vehicle stranded off-road. Do not use tow
hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing.
You could damage your vehicle.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
367
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. This system will alert you when it
is time to change your engine oil by displaying the
words “Oil Change Due” in your instrument cluster
display. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate depending on your
personal driving style. Failure to change the engine
oil per the maintenance schedule can result in
internal engine damage.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
by someone other than an authorized dealer, the
message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under instrument cluster display
Ú page 104.
For Gasoline Engines, under no circumstances
should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles
(13,000 km), 12 months or 350 hours of engine
run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of
engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
For Diesel Engines, under no circumstances
should oil change intervals exceed 15,000 miles
(24,000 km) or 12 months, whichever comes first
or sooner if prompted by the oil change indicator
system.
NOTE:
It is recommended that every 3,000 miles
(4,800 km), check the engine oil level at least
30 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut
off. Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on
level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil
level reading. Add oil only when the level is at or
below the ADD or MIN mark.
Severe service (high ambient temperature,
short trips, heavy loading, trailer towing,
off-road, or law enforcement use) may reduce
oil change intervals.
For Diesel Engines, configured with optional B20
capability are operated with greater than 5% levels
of biodiesel, the oil change interval must not
exceed 12,500 miles (20,000 km) or 400 hours,
whichever comes first under any circumstances.
See the Fuel Requirements section for more
information regarding operation with biodiesel
blend (B6-B20) fuel meeting ASTM specification
D-7467.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance
items may result in damage to the vehicle.
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Perform Service Indicator — Diesel Engine
Your vehicle will require emissions maintenance at a
set interval. To help remind you when this maintenance
is due, the instrument cluster will display “Perform
Service”. When the “Perform Service” message is
displayed on the instrument cluster it is necessary
to have the emissions maintenance performed.
Emissions maintenance may include replacing the
Closed Crankcase Ventilation (CCV) filter element.
The procedure for clearing and resetting the “Perform
Service” indicator message is located in the
appropriate Service Information.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder and power steering and
fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
At Each Oil Change
Change the engine oil and filter.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear
or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irreg-
ular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indi-
cator system turns on.
Inspect the batteries, and clean and tighten the
terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
Inspect front end, and lubricate — If equipped
with serviceable fittings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty
or off-road conditions. If required, replace
engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect and replace the Evaporative System
Fresh Air Filter as necessary, replacement may
be more frequent if vehicle is operated in
extreme dusty conditions.
Inspection and service should also be performed
anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected.
Retain all receipts.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door
hinge pivot joints twice a year to prevent
premature wear.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 369
MAINTENANCE PLAN — GASOLINE ENGINE
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change engine oil.
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first.
Additional Inspections
Rotate the tires. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level. If using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing, change axle fluid.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake as necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
X X
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371
MAINTENANCE PLAN — DIESEL ENGINE
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
Change engine oil every
15,000 miles (24,000 km) or
12 months or 500 Hours or
sooner if prompted by the oil
change indicator system,
whichever comes first.
X X X X X X X X X X
Additional Inspections
Check the Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF) tank, refill if necessary.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Rotate the tires. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front end, and lubricate —
If equipped with serviceable
fittings.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter,
replace if necessary.
1
X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X
X
X X X X X X X X X X
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod
ends and boot seals for cracks or
leaks and all parts for damage, wear,
improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X X X X X X
Inspect and adjust parking brake. X X X X X X
Inspect drive belt; replace as
necessary.
X X X X X X
Inspect wheel bearings. X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace the engine fuel filter. X X X X X X X X X X
Replace the chassis mounted fuel
filter.
X X X X X X X X X X
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 373
Inspect the front and rear axle
surfaces. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level.
If using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing change the axle fluid.
X X X X X X
Inspect the transfer case fluid
(4x4), change for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing.
X X X X X
Change the transfer case fluid (4x4).
X X
Change automatic transmission
fluid (AS69RC transmission only).
X X X X
Change automatic transmission
fluid and sump filter (AS69RC
transmission only).
X X
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter(s) if using your
vehicle for any of the following:
police, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing (68RFE transmission only).
X X
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter(s).
X
Replace Crankcase Ventilation
Filter (CCV).
X X
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 375
Flush and replace power steering
fluid.
X
Flush and replace engine
coolant. ***
X
1. Under no circumstances should the engine air cleaner filter exceed 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months, whichever comes first.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
CAUTION!
***The manufacturer highly recommends that all cooling system service, maintenance, and repairs be performed by your local authorized dealer.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
6.4L GASOLINE ENGINE
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Battery
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 377
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE — 6-SPEED 68RFE
1 — Battery 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 8 — Battery
3 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 10 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Oil Fill 11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
6 — Engine Oil Dipstick 12 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE — 6-SPEED AS69RC HD
1 — Battery 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 8 — Battery
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Engine Oil Dipstick 11 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
6 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 12 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 379
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine
is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the
MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil
level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and the
fluid level should be checked at regular intervals. Fill
the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not
radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid
reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth
or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help
blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
your climate. This rating information can be found
on most washer fluid containers.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the
defroster for a few minutes to reduce the
possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on
the cold windshield. Windshield washer solution
used with water as directed on the container, aids
cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to avoid
line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, and
periodic maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure.
This could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water Ú page 359.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow
cable clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
hands after handling.
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection — Gasoline Engine
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Ú page 447.
NOTE:
Hemi engines (6.4L) at times can tick right after
startup and then quiet down after approximately
30 seconds. This is normal and will not harm the
engine. This characteristic can be caused by short
drive cycles. For example, if the vehicle is started
then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon
restarting, you may experience a ticking sound.
Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused for
an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended
oil changes or extended idling. If the engine
continues to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on, see the nearest authorized
dealer.
Engine Oil Selection — Diesel Engine
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Ú page 447.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressure
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 381
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
trademark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40
and 5W-40 engine oil.
For diesel engines, oils with a high ash content may
produce damaging deposits on cylinder head
valves and/or after treatment system damage. A
maximum sulfated ash content of 1.00 mass % is
recommended for all oil used in the engine.
The same oil change interval is to be followed
for synthetic oil as for petroleum-based oil. Also,
synthetic oil must meet the same performance
specifications as petroleum oil.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils,
only use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
correct API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity
grade numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
the addition of any additives (other than leak
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
problem to the environment. Contact an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental
agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
certified filters should be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 367.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters
should be used to ensure most efficient service.
Mopar® engine air cleaners are a high quality filter
and are recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the
air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)
unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection And
Replacement — Gasoline Engine
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris
you should change your engine air cleaner filter.
NOTE:
When replacing the engine air cleaner filter on
vehicles equipped with a 6.4L gasoline engine,
replace with a dry (non-oiled) filter only.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. With suitable tool fully loosen (six) fasteners
on engine air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access
the engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air cleaner
filter inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto
the housing assembly.
3. Tighten the fasteners (six) on the engine air
cleaner filter assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Diesel Engine
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris
you should change your engine air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Remove the screws from the engine air
cleaner filter cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access
the engine air cleaner filter.
1 — Fasteners
2 — Air Hose Clamp
3 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Screws
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 383
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto
the housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Tighten (6) screws to secure the engine air
cleaner filter cover to the housing assembly.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This
service should include cleaning of the condenser
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R-134a — (If Equipped)
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance.
The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by an authorized dealer or
other service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R-1234yf — (If Equipped)
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance
with a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and
recycling equipment.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, for further warranty
information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
to be disconnected should be done by an
experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter Replacement
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 367.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
2. With the glove compartment door open,
remove the glove compartment tension tether
and tether clip by sliding the clip toward the
face of the glove compartment door. Lift the
clip out of glove compartment door and
release into dash panel.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
3. There are travel stops on both sides of the glove
compartment. Push inward on right side of the
glove compartment travel stop to disengage
the stop. Then pull the right of the glove
compartment outward (away from the hinge) to
disengage the right side of the compartment
from the hinge. Continue by removing the left
side from the hinge by slightly lowering the
compartment while pulling outward until it is
completely disengaged from the hinge.
Glove Compartment
4. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the
finger tabs on each end of the filter cover.
Filter Cover
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter
removed and the blower operating, the blower
can contact hands and may propel dirt and
debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
1 — Glove Compartment Door
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 385
Filter Cover Removal
5. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight
out of the housing.
Cabin Air Filter
6. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor. When installing
the filter cover, press on each end until you
hear an audible click.
7. Reinstall the glove compartment on the
hinges.
8. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall
the glove compartment past the travel stops by
pushing in on the glove compartment sides.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
9. Reattach the glove compartment tension
tether by inserting the tether clip in the glove
compartment and sliding the clip away from
the face of the glove compartment door.
1 — Finger Tabs
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
the need to replace it more often.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from
rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a
reason to replace belt. However, cracks running
along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt
with cracks running along a rib must be replaced.
Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear,
frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated
from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct
position on pulley)
Belt broken (identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble
is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR
F
ILTER — DIESEL ENGINE
There are two fuel filter assemblies. One is located
on the driver's side of the engine. The best access
to this water drain valve is from under the hood.
The second one is on the under body, located
in front of the rear axle above the drive shaft.
The best access to this water drain valve is from
under the vehicle.
If water is detected in the water separator while the
engine is running, or while the ignition switch is in
the ON position, the Water In Fuel Indicator Light
will illuminate and an audible chime will be heard
five times. At this point you should stop the engine
and drain the water from both of the filters.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive
belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could be
injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equip-
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter
when the engine is running.
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate
container.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 387
If the Water In Fuel Indicator Light comes on and a
single chime is heard while you are driving, or with
the ignition switch in the ON position, there may be
a problem with your water separator wiring or
sensor. See an authorized dealer for service.
Upon proper draining of the water from both fuel
filters, the Water In Fuel Indicator Light will remain
illuminated for approximately 10 seconds. If the
water was drained while the engine was running,
the Water In Fuel Indicator Light may remain on for
approximately three minutes.
NOTE:
Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids
from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately
discarded, can present a problem to the envi-
ronment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station, or government agency for advice on recy-
cling programs and for where used fluids and
filters can be properly disposed of in your area.
Drain the fuel/water separator filters when the Water
In Fuel Indicator Light is ON. Within 10 minutes of
vehicle shutdown, turn the engine mounted filter drain
valve (located on the side of the filter assembly)
counterclockwise 1/4 turn, and turn the under body
mounted filter drain valve (located on the bottom of the
filter assembly) counterclockwise 1 full turn. Then turn
the ignition switch to the ON position, and allow any
accumulated water to drain. Leave the drain valve open
until all water and contaminants have been removed.
When clean fuel is visible, close the drain valve
following these guidelines:
1. Rotate the drain clockwise to close until you
feel resistance from the internal seal.
2. Continue turning the drain 1/2 of a turn to
properly compress the seal.
NOTE:
Over-compression of the seal due to overtightening
of the drain will damage the seal, cause a leak, and
require the entire sensor to be replaced.
3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
The sensor drain should not be overtightened
during normal service operations to avoid internal
damage and future fuel leaks. The drain should be
closed and secured without the use of tools.
If more than a couple ounces/milliliters of fuel have
been drained, follow the directions
Ú
page 389.
ENGINE MOUNTED FUEL FILTER
R
EPLACEMENT — DIESEL ENGINE
NOTE:
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the
manufacturer's filtration and water separating
requirements can severely impact fuel system
life and reliability.
The engine mounted filter housing is equipped
with a No-Filter-No-Run (NFNR) feature. Engine
will not run if:
No filter is installed.
Inferior/Non-approved filter is used. Use of OEM
filter is required to ensure vehicle will run.
Engine Mounted Fuel Filter Assembly
CAUTION!
If the Water In Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
DO NOT START the engine before you drain water
from the fuel filters to avoid engine damage.
1 — Drain Valve
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
1. Ensure engine is turned off.
2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter drain hose.
3. Open the water drain valve a quarter turn
counterclockwise and completely drain fuel
and water into the approved container.
4. Close the water drain valve.
5. Remove lid using a socket or strap wrench.
Rotate counterclockwise for removal. Remove
used o-ring and discard it.
6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the
housing and dispose of according to your local
regulations.
7. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid and
housing.
8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on the filter
housing and lubricate with clean engine oil.
9. Remove new filter cartridge from plastic bag
and install into housing.
NOTE:
Do not remove cartridge from bag until you reach
this step in order to keep cartridge clean.
10. Push down on the cartridge to ensure it is
properly seated.
Do not pre-fill the filter
housing with fuel.
11. Install lid onto housing and tighten to 22.5 ft-lb
(30.5 Nm). Do not overtighten the lid.
12. Prime the engine, then start the engine and
confirm there are no leaks Ú page 389.
UNDERBODY MOUNTED FUEL FILTER
R
EPLACEMENT — DIESEL ENGINE
NOTE:
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manu-
facturer's filtration and water separating
requirements can severely impact fuel system
life and reliability.
The underbody mounted filter housing will
cause the engine not to run if no filter is
installed.
Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter Assembly
CAUTION!
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate
container.
Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a
new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris
could be introduced into the fuel filter during
this action. It is best to install the filter dry and
allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel
system.
1 — Drain Valve
CAUTION!
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate
container.
Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a
new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris
could be introduced into the fuel filter during
this action. It is best to install the filter dry and
allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel
system.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 389
1. Ensure engine is turned off.
2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter drain hose.
3. Open the water drain valve one full turn
counterclockwise and completely drain fuel
and water into the approved container.
4. Close the water drain valve.
5. Remove lid using a socket or strap wrench.
Rotate counterclockwise for removal. Remove
used o-ring and discard it.
6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the
housing and dispose of according to your local
regulations.
7. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid and
housing.
8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on the filter
housing and lubricate with clean engine oil.
NOTE:
Water In Fuel (WIF) sensor is reusable. Service kit
comes with new o-ring for filter canister and WIF
sensor.
PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT
O
F FUEL — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the tank,
approximately 2 to 5 gal (8L to 19L).
2. Three priming cycles must be completed. Turn
ignition to the RUN position and wait approximately
30 seconds. This will activate the in tank fuel
pump. Turn the ignition switch to the off position,
and leave off for at least 30 seconds. Repeat this
procedure three times before cranking the engine.
3. Start the engine using the “Normal Starting”
procedure Ú page 129.
4. Once the engine starts, allow the engine to idle
for a minimum of 30 seconds.
NOTE:
The engine may run rough until the air is forced
from all the fuel lines.
NOTE:
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel, meeting
ASTM specification D-975 may be used with
your Cummins® diesel engine.
A maximum blend of 20% biodiesel, meeting
ASTM specification D-7467 may be used with
your Cummins® diesel engine.
Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can
negatively impact the fuel filter's ability to sepa-
rate water from the fuel, resulting in high pres-
sure fuel system corrosion or damage.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with
the engine running. Engine operation causes
high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel spray can
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not engage the starter motor for more than
15 seconds at a time. Allow two minutes
between the cranking intervals.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
agent. They can be unstable under certain
conditions and be hazardous or explosive when
mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline,
the use of these fuels can cause damage to the
fuel system.
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Ethanol blends are not recommended or
approved for use with your Cummins® diesel
engine.
In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
tives are not necessary for the proper operation
of your Cummins® diesel engine.
INTERVENTION REGENERATION
S
TRATEGY — MESSAGE PROCESS FLOW
The Cummins® diesel engine meets all
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Heavy Duty
Diesel Engine Emissions Standards, resulting in
one of the lowest emitting diesel engines ever
produced.
To achieve these emissions standards, your vehicle is
equipped with a state-of-the-art engine and exhaust
system. The engine and exhaust after-treatment
system work together to achieve the EPA Heavy Duty
Diesel Engine Emissions Standards. These systems are
seamlessly integrated into your vehicle and managed
by the Cummins® Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
The PCM manages engine combustion to allow the
exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn Particulate
Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input or interaction on
your part.
If the engine is allowed to idle or the truck is driven
on low engine speed drive cycles for more than
two hours, the system will automatically enter an
emissions operating mode that will increase the
engine idle speed to 900 RPM. While in this mode,
which is designed to help maintain the Diesel
Particulate Filter, the engine idle speed will return
to normal when the brake pedal is applied. A small
change in engine tone or a slight change in engine
performance while accelerating may also be
noticeable at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h).
This operating mode may last for up to an hour of
idle time, or around 20 minutes of driving time.
Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert you
to additional maintenance required on your truck
or engine Ú page 104.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF)
DEF sometimes known simply by the name of its
active component, UREA—is a key component of
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) systems, which
help diesel vehicles meet stringent emission
regulations. DEF is a liquid reducing agent that
reacts with engine exhaust in the presence of a
catalyst to convert smog-forming Nitrogen Oxides
(NOx) into harmless nitrogen and water vapor
Ú page 447.
You can receive assistance in locating DEF by
contacting an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with
a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and
to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch, release mechanism and
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle
in areas where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 391
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chat-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of
these conditions are present, clean the wiper
blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace
the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit.
Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that
is damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full
up position.
Windshield Wiper Arm And Blade
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
392 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the locking tab.
Wiper Locking Assembly
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from
the arm and with one finger, push the release
tab toward the wiper arm.
Wiper Disengaging
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base
of the wiper arm.
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the
wiper arm with one hand and separating the
wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other
hand (move the wiper blade down toward the
base of the wiper arm and away from the J
hook in the end of the wiper arm).
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the
tip of the wiper arm with the wiper locking tab
open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper
assembly into the hook on the tip of the arm
through the opening in the wiper blade under
the locking tab.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
1 — Locking Tab
2 — Wiper
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 393
(Continued)
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the
wiper arm until it is latched (engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click). Fold
down the latch release tab and snap it into its
locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside
the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle
is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment.
In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
nents disconnected or removed, such as when
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods
during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
ating conditions.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
Carbon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you
Ú
page 342.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials
might be grass or leaves coming into contact with
your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your
vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
emissions control device and may seriously
reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condi-
tion. In the event of engine malfunction, particu-
larly involving engine misfire or other apparent
loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with
a severe malfunction could cause the converter to
overheat, resulting in possible damage to the
converter and vehicle.
WARNING!
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393
394 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is
dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be
drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant.
Check the front of the A/C condenser or radiator
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty,
clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the A/C condenser or
the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system
please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant
(conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 367.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 447.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant
is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT
engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radi-
ator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may
start at any time, whether the engine is
running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the igni-
tion is in the ON mode.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 395
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement.
To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period,
it is important that you use the same engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the
life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the
area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system, please contact a local authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any accumulation of foreign material on the
sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by
animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet,
seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any
ground spills immediately.
WARNING!
Do not open a hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395
396 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Checking Coolant Level — 6.4L Engine
The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant
bottle should be between the “MIN” and “MAX”
range on the bottle when the engine is cold.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there
is no need to remove the cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant
(antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked
once a month. When additional engine coolant is
needed to maintain the proper level, it should be
added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
meters of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being
vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure
tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro-
sion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
and increased emissions.
CHARGE AIR COOLER — INTER-COOLER
The charge air cooler is positioned below the
radiator and the air conditioner condenser. Air
enters the engine through the air cleaner and
passes through the turbocharger, where it is
pressurized. This pressurized air rapidly reaches
high temperature. The air is then directed through
a hose to the charge air cooler and through
another hose to the intake manifold of the engine.
The air entering the engine has been cooled by
about 50° to 100°F (10° to 38°C). This cooling
process enables more efficient burning of fuel
resulting in fewer emissions.
To guarantee optimum performance of the system,
keep the surfaces of the charge air cooler,
condenser and radiator clean and free of debris.
Periodically check the hoses leading to and from
the charge air cooler for cracks or loose clamps
resulting in loss of pressure and reduced engine
performance.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected
periodically Ú page 367.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 397
(Continued)
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under the hood service
or immediately if the Brake System Warning Light
indicates system failure.
If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the
designated marks on the side of the reservoir of
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top
of the master cylinder area before removing cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected
to fall as the brake linings wear. However, an
unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a system check should be conducted.
For further information Ú page 450.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to
the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the
use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks in 6-speed
transmissions. Avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
fluid Ú page 450. Using the wrong type of
brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance.
The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle
is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in an open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission
as the chemicals can damage your transmission
components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397
398 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid Level Check — 8-Speed Transmission
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick.
An authorized dealer can check your transmission
fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Fluid Level Check — 6-Speed Transmission
It is best to check the fluid level when the
transmission is at normal operating temperature
(158-176°F / 70-80°C). This normally occurs
after at least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal
operating temperature the fluid cannot be held
comfortably between the fingertips. You can read
the transmission sump temperature in the
instrument cluster screen Ú page 104.
Use the following procedure to check the
transmission fluid level properly:
1. Monitor the transmission temperature using
the instrument cluster display, and operate
the vehicle as required to reach the normal
operating temperature. If the transmission is
not functioning properly, or the vehicle cannot
be driven, see the NOTE and CAUTION below
about checking the fluid level at colder
temperatures.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at
least 60 seconds, and leave the engine
running for the rest of this procedure.
4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the
brake pedal.
5. Place the gear selector momentarily into
each gear position (allowing time for the
transmission to fully engage in each position),
ending with the transmission in PARK.
6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert
it until seated.
7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid
level on both sides. The fluid level reading is
only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on
both sides of the dipstick. Note that the holes
in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the actual
level is at or above the hole. The fluid level
should be between the “HOT” (upper)
reference holes on the dipstick at normal
operating temperature. If the fluid level is low,
add fluid through the dipstick tube to bring it to
the proper level.
Do not overfill. Use ONLY the
specified fluid Ú page 450. After adding any
quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait a
minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully
drain into the transmission before rechecking
the fluid level.
NOTE:
If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should
be between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the
dipstick with the fluid at 60-70°F / 16-21°C. Only
use the COLD region of the dipstick as a rough
reference when setting the fluid level after a trans-
mission service or fluid change. Re-check the fluid
level, and adjust as required, once the trans-
mission reaches normal operating temperature.
8. Reinsert the dipstick. Check for leaks. Release
the parking brake.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it
may not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid
until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading. Run the engine at
idle, in PARK, to warm the fluid.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 399
NOTE:
If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should
be between the two COLD (lower) holes on the
dipstick with the fluid at 68-86°F / 20-30°C. Only
use the COLD region of the dipstick as a rough
reference when setting the fluid level after a trans-
mission service or fluid change. Re-check the fluid
level, and adjust as required, once the trans-
mission reaches normal operating temperature.
Fluid And Filter Changes — 8-Speed
Transmission
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Fluid And Filter Changes — 6-Speed
Transmission
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 367.
In addition, change the fluid and filters if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance
and life. Use only the manufacturer’s specified
transmission fluid Ú page 450. It is important to
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes
should be used in any transmission; only the
approved lubricant should be used.
REAR AXLE AND 4X4 FRONT DRIVING
A
XLE FLUID LEVEL
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level
Ú
page 450. This inspection should be
made with the vehicle in a level position.
To check the axle fluid, park the vehicle on a level
surface. Take a piece of wire (or zip tie) and make
a 90 degree bend two inches from the end of the
wire. Insert the wire into the fill plug hole and use it
like a dipstick. Remove the wire and measure from
the 90 degree bend to the oil level.
For the 2500 (Non-Power Wagon) axles, the fluid level
should be 4/5 in ± 1/4 in (20.3 mm ± 6.4 mm) below
the fill hole for the rear axle and it should be 1/4 in ±
1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the
front axle.
For the 2500 Power Wagon and all 3500 model axles,
the fluid level should be 1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ±
6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the 9.25 in front, 11.5 in
rear axle, and 12.0 in rear axle.
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it
may not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid
until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading. Run the engine at
idle, in PARK, to warm the fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder, and (for 6-speed
transmissions) will require more frequent fluid
and filter changes Ú page 450.
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399
400 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 367.
Lubricant Selection
For further information Ú page 450.
NOTE:
The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differ-
ential components. Operation of the vehicle in
water, as may be encountered in some off-highway
types of service, will require draining and refilling
the axle to avoid damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials
DO REQUIRE limited slip
oil additive (friction modifiers).
NOTE:
Slight noise and mild shuddering may be evident
while turning a vehicle with limited slip differential
on concrete or dry pavement. These conditions
should be considered normal operation of the
limited slip differential.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the
filler plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom
edge of the filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level
position.
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 367.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Ú page 450.
NOISE CONTROL SYSTEM REQUIRED
M
AINTENANCE & WARRANTY
All vehicles built over 10,000 lb (4,535 kg) Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating and manufactured for sale
and use in the United States are required to
comply with the Federal Government's Exterior
Noise Regulations. These vehicles can be
identified by the Noise Emission Control Label
located in the operator's compartment.
Required Maintenance For Noise Control
Systems
The following maintenance services must be performed
every six months or 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
whichever comes first, to ensure proper operation of
the noise control systems. In addition, inspection and
service should be performed anytime a malfunction is
observed or suspected. Proper maintenance of the
entire vehicle will help the effectiveness of the noise
control systems.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 401
Exhaust System
Inspect the entire exhaust system for leaks and
damaged parts. Devices such as hangers, clamps,
and U-bolts should be tight and in good condition.
Damaged components, burned or blown out
mufflers, burned or rusted out exhaust pipes
should be replaced according to the procedures
and specifications outlined in the appropriate
service manual.
Air Cleaner Assembly
Inspect air cleaner housing for proper assembly
and fit. Make certain that the air cleaner is properly
positioned and that the cover is tight. Check all
hoses leading to the air cleaner for tightness.
The air filter element must also be clean and
serviced according to the instructions outlined
in the Scheduled Maintenance section of this
manual.
Tampering With Noise Control System
Prohibited
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the
causing thereof: (1) the removal or rendering
inoperative by any person, other than for purposes
of maintenance, repair, or replacement, of any
device or element of design incorporated into any
new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to
its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or
while it is in use, or (2) the use of the vehicle after
such device or element of design has been
removed or rendered inoperative by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute
tampering are the following:
AIR CLEANER
Removal of the air cleaner.
Removal of the air cleaner filter element from
the air cleaner housing.
Removal of the air ducting.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Removal of, or rendering inoperative exhaust system
components including the muffler or tailpipe.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Removal of, or rendering inoperative the fan
clutch.
Removal of the fan shroud.
Noise Emission Warranty
The manufacturer warrants that this vehicle as
manufactured by the manufacturer, was designed,
built and equipped to conform at the time it left the
manufacturer's control with all applicable US EPA
Noise Control Regulations.
This warranty covers this vehicle as designed, built and
equipped by the manufacturer, and is not limited to any
particular part, component or system of the vehicle
manufactured by the manufacturer. Defects in design,
assembly or in any part, component or system of the
vehicle as manufactured by the manufacturer, which,
at the time it left the manufacturer's control, caused
noise emissions to exceed Federal standards, are
covered by this warranty for the life of the vehicle.
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401
402 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Log and Service Chart (Diesel Engines)
Noise Systems Maintenance Chart and Service Log — Insert Month, Day, Year under column mileage closest to the mileage at which service was performed.
MILES 7,500 15,000 22,500 30,000 37,500 45,000 52,500 60,000
KILOMETERS 12,000 24,000 36,000 48,000 60,000 72,000 84,000 96,000
Exhaust system-inspect
Air cleaner assembly-inspect
ODOMETER READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
MILES 67,500 75,000 82,500 90,000 97,500 105,000 112,500 120,000
KILOMETERS 108,000 120,000 132,000 144,000 156,000 168,000 180,000 192,000
Exhaust system-inspect
Air cleaner assembly-inspect
ODOMETER READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 403
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may
result in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and
circuit breakers. A description of each fuse and
component may be stamped on the inside cover,
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is
stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
the following chart.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. The use of
a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload.
If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indi-
cates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected. Never replace a blown fuse with metal
wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse
inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, transmission
system) or steering system blows, contact an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
If it is necessary to wash the engine compartment,
take care not to directly hit the fuse box, and the
windshield wiper motor with water.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure
to do so may allow water to get into the power
distribution center and possibly result in an
electrical system failure.
If it is necessary to wash the engine compart-
ment, take care not to directly hit the fuse box,
and the windshield wiper motors with water.
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403
404 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Power Distribution Center Location
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 60 Amp Yellow – ABS Pump Mtr
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan HI / Lo *
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 405
F04 50 Amp Red – 400W Inverter
F05 40 Amp Green – Air Suspension Comp
F06 40 Amp Green – STOM
F07 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
F08 20 Amp Blue – NOX Sensor *
F09
40 Amp Green
–
Gas – Brake Vacuum Pump *
30 Amp Pink Diesel – Fuel Heater *
F10 40 Amp Green – CBC #2 / Ext Lights
F11 40 Amp Green – Brake SYS MOD ECU & Valves
F12 40 Amp Green – CBC #3 / Pwr Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blwr Mtr
F14 40 Amp Green – CBC #4 / Ext Light
F15 30 Amp Pink – Power Side Step *
F16 30 Amp Pink – Smart - Bar Module *
F17 30 Amp Pink – Winch *
F18 – – Spare
F19 30 Amp Pink – Diesel SCR Feed *
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Mod
F21 30 Amp Pink – DTCM
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405
406 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F22
20 Amp Blue
–
Gas – ECM *
25 Amp White Diesel – PCM *
F23 30 Amp Pink – CBC #1 / Int Light
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Mod
F25 30 Amp Pink – FT Wiper
F26 – – Spare
F27 – – Spare
F28 20 Amp Blue – TRLR Tow B / U
F29 20 Amp Blue – TRLR TOW PARK
F30 30 Amp Pink – TRLR Tow
F31 – – Spare
F32 – – Spare
F33 20 Amp Blue – Trans Control Mod *
F34 30 Amp Pink – VSIM #2 *
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof *
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL) *
F37 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Frame / Fuel HTR *
F38 30 Amp Pink – ITBM *
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 10 Amp Red Vented Seats *
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 406
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 407
F41 – 10 Amp Red Act Grille Shutter / Dam *
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F43 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Strng Wheel *
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F45 – – Spare
F46 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters Relay Coils *
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 10 Amp Red IP Cluster / CSG
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Mod *
F51 – 10 Amp Red IGN Mod / KIN Mod / RF Hub
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Batt Snsr
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trlr Tow – Lt Turn/Stop
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Non-Memory Adjustable Pedals *
F55 – – Spare
F56 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Vapor Blocking Valve (VBV) *
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM / PCM / Trans PRSR SW
F58 – 10 Amp Red Bed Lighting
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 407
408 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F61 – 10 Amp Red NH3 Sensor / PM Sensor *
F62 – 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils / CAPS
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors
F65 – – Spare
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof / USB Rear *
F67 – 10 Amp Red
UCI Port / USB Front / Trailer Gateway Module (360 Camera) /
Tachograph
F68 – 10 Amp Red AEB RACAM HTR *
F69 – 15 Amp Blue SCR Mod 12 Volt *
F70 – 30 Amp Green Fuel Pump Mtr / Fuel Htr RLY
F71 – 25 Amp Clear Amp / Act Noise Cnsl
F72 – – Spare
F73 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Transfer Pump *
F74 – 10 Amp Red Backup Alarm
F75 – 10 Amp Red SCR RLY / ATMM *
F76 – 10 Amp Red Electronic Stability Control (ESC) *
F77 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / TCM / FAD MOD / STOM
F78 – 15 Amp Blue ECM / PCM / IRCM / AUX PDC Relay Coil Feed / HRLS
F79 – 15 Amp Blue ID / Clearance Lt
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 408
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 409
F80 – 10 Amp Red Ovrdh Con / Assist / 911
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trlr tow Rt turn / Stop
F82 – 10 Amp Red SCCM / Cruise control
F83 – – Spare
F84 – 15 Amp Blue ASBM / HVAC / ICS / Heated Seats SW
F85 – 10 Amp Red ORC (Airbag)
F86 – 10 Amp Red ORC (Airbag)
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Susp / ITBM / SCCM / Module Gateway Trailer
F88 – 15 Amp Blue IP Cluster
F89 – – Spare
F90 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet / Batt
F91 – – Power Outlet / Acc
F92 – 10 Amp Red MOD Invertor (Wake Up) / Power Port / USB IP / WCPM *
F93 – – Spare
F94 – 10 Amp Red SBW / TCASE SW / TRL TPM
F95 – 10 Amp Red RR CAM / PRKTRNX/ CHMSL Cam / Bld SPT SNR / SVUE CAM *
F96 – 10 Amp Red TRL Cam *
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Front HTD ST PSGR *
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Front HTD ST DRIVER *
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 409
410 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers. All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge
base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
NOTE:
Please see an authorized dealer for LED replacement
F99 – 10 Amp Red
HVAC / In-Car Temperature Sensor / CSG MOD / Module Gateway
Trailer / Tachograph
F100 – 10 Amp Red Upfitter Box Feed *
F101 – 20 Amp Yellow RR HTD ST Right *
F102 – 20 Amp Yellow RR HTD ST Left / Run RLY #3 *
F103 – 10 Amp Red HeadLamp AFLS *
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow UCI Port / USB Rear
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 410
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 411
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
High Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 9005LL
Low & High Beam (Reflector Headlamp) LED
Low & High Beam (Projector Headlamp) LED
Turn Signal / Front Position (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 7444NA
Turn Signal (Projector Headlamp) LED
Front Position (Headlamps) LED
Front Side Marker (Headlamps) LED
Front Fog Lamps (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
Front Fog Lamps (Headlamps) LED
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) LED
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp 3157K
Premium Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp LED
Base Tail/Backup Lamp W21/5W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 921
Cab Roof Marker Lamps LED
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Lamp LED
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) LED
Base Turn/Tail Lamp PWY24W
Rear License Plate Lamp LED
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 411
412 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
BASE QUAD: LOW BEAM HEADLAMP, HIGH
BEAM HEADLAMP, FRONT PARK AND TURN —
IF EQUIPPED
Low Beam
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the
front wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover
over the access hole in the front of the wheel
house splash shield. Access to the rear of the lamp
can be gained through this access hole.
Splash Shield Access Cover
4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel
house splash shield and disengage the bulb
access cover by rotating counterclockwise.
Bulb Access Cover
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
connector from the low beam bulb.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
bulb and covers.
High Beam
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
Bulb Access Cover
3. Look under the hood and behind the headlamp to
find the high beam bulb access cover.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching
it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact
other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will
result.
Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type
may overheat and cause damage to the lamp,
the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 412
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 413
4. Reach behind the headlamp and disengage
the access cover by rotating counterclockwise.
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
connector from the high beam bulb.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
bulb and covers.
Outer Front Park And Turn
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the
front wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover
over the access hole in the front of the wheel
house splash shield. Access to the rear of the lamp
can be gained through this access hole.
Splash Shield Access Cover
4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel
house splash shield and disengage the side
marker socket by rotating counterclockwise a
quarter turn.
Park And Turn Sockets
5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the
housing.
6. Separate the bulb from the socket without
twisting.
7. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
bulb and covers.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching
it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact
other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will
result.
Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type
may overheat and cause damage to the lamp,
the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring.
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 413
414 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FOG LAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
Please see an authorized dealer for service on LED
and Halogen front fog lamps.
Halogen
See the following steps to replace:
1. Reach under and behind the front fascia/
bumper to access the back of the front fog
lamp housing.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness
connector from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the housing.
Fog Lamp Bulb
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
REAR TAIL/STOP, TURN SIGNAL AND BACKUP
LAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the two screws and push pins that
pass through the bed sheet metal.
Tail Lamp Locations
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far
enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the
outboard side of the lamp housing from the
two plastic snap post retainers in the outer box
side panel.
Tail Lamp Removed
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors
from the bulb socket.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise a
quarter turn to unlock it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
1 — Tail Lamp
2 — Screws
3 — Fasteners
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 414
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 415
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and
housing.
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP (CHMSL)
WITH CARGO LAMP
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/
lens to the body as shown.
CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations
2. Separate the connector holding the housing
and wiring harness to the body.
3. Turn the desired bulb socket a quarter turn
and remove the socket and bulb from housing.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.
CHMSL Bulb And Socket
Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs
and housing.
CAB TOP CLEARANCE LAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the screws from the top of the lamp.
Screw Location From Clearance Lamp
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 415
416 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Rotate the bulb socket a quarter turn and pull
it from the lamp assembly.
Removing Bulb Socket From Clearance Lamp
3. Pull the bulb straight from it's socket and
replace.
REAR LAMP BAR ID MARKER (DUAL REAR
WHEELS) — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to
gain access to the bulb sockets.
Screw Locations
2. Turn the socket a quarter turn counter-
clockwise to access the bulb.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
4. Reverse the procedure for installation of the
bulbs and housing.
SIDE MARKER LAMPS (DUAL REAR WHEELS) —
IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
Side Marker Lamp Locations
1. Push rearward on the side marker lamp
assembly.
2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.
3. Turn the socket a quarter turn counter-
clockwise and remove from assembly to
access the bulb.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from socket.
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of the
bulbs and housing.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 416
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 417
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of
the following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5
R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 417
418 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 418
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 419
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 419
420 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 420
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 421
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 421
422 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
Ú page 215.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing Ú page 215.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never
exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual
to determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 422
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 423
(Continued)
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
configurations and number and size of occu-
pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
865 lbs (392 kg).
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle
handling, and increase your stopping distance.
Use tires of the recommended load capacity for
your vehicle. Never overload them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 423
424 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation
pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure
molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change.
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure
inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will
be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 424
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 425
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat
tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is
not designed to be reused when driven under Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPMS Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
Run Flat mode Ú page 300.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
For further information Ú page 363.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires
should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the tire should be replaced.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 425
426 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly
for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures.
The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use
tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed
Ú
page 425. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size
designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed
Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example for more
information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire Ú page 417.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and
wheels may change suspension dimensions and
performance characteristics, resulting in changes
to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
to steering and suspension components. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over-
loading and failure. You could lose control and
have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 426
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 427
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season tires.
All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C)
or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent
in size and type to the original equipment
tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an
authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states
prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú
page 221.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the
tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this
option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with a compact or limited use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 427
428 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/
80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before
lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel. This
label contains the driving limitations for this spare.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on
the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 428
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 429
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their
luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the
same soap solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel.
Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures
listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard
located on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge
of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity and
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and
automatic car washes may damage the wheel's
protective finish. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
or polishing compounds. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this
finish.
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 429
430 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
2500 4x2 (2WD) & 4x4 (4WD)
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum projection beyond tire
profile or equivalent)
Tradesman
Rear
LT245/70R17E
LT275/70R18E
U Class
Bighorn
Laramie
Longhorn
LT275/70R18E
LT285/60R20E
Limited LT285/60R20E
Power Wagon (4x4 Only) LT285/70R17D
3500 SRW 4x2 (2WD) & 4x4 (4WD)
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum projection beyond tire
profile or equivalent)
Tradesman
Bighorn
Limited
Laramie
Longhorn
Rear LT275/70R18E U Class
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 430
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 431
3500 DRW 4x2 (2WD)
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum projection beyond tire
profile or equivalent)
Tradesman
Bighorn
Limited
Laramie
Longhorn
Rear LT235/80R17E U Class
3500 DRW 4x4 (4WD)
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum projection beyond tire
profile or equivalent)
Tradesman
Bighorn
Limited
Laramie
Longhorn
Front/Rear LT235/80R17E U Class
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 431
432 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For these
reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 367.
More frequent rotation is permissible if desired.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not
be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension compo-
nents, it is important that only traction devices
in good condition are used. Broken devices can
cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle imme-
diately if noise occurs that could indicate device
breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the
device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION!
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 432
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 433
Dual Rear Wheels — If Equipped
The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be
matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in
a set. To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge
across all four tires. The straight edge should touch
all the tires.
Tire Rotation
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Information System (TPIS):
The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
uses unique sensors in the inner rear wheels to
help identify them from the outer rear wheels,
because of this, the inner and outer wheel loca-
tions can’t be switched.
After a tire rotation is completed, as shown
below, the system can auto learn the locations
of each sensor ID. Auto learning/localization
occurs when the vehicle ignition status is
changed from Off to On and speeds of greater
than 5 mph (8km/h) are obtained and remain
over 5 mph (8km/h) for at about a 15 minute
period. You may need to drive for 20 minutes to
account slower speeds and stops.
If the tires are rotated incorrectly, The auto localiza-
tion of the TPIS sensors will fail to locate correctly
resulting in incorrect locations for the pressure
values displayed in the instrument cluster.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
CAUTION!
3500 Dual Rear Tires may only have one
approved direction of rotation. This is to
accommodate the asymmetrical design (tread
pattern) of the On/Off-Road tire and the use of
Outline White Letter (OWL) tires.
When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have
to be remounted on the rim, or installed at a
different location, to maintain the correct
placement of the tire on the wheel relative to
the tire/wheel position on the truck. For
example, if the spare is used to replace an
outer rear tire it will have to be remounted on
the rim so that the wheel is dished inward.
That way the tread design of asymmetrical
tires and the white writing of the OWL tires will
maintain proper position.
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 433
434 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level
of performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel,
than the minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 434
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 435
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care —
If Equipped
For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold
Tonneau cover, use Mopar® Whitewall & Vinyl
Top Cleaner and Mopar® Leather and Vinyl
Conditioner/Protectant.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 435
436 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Fascia/Bumper Care
The customer is responsible to clean and maintain
the chrome components of the vehicle. Washing
away road debris and salt using an automotive
soap. Fascia/bumpers should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain
their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Your fascia/bumpers are susceptible to
deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride,
magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and
other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Do not use harsh chemicals
or a stiff brush. They can stain or damage the
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec-
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped
During ownership, the shine and luster of the
Spray-On Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road
dirt, heavy-duty hauling and hard water stains.
Weathering and UV exposure will lead to fading,
dulling, and loss of gloss over time.
To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On
Bedliner, the manufacturer recommends you
periodically rinse all loose dirt from your truck bed
and clean your truck at least twice per year using
the Mopar® Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner
available at a local authorized dealer.
To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your
Spray-On Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below:
1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove
any loose dirt and debris.
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a
soft cloth or brush.
3. Rinse bedliner with water.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes, or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the fascia/bumper’s
protective finish. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar® Chrome Cleaner, or equivalent is
recommended.
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions, strong alkaline additives, or harsh
brushes. Many aftermarket cleaners and automatic
car washes may damage the fascia/bumper’s
protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Chrome Cleaner, or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 436
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 437
4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar®
Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel
or sponge and wipe over the entire surface of
the truck bedliner.
Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to
many different types of chemicals (including
gasoline, oil, hydraulic fluids) for short periods of
time. If a spill occurs on your Spray-On Bedliner,
rinse the truck out as soon as possible to avoid
permanent damage.
Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a
Spray-On Bedliner. One common condition is when
loading a heavy pallet and dragging that pallet
across the floor of the bed. If a nail or sharp point
is exposed under the weight of the pallet a scratch
or tear is possible. While not covered by your new
vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix to cover the metal
exposed by the scratch is required. To repair a tear
or gouge, follow the directions provided in the
Mopar® Quick Repair Kit.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by
blotting with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp
towel.
For tough stains, apply Mopar® Total Clean, or
a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
For grease stains, apply Mopar® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap
residue.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form
of protectants on Stain Repel products.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace
the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
NOTE:
If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning
loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a
wet soft cloth until all residue is removed.
WARNING!
Do not use silicon-based protection products to
clean your bedliner. Silicon-based products can
become slippery and may result in personal
injury.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
8
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 437
438 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles
of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather
upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with
a soft cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to
clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recommends
Mopar® total care leather cleaner applied on a
cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision,
or if you have questions regarding seat belt or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA Certified
Collision Care Program facility for inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of
the interior may cause permanent damage.
Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or
ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may
result.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 438
439
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the
instrument panel, visible through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example,
repeated brake applications with the engine off),
the brakes will still function. However, you will
experience a substantial increase in braking effort
to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses
normal braking capability, the remaining system
will still function with some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. This will be evident by increased
pedal travel during application, greater pedal force
required to slow or stop, and activation of the
Brake Warning Light and/or the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) Warning Light during brake use.
HYDRAULIC BRAKE ASSIST —
I
F EQUIPPED
The brake system power assist is provided by a
hydro-boost unit which shares fluid with the power
steering system. You may experience some
clicking or hissing noises from the hydro-boost
system during hard braking conditions.
NOTE:
Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be
higher than normal until the power steering fluid
reaches operating temperature.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
before tightening.
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Torque
Lug Nut/
Bolt Type
**Lug
Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
130 Ft-Lb
(176 N·m)
Cone
M14 x
1.50
22 mm
129 Ft-Lb
(175 N·m)
Flanged
9
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 439
440 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE:
Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted. The
lug nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires
are being rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts
at the interface between the lug nut/bolt and the
washer.
Do not oil wheel studs.
Two-Piece Lug Nut
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the
torques listed in the table. Go through the sequence a
second time to verify that specific torque has been
achieved. Retighten to specifications after 25 miles
(40 km) and check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure
that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly tightened.
8/10 Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Patterns
It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept
torqued to specifications at all times. Torque wheel
stud nuts to specifications at each lubrication
interval.
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to
eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared
or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated.
This is especially important during the first few hundred
miles/kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts
to become properly set. All wheel nuts should first be
firmly seated against the wheel. The wheel nuts should
1 — 10 Bolt Pattern
2 — 8 Bolt Pattern
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 440
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 441
then be tightened to recommended torque. Tighten the
wheel nuts to final torque in increments. Progress
around the bolt circle, tightening the wheel nut
opposite to the wheel nut just previously tightened until
final torque is achieved.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the
engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the
engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see a
dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine
failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
6.4L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater
than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high quality
unleaded gasoline having a posted octane number
of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use
of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
provide improved performance and durability
of engine and fuel system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are recommended.
Using gasolines that have these additives will help
improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain
vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and
fuel system deposits. When available,
the usage of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is
recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
9
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 441
442 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline
containing methanol are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered under
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP)
may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and
fuel system components. Problems that result from
running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasoline to increase
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle.
The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated
on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask
your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline
contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
engine performance and damage the emis-
sions control system.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 442
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 443
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable
supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires that
you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur
Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and
prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel
(500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the
emissions control system.
For most year-round service, Number 2 Diesel Fuel
meeting ASTM (formerly known as the American
Society for Testing and Materials) specification D-975
Grade S15 will provide good performance. If the vehicle
is exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F or -7°C), or is
required to operate at colder-than-normal conditions
for prolonged periods, use Climatized Number 2 Diesel
Fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with 50% Number 1
Diesel Fuel. This will provide better protection from fuel
gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters.
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water.
To prevent fuel system trouble, drain the
accumulated water from the fuel/water separator
using the fuel/water separator drain provided on
both fuel filters. If you buy good quality fuel and
follow the cold weather advice above, fuel
conditioners should not be required in your vehicle.
If available in your area, a high cetane “premium”
diesel fuel may offer improved cold-starting and
warm-up performance.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may
require immediate service. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
mended. Most of these products contain high
concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
agent. They can be unstable under certain
conditions and hazardous or explosive when
mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
DO NOT START engine before you drain the water
from the fuel filter(s) to avoid engine damage
Ú page 386.
9
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 443
444 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL SPECIFICATIONS
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine has been
developed to take advantage of the high energy
content and generally lower cost Number 2 Ultra
Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel or Number 2 Ultra Low
Sulfur Climatized Diesel Fuels. Experience has
shown that it also operates on Number 1 Ultra Low
Sulfur Diesel Fuels or other fuels within
specification.
NOTE:
If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gasoline
on your diesel vehicle, do not start the vehicle.
If you restart your vehicle you risk damaging the
engine and fuel system. Please call an autho-
rized dealer for service.
A maximum blend of 20% biodiesel meeting
ASTM specification D-7467 may be used with
your Cummins® diesel engine. (Models config-
ured with B20 Capability.)
In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
tives are not necessary for the proper operation
of your Cummins® diesel engine. However, if
seasonably adjusted fuel is not available and
you are operating below 20°F (-6°C), Mopar®
Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent)
may be beneficial to avoid fuel gelling.
Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel should
only be used where extended arctic conditions
(0°F or -18°C) exist.
BIODIESEL FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Pickup Models
Your vehicle has been validated and approved for
the use of biodiesel in blends up to 20% (B20)
provided that you comply with the requirements
outlined below. It is important that you understand
and comply with these requirements. Failure to
comply with Oil Change requirements for vehicles
operating on biodiesel blends up to B20 will result
in premature engine wear. Such wear is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable
resources typically derived from animal fat,
rapeseed oil (Rapeseed Methyl Ester (RME) base),
or soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester (SME or SOME)
base). Biodiesel fuel has inherent limitations which
require that you understand and adhere to the
following requirements if you use blends of
biodiesel greater then 5% but not greater than
20% (B6-B20). There are no unique restrictions for
the use of B5. Use of blends greater than 20% is
not approved. Use of blends greater than 20% can
result in engine damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM Standards
The quality of biodiesel fuel may vary widely.
Only fuel produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the
following specifications may be blended to meet
biodiesel blend (B6–B20) fuel meeting ASTM
specification D-7467:
Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification
D-975 and biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting ASTM
specification D-6751.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 444
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 445
Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel
Within Six Months Of Manufacture
Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which
can result in long term storage problems. Fuel
produced to approved ASTM standards, if stored
properly, provides for protection against fuel
oxidation for up to six months.
Fuel Water Separation — Must Use
Mopar®/Cummins® Approved Fuel Filter
Elements
You must use Mopar®/Cummins® approved fuel
filter elements in both your engine mounted filter
and frame mounted filter.
Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and
water accelerates microbial growth. Your Mopar®/
Cummins® filtration system is designed to provide
adequate fuel water separation capabilities.
Biodiesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient
Temperatures
Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient
temperatures, which may pose problems for
both storage and operation. Precautions can be
necessary at low ambient temperatures, such as
storing the fuel in a heated building or a heated
storage tank, or using cold temperature additives.
Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To
Required Oil Change Interval
Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been observed
with the use of biodiesel fuel. Fuel in oil must not
exceed 5%. To ensure this limit is met your oil
change interval must be maintained to the
following schedule:
Ram Pickup 2500/3500 Only — 15,000 miles
(24,000 km)*
(*unless otherwise notified with an oil service
message.)
CAUTION!
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if
operation occurs with greater than 5%
biodiesel blends. Oil change intervals should
not exceed 6 months in either case. Failure to
comply with these Oil Change requirements
for vehicles operating on biodiesel blends up
to B20 may result in premature engine wear.
Such wear is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
B20 Biodiesel capable: The engine may suffer
severe damage if operated with concentra-
tions of Biodiesel higher than 20%.
9
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 445
446 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
6.4L GASOLINE ENGINE
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2500/3500 Shortbed Models 31 Gallons 117 Liters
2500/3500 Longbed Models 32 Gallons 121 Liters
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models — If Equipped 50 Gallons 189 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
6.4L Engine 16.6 Quarts 15.7 Liters
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2500/3500 Standard Cab Longbed Models 28 Gallons 106 Liters
2500/3500 Crew/Mega Cab Shortbed Models 31 Gallons 117 Liters
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models 32 Gallons 121 Liters
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models — If Equipped 50 Gallons 189 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 5.7 Gallons 21 Liters
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 446
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 447
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
6.4L GASOLINE ENGINE
Engine Oil With Filter
6.7L Engine 12 Quarts 11.4 Liters
Cooling System
6.7L Engine 22.0 Quarts 20.8 Liters
US Metric
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil
We recommend using Mopar® API Certified SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-A0921. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-40 engine
oil can be used but must have the API Donut trademark Ú page 381.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is unavailable, only use filters
that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
9
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 447
448 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil
In ambient temperatures above 0°F (-18°C), we recommend using 10W-30 engine oil such as Mopar®, Shell
Rotella and Shell Rimula that meets the manufacturer Material Standard MS-10902 and the API CK-4 engine
oil category is required. Products meeting Cummins® CES 20081 may also be used. The identification of
these engine oils is typically located on the back of the oil container.
In ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), we recommend using 5W-40
synthetic engine oil such as
Mopar®, Shell Rotella and Shell Rimula that meets the manufacturer Material Standard MS-10902 and the
API CK-4 engine oil category is required.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is unavailable, only use filters
that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Filters
We recommend using Mopar® Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating (engine mounted filter). Must meet
5 micron rating (chassis mounted filter).
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturer’s filtration
and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
Crankcase Ventilation Filter We recommend using Mopar® CCV Filter.
Fuel Selection
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires that you must fuel this
vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway
Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions control system.
For most year-round service, Number 2 Diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide
good performance.
If climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD fuel is not available, and you are operating below (20°F/-6°C), in sustained
arctic conditions, Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling.
This vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-975.
Pickup models configured with optional B20 capability, are additionally compatible with 20% biodiesel
meeting ASTM specification D-7467.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 448
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 449
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Mopar® Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) (API Certified) or equivalent that has been API Certified to the ISO 22241
standard. Use of fluids not API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system damage. You can receive
assistance in locating DEF in the United States by calling 866-RAM-INFO (866-726-4636). In Canada call
1–800–465–2001 (English) or 1–800–387–9983 (French).
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
9
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 449
450 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
6.4L GASOLINE ENGINE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – 8-Speed Automatic
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct
fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® Transfer Case Lubricant for Borg Warner 44-44 and 44-45.
Front and Rear Axle
We recommend using SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant. Limited slip additive is required for
limited slip axles. If the axle fluid is not pre-mixed with limited slip additive we recommend using Mopar®
MS-10111 Limited Slip Additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 and SAE J1703.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend using Mopar® Power Steering Fluid +4 or Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 450
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 451
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – 68RFE
Only use ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission. We recommend Mopar® ATF+4 fluid.
Automatic Transmission – AS69RC
Only use Mopar® ASRC Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.Failure to use the proper fluid may affect
the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® BW44–44 Transfer Case Fluid.
Front and Rear Axle Fluid
We recommend using SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant in 9.25 Front, 11.5 and 12.0
(Single Rear Wheel) Rear Axles. Use Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 in 12.0 (Dual Rear
Wheel) Rear axles. Limited slip additive is required for limited slip axles. If the axle fluid is not pre-mixed with
limited slip additive we recommend using Mopar® MS-10111 Limited Slip Additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 and SAE J1703.
9
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 451
452
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a
clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the items
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle
the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt
and high quality service. FCA US LLC’s authorized
dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to ensure the
vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. If for some reason you are
still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner
of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 452
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 453
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommu-
nication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its
customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired
customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay
Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed
by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection
beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a
Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive
Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in
the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about the service
contract, call FCA US LLC’s Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English
/ (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA
US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle.
An authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
ensure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om
for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
10
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 453
454 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain
its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immediately.
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety defect to the Canadian government
should contact Transport Canada,
Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP
.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make
it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 454
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 455
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online,
visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
10
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 455
456
INDEX
A
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control).................................... 182, 184
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............395
Adding Fuel.......................................... 211, 212
Additives, Fuel ...............................................441
Adjust
Down........................................................... 37
Forward ....................................................... 37
Rearward..................................................... 37
Up................................................................ 37
Adjustable Pedals............................................ 42
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................276
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ......................................318
Air Bag Warning Light................................316
Enhanced Accident Response......... 322, 366
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................366
If Deployment Occurs................................321
Knee Impact Bolsters................................319
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............323
Maintenance .............................................323
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............317
Transporting Pets......................................340
Air Bag Light ............................... 114, 316, 341
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air
Cleaner Filter) ...................................... 381, 400
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 383
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................... 383
Air Conditioner System ................................. 383
Air Conditioning................................................63
Air Conditioning Filter..............................66, 384
Air Conditioning System...................................65
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.......................66
Air Filter ........................................................ 381
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 424
Alarm
Security Alarm ....................................26, 117
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.........................................................12
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 394, 446
Disposal ................................................... 395
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 285
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 117
Assist, Hill Start............................................. 290
Audio Settings............................................... 265
Audio Systems (Radio).................................. 235
Auto Down Power Windows .............................77
Automatic Door Locks......................................30
Automatic Headlights.......................................53
Automatic Tailgate Release .............................81
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)..............65
Automatic Transmission.......................144, 399
Adding Fluid.............................................. 399
Fluid And Filter Change............................. 399
Fluid Change............................................. 399
Fluid Level Check.............................397, 398
Fluid Type ........................................399, 450
Shifting ..................................................... 147
Special Additives ...................................... 397
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode... 146
AutoPark ....................................................... 127
AUX Camera .................................................. 207
Auxiliary Driving Systems .............................. 292
Axle Fluid.....................................399, 400, 450
Axle Lubrication ...................................399, 400
B
Back-Up......................................................... 200
Back-Up Camera ........................................... 200
Bar, Stabilizer/Sway System ......................... 163
Battery ................................................. 115, 379
Blanket ..................................................... 136
Charging System Light.............................. 115
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................19
Battery Saver Feature ......................................56
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 456
457
Belts, Seat .....................................................340
Blind Spot Monitoring ....................................292
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing ................272
Body Builders Guide ........................................ 10
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................390
B-Pillar Location.............................................421
Brake Assist System ......................................286
Brake Control System ....................................286
Brake Fluid .......................................... 397, 450
Brake System ...................................... 396, 439
Fluid Check ...............................................397
Master Cylinder .........................................397
Parking......................................................140
Warning Light ............................................115
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................144
Bulb Replacement.........................................410
Bulbs, Light.......................................... 342, 410
C
Cab Top Clearance Lights..............................415
Camera..........................................................200
Camera, AUX..................................................207
Camera, Rear ...................................... 200, 202
Camera, Trailer Surround ..............................207
Capacities, Fluid ............................................446
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 376
Power Steering ......................................... 181
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 395
Car Washes................................................... 435
Carbon Monoxide Warning................... 342, 343
Cargo Light.......................................................55
CD................................................................. 267
Cellular Phone .............................................. 278
Center High Mounted Stop Light................... 415
Center Seat Storage Compartment..................67
Charge Air Cooler.......................................... 396
Chart, Tire Sizing........................................... 418
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light).............................................. 125
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 340
Checks, Safety .............................................. 340
Child Restraint .............................................. 323
Child Restraints
Booster Seats........................................... 326
Child Seat Installation ..................... 334, 335
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 333
Infant And Child Restraints....................... 325
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 331
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children.. 328
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 325
Seating Positions...................................... 327
Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 441
Cleaning
Wheels...................................................... 429
Climate Control ................................................60
Automatic ....................................................60
Manual ........................................................63
Cold Weather Operation................................ 129
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 427
Contract, Service........................................... 453
Controls ........................................................ 259
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)............ 395
Cooling System ............................................. 394
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 395
Coolant Level................................... 394, 396
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 446
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 395
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 394
Inspection................................................. 396
Points To Remember ................................ 396
Pressure Cap ............................................ 395
Radiator Cap............................................. 395
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze).........................394, 446, 447
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 435
Cruise Control (Speed Control).............182, 184
Cruise Light.......................................... 122, 123
Customer Assistance .................................... 452
Cybersecurity ................................................ 235
11
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 457
458
D
Daytime Running Lights................................... 52
Dealer Service ...............................................380
Defroster, Rear Window................................... 63
Defroster, Windshield.............................63, 341
Deleting A Phone ...........................................272
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................124
Diesel Exhaust Brake ....................................141
Diesel Fuel.....................................................443
Diesel Fuel Requirements .............................443
Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming .....................389
Differential, Limited Slip ................................172
Dipsticks
Power Steering..........................................181
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................................364
Disc Drive ......................................................267
Disconnecting................................................272
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant).......................395
Disturb...........................................................275
Door Ajar........................................................115
Door Ajar Light...............................................115
Door Locks
Automatic.................................................... 30
Doors............................................................... 27
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter ............386
Driver Memory Presets ..................................265
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 35
Driving
Off-Pavement............................................ 164
Off-Road ................................................... 164
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .................................... 233
Dual Rear Wheels ................................ 433, 439
E
Electric Brake Control System....................... 286
Anti-Lock Brake System............................ 285
Electronic Roll Mitigation................. 286, 291
Electrical Power Outlets ...................................73
Electronic Range Select (ERS) ............. 146, 150
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 287
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light...... 116
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case .... 152, 155
Emergency Braking....................................... 140
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck..................... 363
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 344
Jump Starting ........................................... 358
Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 125
Engine.........................................376, 377, 378
Air Cleaner................................................ 381
Block Heater.................................... 132, 139
Break-In Recommendations..................... 140
Compartment .................................. 377, 378
Compartment Identification...................... 376
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 447
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 342, 343
Fails To Start............................................. 128
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 128
Fuel Requirements .......................... 441, 446
Identification.................................... 377, 378
Idling......................................................... 136
Jump Starting ........................................... 358
Oil ...........................................380, 446, 447
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 376
Oil Filter .................................................... 381
Oil Reset ................................................... 105
Oil Selection.....................................380, 446
Oil Synthetic.............................................. 381
Overheating .............................................. 362
Runaway................................................... 211
Starting..................................................... 126
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ................................................ 322, 366
Entry System, Illuminated ................................58
Ethanol.......................................................... 442
Exhaust Brake............................................... 141
Exhaust Gas Cautions.......................... 342, 343
Exhaust System ..........................342, 393, 400
Exterior Lighting ...............................................51
Exterior Lights ........................................ 51, 342
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 458
459
F
Filters
Air Cleaner.................................................381
Air Conditioning..................................66, 384
Engine Fuel ...............................................386
Engine Oil ........................................ 381, 447
Engine Oil Disposal ...................................381
Flashers
Turn Signals ..............................55, 123, 342
Flash-To-Pass .................................................. 53
Flat Tire Stowage...........................................355
Fluid Capacities .............................................446
Fluid Leaks ....................................................342
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ........................................................397
Power Steering..........................................181
Fluid, Brake ...................................................450
Fog Lights ...............................................54, 414
Fold Flat Load Floor......................................... 71
Fold-Flat Seats................................................. 35
Forward Collision Warning.............................298
Four Wheel Drive ...........................................152
Four-Way Hazard Flasher...............................344
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................363
Front Axle (Differential)..................................399
Fuel ..................................................... 441, 443
Adding ............................................. 211, 212
Additives ...................................................441
Clean Air....................................................441
Diesel ....................................................... 443
Ethanol ..................................................... 442
Filler Cap (Gas Cap).................................. 212
Filter ......................................................... 386
Gasoline ................................................... 441
Light ......................................................... 118
Materials Added ....................................... 441
Methanol .................................................. 442
Octane Rating.................................. 441, 447
Requirements.........................441, 443, 446
Specifications........................................... 444
Tank Capacity........................................... 446
Fueling.......................................................... 212
Fuses ............................................................ 403
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink).....................48
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .............................. 212
Gasoline, Clean Air........................................ 441
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 441
Gauges
Voltage ..................................................... 135
Gear Ranges................................................. 148
Gear Selector Override ................................. 360
Glass Cleaning.............................................. 438
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 217
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating......................... 216
Guide
Body Builders ..............................................10
GVWR............................................................ 215
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .................................... 233
Hazard Warning Flashers.............................. 344
Head Restraints ...............................................40
Head Rests ......................................................40
Headlights..................................................... 412
Automatic High Beam..................................53
Cleaning.................................................... 435
High Beam...................................................52
Lights On Reminder .....................................54
Passing ........................................................53
Switch..........................................................51
Heated Mirrors.................................................47
Heated Seats ...................................................38
Heater, Engine Block..................................... 139
Hill Descent Control ...................................... 289
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 289
Hill Start Assist.............................................. 290
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 220
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................48
Hood Prop ........................................................80
Hood Release...................................................80
Hub Caps ...................................................... 357
11
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 459
460
I
Idle-Up Feature..............................................137
Ignition ............................................................ 21
Switch ......................................................... 21
Illuminated Entry ............................................. 58
Inside Rearview Mirror............................43, 345
Instrument Cluster.............101, 102, 103, 104
Display ......................................................104
Display Controls ........................................105
Engine Oil Reset........................................105
Instrument Cluster Display
Driver Assist ..............................................106
Fuel Economy............................................107
Off Road ....................................................107
Speedometer ............................................106
Trip............................................................108
Vehicle Info ...............................................106
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning....................438
Integrated Trailer Brake Control ....................222
Interior Appearance Care...............................437
Interior Lights .................................................. 56
Intervention Regeneration Strategy..... 110, 390
Inverter Outlet (115V)......................................74
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ................................... 72
J
Jack Location.................................................348
Jump Starting ................................................358
K
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs...............20
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry)....................................19
Key Fob Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry)....................................20
Keyless Enter-N-Go ....................... 28, 126, 130
Passive Entry...............................................28
Keys.................................................................18
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals ........................55
Lane Change Assist .........................................55
LaneSense.................................................... 198
Latches......................................................... 342
Hood............................................................80
Lead Free Gasoline....................................... 441
Leaks, Fluid .................................................. 342
Life Of Tires................................................... 426
Light Bulbs........................................... 342, 410
Lights............................................................ 342
Air Bag.................................... 114, 316, 341
Automatic High Beam..................................53
Brake Assist Warning ............................... 288
Brake Warning.......................................... 115
Bulb Replacement.................................... 410
Cab Top Clearance ................................... 415
Cargo..................................................55, 121
Center Mounted Stop ............................... 415
Courtesy/Reading........................................56
Cruise .............................................. 122, 123
Daytime Running .........................................52
ECO........................................................... 123
Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Indicator ............................................... 116
Exterior .............................................. 51, 342
Fog................................................... 123, 414
Four Wheel Drive Indicator ....................... 160
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 344
Headlights ............................................51, 53
High Beam...................................................52
Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 289
Illuminated Entry .........................................58
Interior.........................................................56
LaneSense..............................118, 119, 123
Lights On Reminder .....................................54
Low Fuel ................................................... 118
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)....... 118
NEUTRAL .................................................. 121
Park .......................................................... 123
Passing ........................................................53
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 116
Security Alarm .......................................... 117
Service...................................................... 410
Side Marker .............................................. 416
Snowplow ................................................. 122
Traction Control ........................................ 288
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 460
461
Trailer Hitch................................................. 55
Transfer Case............................................160
Turn Signals ........... 55, 123, 342, 412, 414
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions..116
Limited-Slip Differential ....................... 172, 400
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .....................113
Load Shed Battery Saver On..........................113
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ............113
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............113
Loading Vehicle .............................................215
Tires ..........................................................421
Locks
Automatic Door ........................................... 30
Child Protection........................................... 30
Power Door.................................................. 28
Low Tire Pressure System .............................300
Lubrication, Body...........................................390
Lug Nuts/Bolts ..............................................439
M
Maintenance ................................................... 80
Maintenance Free Battery .............................379
Maintenance Plan .........................................371
Maintenance Schedule........................ 367, 371
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine) .................................... 118, 125
Manual
Park Release.............................................361
Service ......................................................454
Media Hub .......................................................72
Media Mode.................................................. 266
Memory Seat ...................................................34
Memory Settings..............................................34
Methanol ...................................................... 442
Mirrors .............................................................43
Electric Powered..........................................45
Heated.........................................................47
Memory .......................................................34
Outside........................................................44
Rearview.............................................43, 345
Trailer Towing ..............................................47
Mirrors, Digital .................................................43
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle.........................................................12
Monitor, Tire Pressure System...................... 300
Mopar Parts .................................................. 454
MP3 Control.....................................................72
Multi-Function Control Lever............................52
N
Navigation System (Uconnect GPS) .............. 200
New Vehicle Break-In Period......................... 140
Noise Control
Maintenance ............................................ 400
Tampering Prohibited ............................... 401
Noise Emission Warranty..................... 400, 401
O
Occupant Restraints ..................................... 307
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel)...................... 441
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) .......... 164, 234
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) .......... 164, 234
Oil Filter, Change........................................... 381
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 381
Oil Pressure Light.......................................... 116
Oil Reset ....................................................... 105
Oil, Engine............................................380, 447
Capacity.................................................... 446
Dipstick..................................................... 379
Disposal.................................................... 381
Filter ................................................ 381, 447
Filter Disposal........................................... 381
Identification Logo .................................... 381
Materials Added To................................... 381
Pressure Warning Light............................. 116
Recommendation ............................ 380, 446
Synthetic................................................... 381
Viscosity.................................................... 446
Onboard Diagnostic System.......................... 124
Operating Precautions .................................. 124
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual........................................ 454
Outside Rearview Mirrors.................................44
Overdrive....................................................... 151
Overdrive OFF Switch .................................... 151
Overheating, Engine...................................... 362
11
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 461
462
P
Paint Care......................................................435
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
b
.....................................................271
Parking Brake................................................140
ParkSense System, Rear ...............................193
Passive Entry ................................................... 28
Pedals, Adjustable ........................................... 42
Pets ...............................................................340
Phone Mode ..................................................269
Pickup Box................................................ 84, 87
Pinch Protection .............................................. 80
Placard, Tire And Loading Information...........421
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) .......................403
Door Locks .................................................. 28
Mirrors......................................................... 45
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ......... 73, 74
Seats........................................................... 37
Side Steps................................................... 28
Sliding Rear Window ................................... 78
Steering..............................................45, 181
Sunroof ....................................................... 79
Windows...................................................... 77
Power Seats
Down........................................................... 37
Forward ....................................................... 37
Rearward..................................................... 37
Recline ........................................................37
Tilt ...............................................................37
Up................................................................37
Power Steering Fluid..................................... 450
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts.................. 314
Presets ......................................................... 265
Pretensioners
Seat Belts................................................. 314
Profile Settings ............................................. 238
Programmable Features ............................... 236
R
Radial Ply Tires ............................................. 424
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .. 394, 395
Radio
Presets ..................................................... 265
Settings .................................................... 236
Radio Controls .............................................. 259
Radio Mode .................................................. 259
Radio Operation................................... 259, 278
Radio Remote Controls................................. 259
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...........................59
Ramp Travel Index ........................................ 164
Rear Axle (Differential)......................... 399, 400
Rear Camera................................................. 202
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ............................86
Rear Cross Path............................................ 295
Rear ParkSense System................................ 193
Rear Window, Sliding .......................................78
Reclining Rear Seats........................................36
Recreational Towing...................................... 229
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N)..... 231
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N)............................................ 232
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 441
Refrigerant.................................................... 383
Release, Hood..................................................80
Release, Tailgate .............................................81
Reminder, Seat Belt...................................... 308
Remote Keyless Entry
Programming Additional Key Fobs...............20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control......... 259
Remote Start (Diesel).......................................25
Remote Start (Gasoline)...................................22
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode...............................24
Replacement Bulbs....................................... 410
Replacement Tires........................................ 426
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 454
Restraints, Child............................................ 323
Restraints, Head ..............................................40
Rotation, Tires............................................... 432
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 462
463
S
Safety ............................................................258
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.........................340
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................342
Safety Defects, Reporting..............................454
Safety Features .............................................258
Safety Information, Tire .................................417
Safety Tips.....................................................340
Safety, Exhaust Gas.......................................342
Satellite Radio ...............................................261
Saved Radio Stations ....................................265
Schedule, Maintenance.................................367
Seat Belt Reminder .......................................116
Seat Belts ............................................ 308, 340
Adjustable Shoulder Belt...........................311
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage......311
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage.............................................311
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)............314
Child Restraints.........................................323
Energy Management Feature....................314
Extender....................................................313
Front Seat ....................................... 308, 310
Inspection .................................................340
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ....................310
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...................311
Operating Instructions...............................310
Pregnant Women ......................................314
Pretensioners ........................................... 314
Reminder.................................................. 308
Seat Belt Extender.................................... 313
Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 314
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 308
Untwisting Procedure ............................... 311
Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 437
Seats ................................................. 35, 36, 37
Adjustment ...........................................35, 37
Easy Entry....................................................38
Folding Floor................................................71
Head Restraints...........................................40
Memory .......................................................34
Power ..........................................................37
Rear Folding ................................................35
Reclining Rear .............................................36
Tilting...........................................................35
Security Alarm.........................................26, 117
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 447
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................21
Service Assistance........................................ 452
Service Contract ........................................... 453
Service Manuals ........................................... 454
Settings, Audio.............................................. 265
Shift Lever Override ...................................... 360
Shifting ......................................................... 142
Automatic Transmission .................. 144, 147
Transfer Case ........................................... 159
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N)............................................ 231
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Case Neutral (N)................................... 232
Side Steps, Power ............................................28
Signals, Turn .................................55, 123, 342
Sirius Satellite Radio..................................... 261
Favorites................................................... 263
Replay....................................................... 262
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM.......................................... 263
Favorites................................................... 263
Replay....................................................... 262
Sliding Rear Window, Power ............................78
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 430
Snow Plow..................................................... 227
Snow Tires .................................................... 427
Spare Tires...........................................427, 428
Speed Control
Accel/Decel .............................................. 183
Cancel....................................................... 183
Resume .................................................... 183
Speed Control (Cruise Control).............182, 184
Stabilizer/Sway Bar System .......................... 163
Starting ................................................ 126, 129
Automatic Transmission .................. 126, 130
Button..........................................................21
Cold Weather............................................ 129
11
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 463
464
Engine Block Heater..................................132
Engine Fails To Start .................................128
Starting And Operating ..................................126
Starting Procedures............................. 126, 129
Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines) ............129
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) ................126
Steering
Power ........................................................181
Tilt Column .................................................. 31
Wheel, Heated...................................... 31, 32
Wheel, Tilt ................................................... 31
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......................259
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System .......259
Steps, Power Side............................................ 28
Storage............................................................ 67
Storage Compartment, Center Seat ................ 67
Storage, Vehicle......................................66, 434
Store Radio Presets.......................................265
Storing Your Vehicle ......................................434
Sun Roof................................................... 79, 80
Sunglasses Storage......................................... 69
Sunshade Operation........................................ 80
Sway Control, Trailer......................................292
Synthetic Engine Oil.......................................381
T
Tailgate, Electronic Lowering ........................... 81
Telescoping Steering Column .......................... 31
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............65
Tilt
Down ...........................................................37
Up................................................................37
Tilt Steering Column ........................................31
Tip Start ............................................... 126, 130
Tire And Loading Information Placard........... 421
Tire Markings................................................ 417
Tire Safety Information ................................. 417
Tires...................................342, 423, 427, 433
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................. 426
Air Pressure .............................................. 423
Chains ...................................................... 430
Compact Spare......................................... 427
Dual................................................. 433, 439
General Information ........................ 423, 427
High Speed............................................... 424
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 424
Life Of Tires .............................................. 426
Load Capacity.................................. 421, 422
Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)............................ 119, 300
Quality Grading......................................... 433
Radial ....................................................... 424
Replacement ............................................ 426
Rotation.................................................... 432
Safety .............................................. 417, 423
Sizes......................................................... 418
Snow Tires ................................................ 427
Spare Tires ...................................... 427, 428
Spinning ................................................... 425
Trailer Towing ........................................... 221
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 425
Wheel Nut Torque..................................... 439
To Open Hood ..................................................80
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 220
Tonneau Cover....................................... 91, 435
Tonneau Cover Cleaning ............................... 435
Torque Converter Clutch ............................... 151
Tow Mode Mirror..............................................43
Towing.................................................. 216, 364
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 364
Guide ........................................................ 220
Recreational ............................................. 229
Weight ...................................................... 220
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 229
Traction......................................................... 233
Traction Control ............................................ 291
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 292
Trailer Towing................................................ 216
Hitches ..................................................... 220
Minimum Requirements ........................... 221
Mirrors .........................................................47
Tips........................................................... 226
Trailer And Tongue Weight........................ 220
Wiring ....................................................... 224
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 464
465
Trailer Towing Guide ......................................220
Trailer Weight ................................................220
Transfer Case ................................................400
Electronically Shifted....................... 152, 155
Fluid ..........................................................450
Transmission .................................................144
Automatic............................... 144, 147, 397
Fluid ..........................................................450
Maintenance .............................................397
Shifting......................................................142
Transporting Pets ..........................................340
Tread Wear Indicators ...................................425
Turn Signals......................... 55, 123, 412, 414
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features..................................274
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone....................................276
Uconnect Phone .................................. 270, 271
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress.............................275
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No
Call Currently In Progress......................275
Bluetooth Communication Link.................278
Call Continuation.......................................276
Call Controls ............................................. 274
Call Termination ....................................... 276
Cancel Command ..................................... 271
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing ............... 272
Help Command......................................... 270
Join Calls .................................................. 276
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Favorite ................................................ 273
Making A Second Call While Current
Call Is In Progress................................. 276
Managing Your Favorites.......................... 273
Natural Speech......................................... 270
Operation ................................................. 270
Overview................................................... 269
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone................................................... 271
Phonebook Download .............................. 273
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold .............. 275
Power-Up .................................................. 278
Recent Calls ............................................. 274
Redial ....................................................... 276
To Remove A Favorite............................... 273
Toggling Between Calls............................. 276
Touch-Tone Number Entry........................ 274
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ....276
Voice Command ....................................... 276
Uconnect Settings......................................... 236
Customer Programmable Features..............28
Passive Entry Programming.........................28
Uconnect System .......................................... 256
Uconnect Voice Command...............................32
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 433
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
b
..................48
Unleaded Gasoline........................................ 441
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt.................... 311
USB..................................................................72
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area ...........................86
V
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 439
Vehicle Loading.................................... 215, 422
Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 380
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................12
Vehicle Settings ............................................ 236
Vehicle Storage...................................... 66, 434
Ventilated Seats...............................................39
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................32
Voltmeter ...................................................... 135
11
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 465
466
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions) .................................................118
Warranty Information.....................................453
Washers, Windshield .....................................379
Washing Vehicle ............................................435
Water
Driving Through.........................................233
Water Separator
Diesel Fuel ................................................386
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...........................429
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim............................429
Wheel Covers.................................................357
Winch ............................................................173
Accessories ...............................................174
Operation ..................................................174
Rigging Techniques ...................................180
Usage ........................................................173
Wind Buffeting .................................................78
Window Fogging...............................................66
Windows ..........................................................77
Power ..........................................................77
Rear Sliding .................................................78
Reset Auto-Up..............................................78
Windshield Defroster .................................... 341
Windshield Washers ...............................58, 379
Fluid ......................................................... 379
Windshield Wiper Blades.............................. 391
Windshield Wipers ...........................................58
Wipers Blade Replacement .......................... 391
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................59
Wireless Charging Pad .....................................76
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 466
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in
an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that
may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation
or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also
dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull
off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It
is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference
for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when
you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
THIRD EDITION V2
22_DJD2_OM_EN_USC
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
USA
